Helen Younansardaroud

Classical Syriac Course Book

Translated by

Graham Wetherall

Second, Revised Edition

Berlin 2019

Berlin: Universitätsbibliothek der Freien Universität 978-3-96110-233-4 (online)

Contents

Foreword ...... VIII Lesson 1 ...... 1 1. 1. Introduction and Classification ...... 1 1. 2. Attested Alphabetic Scripts ...... 1 1. 3. Table ...... 3 1. 4. Writing the Consonants in the Eastern Syriac and Ser ṭō Scripts ...... 4 1. 4. 1. Ligatures ...... 7 1. 5. The Eastern Syriac Vowel System ...... 8 1. 6. The Western Syriac Vowel System ...... 8 1. 7. Transcription Employed in this Book ...... 9 1. 8. Vowel Correspondences between ES and WS ...... 9 1. 9. Vowel ...... 10 1. 9. 1. Assimilation /a/ > /e/ ...... 10 1. 9. 2. Assimilation /u/ > /o/ (only in ES) ...... 11 1. 10. ...... 11 1. 11. Vocabulary ...... 12 1. 12. Exercises ...... 12 Lesson 2 ...... 13 2. 1. Consonants in the ES and Ser ṭō Scripts ...... 13 2. 2. The Two Pronunciations of the Bḡaḏkp ̄ aṯ-Consonants...... 13 2. 2. 1. Writing Geminate Consonants ...... 15 2. 2. 2. The ʾÅlap ̄ ...... 15 2. 3. Prothesis ...... 15 2. 4. Graphic Symbols and Marks ...... 16 2. 4. 2. Punctuation Marks ...... 16 2. 4. 3. Linea Occultans ...... 16 2. 5. Vocabulary ...... 17 2. 6. Exercises ...... 17 Lesson 3 ...... 18 3. 1. Total Assimilation of Consonants (/n/, /l/) ...... 18 3. 1. 1. The Assimilation of Dentals ...... 18 3. 2. Consonant Dissimilation ...... 18 3. 3. Consonant Correspondences: Syriac – Hebrew - ...... 19 3. 4. Syllable Structure and Vowel Reduction ...... 19 3. 5. Root Structure ...... 20 IV Contents

3. 6. Nominals ...... 20 3. 6. 1. Gender, Number, State ...... 20 3. 6. 2. Irregular Nominals ...... 23 3. 6. 3. Nominals and Attributive Adjectives ...... 25 3. 6. 4. Nominals and Apposition...... 25 3. 7. Vocabulary ...... 25 3. 8. Exercises ...... 26 Lesson 4 ...... 27 4. 1. Important Types of Nominal Formation ...... 27 4. 1. 1. Monosyllabic Root ...... 27 4. 1. 2. Disyllabic Root ...... 27 4. 1. 3. With Prefixes (/ma-/, /mi-/, /ta-/) ...... 29 4. 1. 4. With Affixes ( /ån /, /ōn/) ...... 29 4. 2. Particularities of * /qV ṭl/-Nominals ...... 30 4. 3. The Determinative Pronoun /d-/ ...... 30 4. 4. Active Participle (Base Stem) ...... 31 4. 5. Vocabulary ...... 31 4. 6. Exercises ...... 32 Lesson 5 ...... 34 5. 1. Independent and Enclitic Personal Pronouns ...... 34 5. 1. 1. The Active Participle with the Enclitic Personal Pronoun as Expression of the Present ...... 34 5. 1. 2. The Enclitic Personal Pronoun as Copula in Nominal Clauses ...... 35 5. 2. Demonstrative Pronouns ...... 36 5. 3. Interrogative Pronouns and Adverbs ...... 37 5. 4. Words for »Somebody« and »Something« ...... 37 5. 5. kol »every, all« ...... 38 5. 6. Reflexive Expressions ...... 38 5. 7. Vocabulary ...... 39 5. 8. Exercises ...... 39 Lesson 6 ...... 41 6. 1. Pronominal Suffixes (Possessive Suffixes) ...... 41 6. 2. */qV ṭl/-Nominals with Possessive Suffixes ...... 42 6. 3. Irregular Nominals with Possessive Suffixes ...... 43 6. 4. Prepositions with Pronominal Suffixes ...... 44 6. 5. Pronominal Suffixes (Object Suffixes) ...... 45 6. 6. The Verb of Existence /ʾīṯ/ ...... 45 6. 7. Vocabulary ...... 46 6. 8. Exercises ...... 47 Contents V

Lesson 7 ...... 48 7. 1. The Perfect: Basic Stem ...... 48 7. 2. The Preposition /l-/ ...... 49 7. 3. The Perfect Form of the Verb of Being /hwå/ ...... 50 7. 3. 1. Indicating Focus with the Enclitic /-hū/ ...... 50 7. 4. The Passive Participle ...... 51 7. 5. Adverbs ending in /-åʾīṯ/ ...... 51 7. 6. Vocabulary ...... 51 7. 7. Exercises ...... 52 Lesson 8 ...... 54 8. 1. The Imperfect: Basic Stem ...... 54 8. 2. The Imperative: Basic Stem...... 56 8. 3. The Infinitive: Basic Stem ...... 56 8. 4. The So-Called dativus ethicus ...... 57 8. 5. Negation of Words and Clauses ...... 57 8. 6. Vocabulary ...... 58 8. 7. Exercises ...... 59 Lesson 9 ...... 60 9. 1. The Verb Stem System: Introduction ...... 60 9. 2. The Paradigm of the Verb Stems ...... 62 9. 3. Remarks on Some Forms in the Paradigms ...... 68 9. 4. Other (unproductive) Verb Stems: Šap̄ ʽel, ʾEštap ̄ ʽal ...... 69 9. 5. Vocabulary ...... 70 9. 6. Exercises ...... 71 Lesson 10 ...... 72 10. 1. Distinctive Characteristics of Verbs with a Pharyngal or an /r/ as 3 rd Radical ...... 72 10. 2. Distinctive Characteristics of Verbs with a Sibilant as 1 st Radical ...... 72 10. 3. Verbs with Object Suffixes: Introduction ...... 72 10. 4. The Perfect with Object Suffixes ...... 75 10. 5. The Imperfect with Object Suffixes ...... 78 10. 6. The Imperative with Object Suffixes ...... 79 10. 7. The Infinitive with Object Suffixes ...... 80 10. 8. Vocabulary ...... 81 10. 9. Exercises ...... 82 Lesson 11 ...... 83 11. 1. Weak Verbs: I-n Verbs ...... 83 11. 2. I-ʾÅlap ̄ Verbs ...... 86 11. 3. I-y Verbs ...... 90 VI Contents

11. 4. The Tense System: Perfect, Active Participle, Imperfect ...... 93 11. 5. The Passive Participle ...... 95 11. 6. Composite Constructions with /hwå/ ...... 96 11. 7. Vocabulary ...... 97 11. 8. Exercises ...... 98 Lesson 12 ...... 100 12. 1. II-ʾÅlap ̄ Verbs ...... 100 12. 2. II-w and II-y Verbs ...... 103 12. 3. II=III Verbs (mediae geminatae) ...... 107 12. 4. II-h Verbs ...... 110 12. 5. Vocabulary ...... 110 12. 6. Exercises ...... 111 Lesson 13 ...... 113 13. 1. III-y Verbs (including III-w and III-ʾÅlap ̄ ) ...... 113 13. 2. III-y Verbs with Object Suffixes ...... 117 13. 3. Cardinal Numbers ...... 121 13. 4. Ordinal Numbers ...... 122 13. 5. Other Expressions of Number ...... 123 13. 6. Vocabulary ...... 123 13. 7. Exercises ...... 124 Lesson 14 ...... 126 14. 1. Verbs with Two Weak Radicals ...... 126 14. 2. Irregular Verbs ...... 126 14. 3. Note on Word Order in Verbal Clauses ...... 128 14. 4. Verbs with Proleptic Object Suffixes ...... 128 14. 5. Question Clauses ...... 129 14. 6. Subordinate Clauses ...... 129 14. 7. Conditional Clauses ...... 130 14. 8. Vocabulary ...... 131 14. 9. Exercises ...... 131 Lesson 15 ...... 133 15. 1. Verbs with Four Radicals and Related Matters ...... 133 15. 2. Verbs with Five Radicals ...... 134 15. 3. Expressions of Comparison ...... 135 15. 5. Pendens Constructions ...... 135 15. 6. Vocabulary ...... 135 15. 7. Exercises ...... 136 Glossary ...... 130 Contents VII

Abbreviations ...... 154 List of Symbols ...... 155 Abbreviations of biblical books ...... 156 Bibliography ...... 153 and Abbreviations for Works Cited ...... 153

Foreword

The following book was assembled from teaching materials developed for Syriac lessons. The has been repeatedly reworked on the basis of experience in the seminar room. In this way, the encouragement and suggestions for improvement of Prof. Dr. Josef Tropper (Humboldt University, Berlin) have helped shape this book. The process of constant revision of the manuscript could, of course, have continued over many further semesters, and it is certain that the book's readers will find that some parts remain deficient. In spite of these reservations, however, I have decided to publish this work in its current form in the hope that it will be a useful scholarly resource for academic Syriac lessons. Over the course of 15 lessons, it addresses all areas of Syriac grammar, with an increasing level of difficulty. The lessons are accompanied by corresponding exercises. The texts used for the exercises are drawn from classical , and serve to illustrate the grammatical themes addressed in the lesson. Each lesson also contains a table of vocabulary prior to the exercises. Knowledge of the vocabulary presented in the lesson is assumed. Beginning with Lesson 8, verb forms are presented separately, following the vocabulary table. At the back of the book, you will find a glossary and a bibliography. The original work from 2012 was comprehensively corrected by my teacher, Professor Emeritus Dr. Rainer Voigt, for which I owe him particular thanks. I would also like to thank him for including the original German monograph in the series Semitica et semitohamitica Berolinensia . This edition is a corrected and heavily revised version of the original, translated into English by Mr. Graham Wetherall (M.A.). I am very grateful to him for his dedication and hard work. I would also like to thank PD Dr. Michael Waltisberg, Dr. Yousef Kouriyhe, Dr. Stefanie Rudolf and Nathanael Landy-Ariel for their valuable remarks and corrections.

Berlin, March 2019 Helen Younansardaroud

Lesson 1 1. 1. Introduction and Classification

Classical Syriac (hereafter Syriac ) belongs to the Eastern group of languages, which together with the Canaanite languages (Phoenician, Hebrew etc.) make up the Northwestern group of . The earliest known written examples of Aramaic languages date back to the beginning of the 1st millennium BC. From the 6 th century BC, Aramaic enjoyed a period of flourishing during the Neo-Babylonian and Achaemenid Empires, at which time it became the language of trade throughout the whole of the , advancing from Egypt/Asia Minor to India/Central Asia (the era of so-called ). Aramaic first went into decline in the West following the Muslim conquest of the 7 th Century AD. Aramaic languages have survived to the present day in certain parts of Syria, the southeast of Turkey, and Iran.

Syriac is an offshoot of the local Eastern Aramaic dialect of the city of Edessa, which is fairly closely related to Jewish Babylonian Aramaic on the one hand, and Mandaic on the other. The oldest evidence of the language are inscriptions dating from the 1 st century AD. In the wake of the early Christianisation, Syriac Bible translations emerged as early as the 2 nd century AD (Vetus Syra and Pšīṭtå). As a result, Syriac became a significant Christian literary language in the Syrian-Mesopotamian region, with two important centres in Nisibis (under Persian rule) and Edessa (under Roman rule). Due to this political and geographical separation, two different written forms of Syriac emerged (East Syriac and West Syriac).

Beginning in the 7 th century, Syriac was increasingly supplanted by Arabic as a spoken language. Nonetheless, it remained in wide usage in the church and amongst scholars until the Mongol invasion of the 13 th century. Dialects closely related to Syriac have survived to the present day. The most important of these include: a) Ṭūrōyo(spoken in Ṭūr ‛Abdīn, South-East Turkey) and related dialects (including Suryōyō ., ’Ōrōmōyō , etc.); and b) Northeastern Neo- Aramaic (spoken mostly in Iran, Iraq and Syria), which incorporates a wide variety of dialects (including ’Ātōråyå ., Surat . and Swådåyå ).

The volume of Syriac literature is far greater than that of any other Aramaic language. It predominantly comprises Bible translations and commentaries, legends and other religious texts. Nonetheless, there are also extant works of history, profane literature and poetry.

1. 2. Attested Alphabetic Scripts Classical Syriac, like other Semitic languages, uses an alphabet composed solely of consonants. There are three variants of the , each with slightly different forms: 2 Lesson 1

(1) Esṭrangelå, the oldest form, (2) The Eastern Syriac ( Nestorian ) script, which arose from a regional variation of Esṭrangelå (traceable to around 600 AD), (3) The Western Syriac script, known as Serṭō ., which has a decisively rounded, arched character form (traceable to around the 8th Century). All three variants are in principle scripts. It is characteristic of the scripts that most (though not all) letters are written joined up, and that some letters take a specific form when written at the end of a word. Serṭō . is the most fluidly cursive of the scripts.

Below is a table showing Serṭō, and Eastern Syriac scripts, together with a guide to pronunciation 1.

1 Typeset: Gentium, Estrangolo Edessa, Serto , East Syriac , Traditional Arabic, SBL Hebrew (Syriac fonts used with the kind permission of http://bethmadutho.org/ and http://jaas.org/). Lesson 1 3

1. 3. Alphabet Table

LEFT RANGELÅ RANGELÅ RIGHT SYRIAC ARABIC Ṭ EASTERN CENTRAL POSITION ISOLATED HEBWREW HEBWREW

ES JOINED JOINED TO THE JOINED TO THE TRANSCRIPTION ʾÅlap̄/ ʾ ﺍ א a@ @ČÑđÛča ʾŌlap̄ ܐ ﺏ ב l @òîĆi @ Bȩ̄ṯ ܒ b/ḇ

@Ýđàčç Gåmal/ ﺝ ג ê ܓ g/ḡ Gōmal Dålaḏ/ d/ḏ ﺩ ד Ł†đÛč… Dōlaḏ … ܕ ﺓ ה ô dĆô Hȩ̄ ܗ h Wå’w/ w ﻭ ו ë ëaë Wa’w ܘ HåíĆ‹I@åí‹ Zayn/ ﺯ ז › ܙ z Zȩ̄n ﺡ ח òîĆy Ḥȩ̄ṯ@ € ܚ ḥ ﻁ ט  @òî Ṭȩ̄ṯ ܛ ṭ ﻱ י ð @Ł…þìí Yōḏ/Yūḏ ܝ j ﻙ כ k/ḵ Ù× ČÑč×@ Kåp̄/Kōp̄ Låmaḏ/ l ﻝ ל Þ @Ł†đàčÛ Lōmaḏ ܠ ﻡ מ m áß @ánß Mīm ﻥ נ n åã @æŁìã Nūn @òđØàfl ﺱ ס Semkaṯ ÷ ܣ s ﻉ ע Ê @dĆÇ ʿĒ ܥ ʿ

ﻑ פ Ò @dÏ Pȩ̄ ܦ p/p̄ Ṣåḏȩ̄/ ṣ ﺹ צ ú @aŁ…ú Ṣōḏȩ̄ ܨ ﻕ ק Ö @ČÒþìÓ Qōp̄/Qūp̄ ܩ q ﺭ ר Ɖ Rẹ̄š/Rīš”@ ‰ ܪ r ﺵ ש Šīn ‘³@ ” ܫ ﺕ ת /ñ @ëačñ Tå’w ܬ t/ṯ

Ta’w 4 Lesson 1

1. 4. Writing the Consonants in the Eastern Syriac and Ser ṭō Scripts

Syriac is written from right to left. 2 The form of the letters varies according to whether they are written in isolation, or occur at the beginning, in the middle or at the end of a word (see the alphabet table → 1. 3.) . Most of the letters change their form when they are written as part of a word. The table above shows all of these forms for Serṭō .; for Esṭrangelå and Eastern Syriac, only the main forms and actual final forms are given. The three consonants Ú /k/, â /m/, and æ /n/ all have special forms when written at the end of a word. Here are some examples from Serṭō and Eastern Syriac:

JOINED TO THE CENTRAL JOINED TO THE ES RIGHT (WS) POSITION (WS) LEFT (WS)

3 1 2

ʾÅlap̄/ 1 1 ʾŌlap̄ 2

1 2 2 1 Bȩ̄ṯ 3 2 3 1

3 1 1 Gåmal/ 2 1 Gōmal 2 4 2

Dålaḏ/ 1 1 3 1 3 Dōlaḏ 2 2 2 4 Hȩ̄ 1 2

4 3 1 3 2 2 1

Wå’w/ 1 1 3 2 1 2 Wa’w 2

2 See the following websites for further information on Syriac notation: and (last accessed 24.03.2019). Lesson 1 5

1 1 1 Zayn/Zȩ̄n 3 2

1 1 Ḥȩ̄ṯ 2 1 4 3 2 2

1 3 1 2 Ṭȩ̄ṯ 2 4 3 3 1 5 4 2

1 2 Yōḏ/Yūḏ 1 1 2 2 3

1 1 1 3 2 Kåp̄/Kōp̄ 2 1 2 4 2 3 3

1 2 Låmaḏ/ 2 1 1 Lōmaḏ 2 4 3

2 1

3 1 4 3 1 3 Mīm 4 2 5 2 2 5 4 3 1

2 1 2 1 2 1 Nūn 1 2 3 6 Lektion 1

3 1 5 3 1 Semkaṯ 2 6 2 4 4

3 2 1 2 4 2 ʿĒ 1 1 3 3 4

1 2 Pȩ̄ 2 1 2 3 3 1

Ṣåḏȩ̄/ 1 2 3 1 2 Ṣōḏȩ̄ 3 4

4 2 1 3 3 1 2 Qōp̄/Qūp̄ 1 4 3 5 2

2 1 3 4 1 Rẹ̄š/Rīš 3 1 2 2

3 1 3 2 2 2 Šīn 1 1 4 3 4

3 1 Tå’w/ 2 2 2 4 1 1 Ta’w 3

Lesson 1 7

1. 4. 1. Ligatures The following letters take on a new form in combination with other letters:

OS: Låmaḏ, lå ʾellå ʾÅlap̄ »not « »but« hčÛ@ hčÛa

WS: Lōmaḏ, lō ʾellō ʾŌlap̄ »not« »but« @

OS: mallel Låmaḏ, » spoke« Låmaḏ ÝÛ@ ÝÜđß

WS: mallel Lōmaḏ, »he spoke« Lōmaḏ

OS: baytå Tå’w, »house« ʾÅlap̄ Ã@ ğčÅîđi WS: Ta’w, baytō ʾŌlap̄ »house«

8 Lektion 1

1. 5. The Eastern Syriac Vowel System Eastern Syriac employs a system of diacritical dots which serve to denote the following eight vowels:

/a/ đÀÀÀ dčyČčòÏ pṯåḥå /å/ čÀÀÀ dčÐčÓ‹ zqåpå /e/ flÀÀÀ dčÔn’Ï@dčàčÛ‹ / dč¥‰đa @cõûčq‰ rḇåṣå ’arrīḵå/zlåmå pšīqå /ȩ/, /ẹ/ 3 ĆÀÀÀ dčî’đÓ@dčàčÛ‹ / dčíŠđ× @cõûčq‰ rḇåṣå karyå/zlåmå qašyå /i/ p cõûčr y@Ł…þìí yōḏ ḥḇåṣå /o/ þë dč¤ ëaë@‰ë wåw rwīḥå /u/ Łë cõûnÛđa @ëaë wåw ’alīṣå

National grammarians such as Hebraeus draw a further distinction in the case of /ē/, distinguishing a closed from an open e-vowel. This distinction is also observed in this book: the open variant is transcribed as /ȩ̄/, and the closed variant with /ẹ̄/ (traditionally, both are simply written as /ē/). This system essentially only distinguishes vowel qualities, even though the Syriac names suggest a distinction between long or short sounds – a distinction one would also expect from the language-historical point of view. According to this system, the difference between /å/ (Zqåp̄å) (trad. /ā/) and /a/ (Pṯåḥå) does not concern the length (quantity), but rather the degree of openness of the vowel. Zqåp̄å is pronounced as an open a, i.e. as /å/ [ɔ]; by contrast, Pṯåḥå is pronounced as a closed /a/. Handwritten sources often show up deviations in the transcription of vowels (in particular /å/ instead of /a/). The Eastern Syriac vowel system is multifaceted, and is better suited to the learning of the language than the Western Syriac system, in which vowels are less clearly distinguished from one another. As such, we encourage the use of the Eastern Syriac pronunciation for learners of the language.

1. 6. The Western Syriac Vowel System The older variant of Syriac was written entirely without vowel signs. Instead, they made use of plene-writing ( → 1. 8.) and so-called grammatical dots ( → 2. 4.). Specific vowel signs used in addition to matres lectionis first emerged at the end of the classical period. Different systems were developed in Eastern and Western Syriac.

3 /ẹ/ is also referred to as yōḏ massaqṯå in the literature.

Lesson 1 9

In the 8 th Century, Western Syriac began to make use of Greek vowel signs written above or underneath consonants. This system distinguishes between five vowel qualities:

/a/ pṯōḥō /o/ zqōp̄ō /e/ rḇōṣō /i/ ḥḇōṣō /u/ ʿṣōṣō

1. 7. Transcription Employed in this Book The transcription of vowels in this textbook is based on the Eastern Syriac vowel system. As such, it differentiates between the following vowel qualities (cf. → 1. 8.): /a/, /å/, /e/, /ȩ̄/ẹ̄/, /ī/, /ō/, /ū/.

For historical-etymological reasons, as well as for the sake of the clarity of the syllable structures and various sound changes, this book also distinguishes vowel lengths. In this manner, the symbols /a/ and /e/ are understood to be short vowels, while the symbols /å/, /ȩ̄/ (open) and /ẹ̄/ (close) denote long vowels. Furthermore, in the case of /u/ and /o/, a distinction is made between historically short vowels (/u/, /o/) and long vowels (/ū/, /ō/) . Examples: dč‘Ł…ŁìÓ /quḏšå / »sanctuary« cČčñŁìØÜđß /malkūṯå/ »kingdom« Ý× /kol / (WS /kul /) »every, all« dčÓþëŠčÏ /pårōqå/ »saviour« For certain Western Syriac word forms and pronunciation variations, a transcription is occasionally provided, e.g. Ý× /kol / (WS /kul /) »every, all«. vowels (in the sense of the Hebrew shewa mobile ) are not taken into account in the notation, e.g. /qṭal / instead of /qeṭal /. In the notation used in this book, unspoken consonants are written in superscript (with or without linea occultans → 3. 1.; 7. 3.), e.g.: cČčñòžãđa /’anttå / »woman, wife« cì žô@Ł†flrčÇ /‛åḇeḏ-hwå / »he was making« ƒíđa /ʾayḵ/ »like«

1. 8. Vowel Correspondences between ES and WS

The following table shows vowel correspondences between Eastern and Western Syriac (unequal correspondences are shown in bold):

OS /a/ đÀÀÀ /å/ čÀÀÀ /e/ flÀÀÀ /ȩ̄/ ĆÀÀÀ /ẹ̄/ ĆÀÀÀ /ī/ p /o/ō/ þë /u/ū/ Łë WS /a/ /ō/ /e/ /ȩ̄/ /ī/ /ī/ /u/ ū/ /u/ū/ 10 Lektion 1

As the table shows, WS is characterised by a tendency towards vowel narrowing (a reduction of the degree of openness), as well as by chain shifts. As such, /å/ is no longer present in WS, all /o/ō/ vowels become /u/ū/, and all closed /ẹ̄/ vowels become /ī/. Examples of similar vowel correspondences:

ES WS ÝđÇ /‛al/ /‛al/ on, because of O/åflß /men / / /men / from åíĆ… /dȩ̄n/ /dȩ̄n/ but

“ni /bīš/ /bīš/ bad

Examples for /å/ (trad. /ā/) > /ō/; /ẹ̄/ (trad. /ē/) > /ī/; /o/ō/ > /u/ū/:

ES WS dčàčÜ‘ @ /šlåmå/ /šlōmō/ peace a‰bĆi @ /bẹ̄ʾrå/ /bī ʾrō/ a well Ý× @ /kol / /kul / every, all cČčñþì úÛ @ /ṣlōṯå/ /ṣlūṯō/ prayer

The 22 letters of the Syriac script essentially constitute a purely consonantal alphabet. Nonetheless, three letters, namely ’ålap̄ (a), wå’w (ë) and yōḏ (ð), are also used to denote vowels (so-called plene-writing) , mostly originally long vowels: • Yōḏ (ð) stands for /ī/ and, in the middle of a word, for (closed) /ẹ̄/ (= WS /ī/) and (open) /ȩ̄/. Examples: åíĆ… /dȩ̄n / »but, by the way, however«, ´Üô /hålȩ̄n / »these«, “ni /bīš/ »bad«, íƉč’d /rẹ̄šå/ (WS /rīšō/) »head«. In the case of Ɖč‘d /rẹ̄šå/ (WS /rīšō/) »head«, spellings without the corresponding vowel letters (so-called defective spellings) are common. • Wå’w (ë) stands for /u/o / (= WS /u/), and also not infrequently for historically short vowels. Examples: dčÀÀğiŁìy /ḥubbå / »love«, cč þìğjyÀò ‘ñ /tešboḥtå/ (WS /tešbuḥtō/) »glory«. Defective spellings are common for Ý× /kol / (older form: Þþì× ) (WS /kul/) »every, all« and Ýİflß /meṭṭol / (older form: Þþìİß ) (WS /meṭṭul /) »because of«. • ’Ålap̄ (a) stands for any /å/ (= WS /ō/), /ȩ̄/ or /ẹ̄/ at the end of a word. Examples: dčÀÀØÜđß /malkå / »king«, dĆşÀÀØÜđß /malkȩ̄/ »kings« (pl. → 3. 6. 1.), dĆã /nẹ̄/ (WS /nī/) »I beg!«.

1. 9. Vowel Assimilation 1. 9. 1. Assimilation /a/ > /e/

Before /š/, and occasionally also before /s/, an /a/ vowel sound becomes an /e/, e.g. cčò’ñğ /tešmeštå / < */tašmeštå / »ministry, service«

Lesson 1 11

‰đòŽfliğ /bestar / < */bastar / »behind« aŠŽfli /besrå / < */basarå / »flesh«

1. 9. 2. Assimilation /u/ > /o/ (only in ES)

In ES, preceding a guttural sound, an /r/ or an /l/, /u/ sometimes becomes /o/ (in WS, it remains /u/), e.g. Êþì’m /Īšō‛/ »« (WS /Yešū‛/) /z‛ōrå / »small, junior« (WS /z‛ūrō/) a‰þìÇ‹ hčÛþ룆ç /gḏōlå / »plaits of hair« (WS /gḏūlō/)

1. 10. Diphthongs

Syriac has the following diphthongs:

/åw/ ë@čÀÀ cč ìčßñ /måwtå / death /aw/ (WS) /mawtō/ death /åy/ ð@čÀÀ ôï /håy / that ܳ /ōy/ (WS) @ ܝܗ /hōy/ that @ /ay/ ð@đÀÀ@cč ‹òí /zaytå / olive tree @

/īw / ìm @ ìn߉đa /ʾarmīw / they threw

/ūhy/ ïžôŁë@ÀÀ@ ïžôŁìyđa /ʾaḥūhy/ his brother @

/ȩ̄why/ ïžôìí@ĆÀÀ@ ïžôìîĆĆߊflã /nermȩ̄why / he shall throw it @

• /å/ followed by the semivowel /w/ (=/±/) results in /åw/ (= /å±/). In ES, /åw / is always substituted for /aw / (in WS /aw / remains unchanged), e.g. ES cčñìčß /måwtå /, WS /mawtō/ »death«, OS dčßìčí /yåwmå /, WS /yawmō/ »day«. In certain cases (such as St. cs. (→ 3. 6. 1.)), /åw / = /aw / changes to the monophthong o, and /åy/ to /ȩ̄/, e.g. âþìí /yom / »day« (St. cs. of dčßìčí /yåwmå /), òîĆi /bȩ̄ṯ/ »the house of« (St. cs. of cč îđiò /baytå/). • /å/ followed by /y/ or /i/ (also /ī/) results in /åy / (WS /ōy/), e.g. ïô @/håy /, WS /hōy/ »that«. • /a/ followed by /y/ or /i/ (also /ī/) results in /ay /, e.g. ES/WS cč ‹òí /zaytå / »olive tree«, cč îđiò /baytå/ »house«4. • /ī/ or /ȩ̄/ followed by w or u result in /īw / or /ȩ̄w/ respectively, e.g. ìn߉đa /ʾarmīw / »they threw« (cf. @o’Ó ìžô /qšī-hw/ [read: qšīw ] »it is hard«) ïžôìîĆĆߊflã /nermȩ̄why 5/ [read: nermȩ̄w] »he shall throw it« (→ 13. 2.).

4 Exception: ƒíđa /’ayḵ/ [Read! aḵ] »like«. 5 In the transcription, the unspoken consonant, which is marked with a linea occultans , is written in superscript (→ 1. 7.). 12 Lektion 1

1. 11. Vocabulary

A. for, to /l/ Þ which /ʾaynå/ dčäíđa not /lå/ dčÛ if … not /ʾellå/ hčÛa it was, it became /hwå/ cčìô king /malkå/ dčÀÀØÜđß this /hånå/ dčäô queen /malkṯå/ cČčòØÜđß on, because of /‛al/ ÝđÇ Ishaq /ʾῙsḥåq / ÕčzŽma from /men / åflß /O every, all /kol/ Ý× he /hū/ Łìô by the way, even /gȩ̄r/ Ćç I /ʾenå/ dčãa Lord, master /måryå/ dčíŠčß head /rẹ̄šå / dč’íƉ concerning, because of /meṭṭol / Ýİ flß that /håw/ ìô also /’åp̄/ ČÒča B. house /baytå/ cčòîđi together, with /‛am / áđÇ day /yåwmå/ dčßìčí earth, land /ʾar‛å/ dčljđa

1. 12. Exercises

A. Practise writing the following words until fluent, then transcribe them according to the transcription used in this book: O 10 dčãa@ 9 dčäô 8 dčÀÀØÜđ½ @7 ô@ì 6 Łìô 5 cìô 4 dčÀÀØÜđß 3 dčÛ 2 dč‘Ɖ 1

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

ܿ 10 ܐ 9 ܗ 8 7 ܗܘ 6 ܘܗܼ 5 ܘܗ 4 3 2 ܪ 1

B. Practise writing the following words until fluent, then transcribe them according to the transcription used in this book: @áđÇ @12 hčÛa@ @11@dčßìčí @10 @cČčòØÜđß 9 čaČÒ 8 Ýİß 7 dčíŠčß 6@ÕčzŽma 5 Ćç 4 Ý× 3 åíĆ… 2 cčòîđi 1 @dčäíđa @14@dčljđa @13

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 13

11 10 9 ܦܐ 8 7 6 ܐ 5 4 3 ܕ 2 1 ܐ 14 ܪܐ 13 12 ܐ

Lesson 2 2. 1. Consonants in the ES and Ser ṭō Scripts

Syriac consonants can be broken down into three groups according to their manner of articulation (unvoiced, emphatic, voiced) as follows:

unvoiced emphatic Voiced Labials ğÒ , /p/ ğl , /b/ Labiodental ČÒ , /p̄/ t, /ḇ/ Dental ñ , /t/ Â, /ṭ/ ğ… , /d/ Interdental ñ , /ṯ/ Ł… , /ḏ/ Sibilant ”, /š/, ÷, /s/ ú, /ṣ/ ‹, /z/ Velar _ğV, `ğ /k/ Ö, /q/ ğê , /g/ Uvular _ČV, `Č /ḵ/ Î, /ḡ/ Pharyngeal €, /ḥ/ Ê, /‛/ Laryngeal ô, /h/, a, /’/

Syriac resonants/sonorants (nasal, liquid)

Nasal Liquid Bilabial _m , /m/

Dental/Alveolar _n , l /n/ Þ, /l/, ‰, /r/

2. 2. The Two Pronunciations of the Bḡaḏkp ̄ aṯ-Consonants .

Depending on its phonetic position, the Bḡaḏkp̄aṯ -sound (òČÀđÐף†đÌi ) is either . (dčîč‘ŁìÓ quššåyå ğÀÀ »hardening«) or spirant, i.e. (dč‚ čÀÀ×Łë‰ rukkåḵå ČÀÀ »softening«). The plosive variant is denoted with a above, the spirant with a dot below:

dčîč‘ŁìÓ quššåyå dč‚čÀÀ×Łë‰ rukkåḵå Bgadkpat @ Bḡaḏḵp̄aṯ ES òğÀđÐ×ğ†ğÀèği @ òČÀđÐף†đÌq WS

The variation in the pronunciation of these consonants follows two basic rules: (1) Geminated (lengthened) consonants are never pronounced as a spirant, e.g. /dd/ in âflğ†flß /meddem / »something«. 14 Lektion 2

(2) A (simple) Bḡaḏkp̄aṯ -sound is always pronounced as a spirant when preceded by any regular vowel, or by a murmured vowel which was formerly a short vowel. Otherwise, i.e. following a consonant, it is pronounced as a plosive. This rule also applies across the word boundary: e.g. cčòî đÀČi@dčäô /hånå ḇaytå / »this house« ( → 5. 2.). When applying rule (2) in the case of a formal Ø-vowel, the reader must distinguish whether it is to be read, in terms of the distinction familiar from Hewbrew, as a Shewa quiescens . (i.e. structural or actual vowellessness .), or as a Shewa mobile . (i.e. purely superficial vowellessness resulting from a reduced vowel). The following rules of thumb are helpful in such cases ( consonant here refers to the Bḡaḏkp̄aṯ-consonant): • The onset consonant of an isolated word form is always pronounced as a plosive, which is why it is not marked with a dčîč‘ŁìÓ quššåyå ğÀÀ . However, in the context of a sentence, it is only pronounced as a plosive after a consonant at the end of the previous word, e.g. cčòîđiğ /baytå / »house« (isolated), or cčğòîđÀÀği Ý×@ /kol baytå / »the whole house«, in contrast to còîčğ đÀČi@dčä ô /hånå ḇaytå / »this house«. • The second consonant in a formal double consonance at the beginning of a word is pronounced as a spirant, e.g. dčqČčò× /kṯåḇå/ »book«; exceptions: cč ‘Àò /štå/ »six«, åmò‘ /štīn / »sixty«. • Consonants following a closed syllable are not pronounced as spirants, e.g. dčÀÀØÜđß /malkå / »king«. • A consonant following a geminate is pronounced as a spirant, e.g. cČčò×Łë… /dukkṯå/ < */dukk eṯå/ »place«. 6 • Consonants following the diphthongs /åw / (= WS /aw /) and /åy / are pronounced as rather than as spirants, e.g. ES cč ìčßñ /måw tå/ »death«, cč Àîđiò /bay tå/ »house«; exceptions: ƒíđa /ʾayḵ/ [read: aḵ] »like, as«. • The onset consonant k which features in various pronominal suffixes to nouns is pronounced as a spirant e.g. æþì‚ÓþëŠčÏ /pårōqḵōn/ »your saviour«. This is because there was originally a case ending vowel (V) between the final consonant of the noun and the suffix: */påroq V-ḵōn/ (→ 6. 1.). • In the case of syllable reduction or the omission of vowels, the consonant is pronounced as a spirant, e.g. dčrôđ… /dahḇå/ < */dahabå / »gold« ( → 3. 4.). Note also: • The feminine ending /-t/ (→ 3. 6. 1.) is generally pronounced as a spirant (so long as it is not geminated as a result of assimilation, e.g. cñč ğ†Üčí /yålettå / < */yåledtå / »begetter, mother«) e.g. cČčòØÜđß /malkṯå/ »queen«, @ cČččòyŁì’ß /mšuḥṯå/ »measure«. This is because there is usually an underlying */-aṯ/. There are however several exceptions (as well as deviations in pronunciation), e.g. cč ÀÛŁò ëòi /bṯul tå/ »virgin«, cčò Àyþìğj‘ñ /tešboḥtå/ »glory« (→ 3. 1. 1.).7 Additionally, the spirantization of the Bḡaḏkp̄aṯ-sound occurs . when the proclitic particles l /b-/ (preposition »in«), Þ /l-/ (preposition »for, to«), … /d-/ (determinative pronoun .) or ë /w-/ (conjunction »and«) occur before nomina with a vowelless onset consonant e.g. dčqČčò‚đi /ba-ḵṯåḇå/ »in the book«, as well as in the case of accumulation of these proclitics ., e.g. cčòîđÀrqđ…ğ /daḇ-ḇaytå/ »(he) who (is) in the house«.

6 Conversely, in such cases, the spirant points to the of the preceding consonant. 7 Occasionally, words that would otherwise be pronounced the same are distinguished by varying the pronunciation of a Bḡaḏkp̄aṯ-consonant, e.g. dčÀÀğiŠđç /garbå / »leprous« in contrast to dčqŠđç /garḇå/ »Leprosy«.

Lesson 2 15

2. 2. 1. Writing Geminate Consonants

Syriac uses both simple and geminate (lengthened) consonants. This difference, however, is not denoted in the written script. Geminate consonants are not denoted using double letters, as is usually the case in semitic languages. However, in the case of òČÀđÐף† đÌi Bḡaḏkp̄aṯ-consonants, it is possible to draw this distinction, since geminate consonants are never pronounced as spirants. Examples: cčbnğèđ /saggī ʾå/ »much, many« hčÜčÀÀ×Łì /sukkålå / »meaning, sense« a‰ čòfl /settårå / »protection« dčänØđ /sakkīnå/ »knife«

2. 2. 2. The ʾÅlap ̄

In the following cases, the ʾÅlap̄ is not vocalized. Although it is not articulated (cf. the shewa quiescent . from Hebrew grammar), it is nonetheless preserved in written form 8: • ʾÅlap̄ in the syllable onset .: cbčß /må ʾ/ »100« [read: må ] (→ 13. 3.) a裆mbi /b-ʾīḏå / »in the hand« [read: b-īḏå ] (also across the morpheme boundary) dčbđÜđß /mala ʾḵå/ »angel« [read: malaḵå]

In the following cases, the ʾÅlap̄ is silent, but is usually written with linea occultans (→ 2. 4. 3.), e.g. dč’čãa /ʾnåšå / »man, people« 9 åíĆŠya /ʾḥrẹ̄n/ »another« 10 dčäíĆŠya /ʾḥrẹ̄nå / »another«

2. 3. Prothesis

In rare cases, particularly before / št /, a prothetic syllable of the form / ʾV/ ( ʾÅlap̄ + vowel) is introduced before what would otherwise be a double consonant onset, for ease of pronunciation. Examples:

cčğ aò‘ /ʾeštå / »bottom« cčğ aò‘ /ʾeštå / »six« (or cčò‘ğ /štå /) ( → 13. 3.) åmò‘ a /ʾeštīn / »60« (or åmò‘ /štīn /) ( → 13. 3.)

8 There would otherwise be no difference in the transcription between må (= dčß /må / »what?«) and /må / (= cbčß /måʾ/ »100«). 9 In dictionaries, such words are generally listed according to their written form (i.e. dč’čã a /’nåšå / is listed under ʾ-n-š). 10 In dictionaries, such words are generally listed according to their written form, including for spellings without Ålap̄ (i.e. åíĆŠy /ḥrẹ̄n/ is listed under ʾ-ḥ-r).

16 Lektion 2

2. 4. Graphic Symbols and Punctuation Marks

As well as diacritical points, (cf. Bḡaḏkp̄aṯ-consonants . → 2. 2.), Syriac also makes use of grammatical points denoting number and gender. Especially in texts without vowel signs, words that are orthographically identical are often marked with a dot above, in order to denote a full and dark pronunciation, in contrast to a finer and weaker pronunciation. A dot above is used in the following cases: • For the active participle ( → 4. 4.) in order to distinguish it from the perfect ( → 7. 1.), e.g. ğÀÀč×ČČòt /kåṯeḇ/ »writing«, tđòČÀÀ×2 /kṯaḇ/ »he wrote«. • For the possessive and object suffixes of the 3.f.sg., to distinguish them from the 3.m.sg. ( → 6. 1.), e.g. fčäm… /dīnåh / »her judgement«, óĆäm… /dīnȩ̄h / »his judgement«. • Above certain words, e.g. æþìäğô /hånōn/ »those«, to distinguish it from æþìäČô /hennōn / »they«; ⁄ğë /wålȩ̄/ »fitting, proper« in distinction to ⁄ë /w-lå/ »and not«; aŁ†rğÇ /‛ḇåḏå / »work« in distinction to ağ†rČÇ /‛aḇdå/ »Slave«. In the East Syrian tradition, two dots are occasionally placed under the suffix of the 3.f.sg. to distinguish it from the 1.sg., e.g. 82òğÀđiò× /keṯbaṯ/ »she wrote« in contrast to òflğiò× /keṯbeṯ / »I wrote« (→ 7. 1.). These two dots are also used to distinguish the voiced ô in c8 ôì /hwå/ »it was, it happened« (in contrast to cìžô /hwå/).

For Syåmȩ̄-dots, see (→ 3. 6. 1.).

2. 4. 2. Punctuation Marks

The following punctuation marks are particularly common: • Single dot: N at the end of a sentence. • Point above (dčîčÜflÇ /‛ellåyå /): ܇ • Point below (dčíČčòyđñ /taḥṯåyå /): ܆ • Colon (dşÀÀčíì‘ /šwayyå /): : • ܀ is used to denote the end of a paragraph.

2. 4. 3. Linea Occultans

In words that are orthographically identical, a line ( dčäčİôŠđß /marhṭånå /) is drawn above the consonant to indicate the absence of a vowel, e.g. ìÔÜ /ṭleq w/ »they passed away« (cf. → 7. 1.) in contrast to ìÔÜđ /ṭalleq w/ »they finished« (cf. → 9. 2.). This line ( linea occultans ) is also drawn above consonants within a word which are not h h pronounced, e.g. cìžô / wå/ [read: wå] »to be, to happen« ( → 7. 3.), ìžô@d čÀÀØÜđß /malkå- w/ [read: malkåw ] (WS h h /malka- w/) »he is king«, sžôđí /ya ḇ/ [read: yaḇ] »he gave« ( → 14. 2.). h In the WS tradition, the linea occultans is also drawn under the consonant ( dčäčîèôß /mhaggyånå /), e.g. / wō/ [read: wō] »be, happen«. A line drawn under also serves to indicate an additional /e/ vowel, e.g. cČčòÜĞyfl… /deḥelṯå/ from /deḥlṯå/ »fear«.

Lesson 2 17

2. 5. Vocabulary

A. kingdom /malkūṯå/ cČčñŁìØÜđß B. much, many /saggī ʾå/ cčbnğèđ something /meddem / âflğ†flß when /kaḏ/ Ł†đ× n death /måwtå / cčñ ìčß you /ʾa tt / òžãđa place /dukkṯå/ cČčò×Łë… one /ḥaḏ/ Ł†đy book /kṯåḇå/ dčq čò× love /ḥubbå / dčÀÀğiŁìy y son /brå/ aŠi like, as /ʾa ḵ/ ƒíđa just as y hand /ʾīḏå/ a裆ma /ʾa ḵ d-/ … ƒíđa

2. 6. Exercises

A. Sort the following words according to the pronunciation of the Bḡaḏkp̄aṯ, and transcribe them according to the transcription used in this book: a裆ma @~ČÒ @ča 3@cČčòףë…@~ dčqò× @ c~ òîđič @~ cČčñŁìØÜđß 2@cčğ ìčßñ ~aŠi@~ âflğ†flß 1

~ 3 ~ ~ ~ 2 ~ ~ 1

ܐ ~ܦܐ 3 ~ܘܕ ~ ~ ~ܬ 2 ܬ ~ ~ܡ 1

B. Sort the following words according to the pronunciation of the Bḡaḏkp̄aṯ and transcribe them according to the transcription used in this book: †đyŁ Ł†đ×~ @~ åíĆ… @3@dčÀÀğiŁìy c~ òîđič @~ òžãđa 2@cČčò×Łë… ~ƒíđa @~ Ý× 1 @ ~ ~ 3 ~ 2 ~ ~ ~ 1

̄ ~ܕ 3 ~ ܐ 2 ~ܘܕ ~ܐ ~ 1

Lesson 3 3. 1. Total Assimilation of Consonants (/n/, /l/)

In most cases, a vowelless /n/ is assimilated to the following consonant (exceptions: /h/, see → 11. 1.). As a consequence, the consonant in question is pronounced geminate. The assimilated /n/ is dealt with in various different ways orthographically. For nominal word forms, it is usually denoted with linea occultans , e.g. cč Àò žämŁ†ß /mḏī nttå / < */meḏīntå / < */meḏīneṯå/ »city, town« (in contrast to St. cs. òđämŁ†ß /mḏīnaṯ/ (→ 3. 6. 1.)) cč žäđ‘Àò /ša nttå / »year« (in contrast to St. cs. òđä‘ /šnaṯ/ (→ 3. 6. 1.)).

By contrast, in the case of compounds with flßå / Čßå /men / »from«, a vowelless /n/ it not written (→ 6. 4.), e.g. ÝîĆØflß /mekkẹ̄l/ < */menkẹ̄l/ »from that time, henceforth« dčÀÀØflß /mekkå/ < */menkå/ »from this place«

For the assimilation of /n/ in verbal forms, see Verbs I-n (→ 11. 1.). In rare cases, /l/ is assimilated to the preceding syllable; see also (→ 14. 2.), e.g. cČčò ÔđŽ đß /massaqṯå/ < */maslaqṯå/ »ascent«. In very rare cases, /r/ is not pronounced, but is retained in the orthography, e.g. dčÀÀØÜđß @ñžŠđi /ba rṯ/ (< */barṯ/) malkå / »daughter of the king« dčàčîÓ @ñžŠđi /ba rṯ/ (< */barṯ/) qyåmå/ »daughter of the holy covenant = «

3. 1. 1. The Assimilation of Dentals

In some word forms, adjacent dentals give rise to a partial assimilation. In purely consonantal writing, the assimilation is not expressed. A common phenomena is the regressive assimilation of dentals in nouns preceding the feminine ending (→ 3. 6. 1.), e.g. cčòİnğjđÇ /‛abbīttå / < */ ‛abbīṭtå/ »thick, heavy«, cčñ đŁ†y /ḥḏattå/ < */ ḥḏaṯtå/ »New (Testament)«, but ñŁ†Üm /īlet / < */īlett / < * /īleḏt / »he begot« (Pf. Pe.) ( → 11. 3.) and ñònß /mīt / < */ mītt / < */ mīṯt / »you died« (→ 12. 2.).

However, in the case of cčòİn’Ï < */ pšīṭtå / (/ tt / < */ ṭt/) »simple, the Pšīṭtå «, this book uses the original form of transcription, i.e. cčòİn’Ï /pšīṭtå /.

For the partial assimilation of the stem marker /t/ in T-stems, see (→ 9. 1.).

3. 2. Consonant Dissimilation

The following are some of the most important consonant dissimilations (transformation or omission of a ) in Syriac: /b/ to /ḇ/ to /w/ in: dčr×ìđ× /kawkḇå/ < */kawkab / »star«

Lesson 3 19

/‛/ to /’/ in: dčÀÀÐÇđa /’a‛på/ < */‛a‛på/ »double« /‛/ to /Ø/ in: ŠđŽÇ đòč‘ñğ /tšåta‛sar / < */tša‛ta‛sar / »19« /r/ to /n/ in: åíƉñ /trȩ̄n/ < */tnȩ̄n/ »two«; aŠi /brå / < */bnå / »son«

3. 3. Consonant Correspondences: Syriac – Hebrew - Arabic .

In Syriac (and in Aramaic languages in general), five of the semitic consonants have a different phoneme correspondence to Hebrew; namely, the three semitic interdentals /ṯ/, /ḏ/ and /}/ , and the laterals /ś/ and /ṣ́/ (=/ḍ/). .(ﺽ ، ﺵ and ﻅ ، ﺫ ، ﺙ) In , these consonants have all been preserved as distinct In Syriac, the interdentals merged with the corresponding dentals (/ṯ/ > ñ, /ḏ/ > …, /ṭ/ > Â), whereas in Hebrew, The voiceless lateral ś in Syriac merged with ÷, while in .(צ < /ṭ/ ,ז < /ḏ/ ,שׁ < /they merged with the sibilants (/ṯ As a .צ The emphatic lateral ṣ́ in Syriac merged with Ê, whereas in Hebrew it merged with .ש Hebrew it remained as result of this divergence in phoneme merging, Syriac T-consonants sometimes correspond to Hebrew S-consonants. ,respectively. There is still צ and שׂ Furthermore, the Syriac phonemes ÷ and Ê correspond to the Hebrew however, a 1: 1 correlation between the T-consonants S- consonants, and Ê.

Examples:

three ﺛَ ٌﻼﺙ שָׁ ושׁ /t/š/ṯ òčÛñ @/tlåṯ gold ﺫ َ َﻫ ٌ ﺐ זָהָ ב @/d/z/ḏ dčrôđ… /dahḇå shadow ِﻅ ٌﻞ צֵ ל @/ ṭ/ṣ/Ł ṯ hčÜčÜ /ṭellålå ten َﻋ ٌﺸﺮ ֲשַׂ ר @/s/ś/š ŠđŽÇ /‛sar land ﺍَ ٌﺭﺽ אֶרֶ ץ @/ʿ/ṣ/} dčljđa /’ar‛å

3. 4. Syllable Structure and Vowel Reduction

Ancient semitic languages only contain the following three syllable types: {CV} (short open syllable .), {Cv̅ } (long open syllable .) and {CvC (closed syllable ., considered as long) (C = consonant; v = any short vowel, v̅ = long vowel). CvW and CvY are treated as {CvC}-syllables, e.g. baytå = bay|tå »house«. Syriac has also developed secondary syllable patterns. The following four distinctive forms should be noted: (1) A short initial syllable {Cv} preceding the tone syllable is reduced to {C e} – except when it follows (’ Ålap̄) . It is likely that originally, e was voiced as a murmured vowel corresponding to the Hebrew Shewa mobile , and later ceased to be voiced at all .. This gave rise to words with double consonants in the initial sound, e.g. {CCVC}, ÝđİÓ /qṭal / < */qeṭal / < */qaṭal / »he killed« (→ 7. 1.). (2) Final vowels were dropped, giving rise to secondary double closed syllables of the structure {CVCC} at the end of a word, e.g. đòq Č ×ò /kṯaḇt / < */kṯaḇtå/ »you wrote« (→ 7. 1.). (3) Final vowels were no longer stressed, but were still written according to the old orthography, e.g. ïØÜđß

/malk y/ < */malkī/ »my king« (→ 6. 2.), đqì Č ×ò /kṯaḇ w/ < */kṯaḇū / »they wrote« (→ 7. 1.).

20 Lektion 3

(4) In the case of two successive originally untoned syllables of the form {Cv|Cv}, {Cv̅|Cv} or {CvC|Cv}, the vowel of the second syllable is reduced, e.g. dčrôđ… /dahḇå/ < */dahabå / »gold«, cČčòØÜđß /malkṯå/ < */malkatå / »queen«. (5) A vowelless /y/ (and /ye/) in the initial word sound becomes an ī vowel, resulting in secondary words with an initial vowel sound. In the orthography, this is written as Yoḏ, or sometimes as ʾÅlap̄ (as vowel bearer). Examples: †mđÊ2 /īḏa ‛/ < */yeda ‛/ »he knew« ( → 11. 3.) (also sometimes with ʾÅlap̄ †mđÊ2 Í), Êþì’m /Īšo ‛/ »Jesus«, a裆ma /’īḏå / < */yedå / »hand«.

3. 5. Root Structure

As is generally the case in semitic languages, most syriac word forms have an underlying structure consisting of three consonantal or semivowel elements (or radicals). This structure is called the root , and it contains the primary lexical meaning of a word (which is usually verbal). Word formation succeeds by means of different patterns of vowels (the so- called schema ), and often also through external affixes (prefixes and suffixes; and in rare cases, infixes). By way of illustration, here is the root k-t-b with the basic meaning ‘write’, together with some important derived forms: a) Verb forms: tČđò× /kṯaḇ / »he wrote« (Perfect. → 7. 1.) tþëò‚flã /neḵtoḇ / »he shall write« (Imperfect. → 8. 1.)

b) Nominal derivatives: tflòč×Č /kåṯeḇ / »writing« = »(he) is writing« (active participle → 4. 4.) smò× /kṯīḇ / »wrote« (passive participle → 7. 4.) dčqČčò× /kṯåḇå/ »handwriting, book« dčqþëòč× /kåṯōḇå/ »writer« (Nomina agentis → 4. 1. 2. (No. 10)) cČčñŁìqþëòč× /kåṯōḇūṯå/ »art of writing« dčäčqò‚đß /maḵtḇånå / »author«

3. 6. Nominals 3. 6. 1. Gender, Number, State

Nominals – a term which groups together nouns (n.) and adjectives (adj.) – are divided into two genders, masculine and feminine. Masculine (m.) nominals are not denoted in any way, while feminine (f.) nominals are generally denoted with the phoneme /-t-/, e.g. dčÀÀØÜđß /malkå / »king« (m.), cČčòØÜđß /malkṯå/ »queen« (f.) dčÀÀ’ni /bīšå/ »bad« (m., adj.), cčò’Čîiğ /bīštå / »bad« (f., adj.) In addition, there are a series of feminine nouns with no corresponding ending, including many parts of the body, as well as names for articles of clothing, containers and tools:

Lesson 3 21 dčßa /’emmå / »mother« (f.), cõŒflÇ /‛ezzå/ »goat« (f.), dčäččÇ /‛ånå / »small cattle« (f.), dčäîđÇ /‛aynå/ »eye, fountain« (f.), dČčÏb× /kẹ̄ʾp̄å / »stone« (WS /kī ʾp̄ō/) (f.). A number of nouns with feminine endings are treated as masculine nouns, with the -t- taken to belong to the radical (see → 3. 5. and 4. 1.) e.g. cčòîđiğ /baytå / »house« (m.) from √bwt , cčñìčß /måwtå / »death« (m.) from √mwt . Number distinguishes between singular (sg.) and plural (pl.). There is no specific dual form, nor any distinction according to case. There is, however, a remnant of the dual form in the number words åíƇñ /trȩ̄n/ »two« and åíĆñbđßČ /ma’ṯȩ̄n/ »two hundred« ( → 13. 3.). Syriac uses two dots called dŽàčî /syåmȩ̄/ şÀÀ to distinguish the plural from the singular, e.g. dčÀÀØÜđß /malkå / »king«, dĆşÀÀØÜđß /malkȩ̄/ »kings«. In words containing ‰, the plural dots are often written above this letter. In this case, only one additional dot is written, leaving two rather than three dots above the letter. For words in which ‰ occurs twice, the plural points are usually drawn above the final ‰; otherwise they are written at a random location. Examples: dčߊđ× /karmå/ »vineyard« (sg.) : dĆ߈đ× /karmȩ̄/ »vineyards« (pl.) a‰Š‘ /šrårå / »truth« (sg.) : aƇŠ‘ /šrårȩ̄/ » truths« (pl.) In addition, plural points are used: • For plurale tantum nominals, e.g. dşÀÀčîđß /mayyå/ »water«. • For verbs of the form 3.f.pl., eg. ò×đşïq Č /kṯaḇy/ »they wrote« ( → 7. 1.), åşÀÀčqò‚ flã /neḵtḇån / »they shall write« ( → 8. 1.). • For collective nouns which have no plural form, e.g. dşÀÀčäčÇ /‛ånå / »small cattle«. Depending on syntactic positioning and function, nominals take one of the following three states: (1) Status absolutus (absolute state) (the “free” form of the nominal); abbreviated as: St. abs. (2) Status constructus (construct state) (the “bound” form of the nominal preceding an immediately dependent genitive expresion); abbreviated as: St. cs. (3) Status emphaticus (emphatic state), abbreviated as: St. emph. Depending on gender, number and state, nominals take different endings in their singular and plural forms. Dictionaries specify the plural building for all nominals.

St. abs. St. cs. St. emph. m.sg. − − /-å/ m.pl. /−īn/ /−ay / /-ȩ̄/ f.sg. /−å/ /−aṯ/ /-tå/, /-ṯå/ f.pl. /−ån / /-åṯ/@ /-åṯå/@

22 Lektion 3

The following is an inflection table for the singular and plural forms of the adjective sč /ṭåḇ/ »good«:

St. abs. St. cs. St. emph. m.sg. sč /ṭåḇ/ sč /ṭåḇ/ črčd /ṭåḇå/ m.pl. åşnrč /ṭåḇīn/ şïđÀrč /ṭåḇay / dŽÀrč /ṭåḇȩ̄/ f.sg. črčd /ṭåḇå/ òđÀrč /ṭåḇaṯ/ cČčòrč /ṭåḇṯå/ f.pl. åşÀÀ črč /ṭåḇån / òşÀÀčrč /ṭåḇåṯ/@ cČčòşÀÀčrč /ṭåḇåṯå/@

Of these three states, the St. emph. is most common. It is the standard form, and as such the form in which nouns are usually cited. Although from a historical viewpoint, its ending /-å/ contains the definite article (cf. the prefix article . ha- and its variants in Hebrew), a nominal in the St. emph. form is not necessarily determined .. A noun such as a‰Łì /ṭūrå/ can – depending on context – mean either »the mountain« or »a mountain«. Furthermore, it should be noted that the St. abs. f.sg. and the St.nemph. m.sg usually have the same endings. Further examples with masculine nouns, using the examples of a‰Łì /ṭūrå/ (m.) »mountain« and dččqČčò× /kṯåḇå/ (m.) »book«:

St. abs. St. cs. St. emph.

m.sg. ‰Łì /ṭūr / dôčÛđa @‰Łì /ṭūr ’alåhå / a‰Łì /ṭūrå/ »the mountain of God«@ »mountain« m.pl. åm‡Łì /ṭūrīn/ dôčÛđa@ðđ‡Łì /ṭūray ’alåhå / aƇŁì /ṭūrȩ̄/ »mountains« »mountains of God« »mountains« m.sg. tČčò× /kṯåḇ/ dčÀÀØÜđß@tČčò× /kṯåḇ malkå/ dččqČčò× /kṯåḇå/ »the king’s book«@ »book« m.pl. åşnqČčò× /kṯåḇīn/ dčÀÀØÜđß@şïđÀqČčò× /kṯåḇay malkå/ dŽÀqČčò× /kṯaḇȩ̄/ »books« »the king‘s books« »books« Examples with feminine nouns, using the examples of cČčñŁìß… /dmūṯå/ (m.) »image«, cČčòmŠi /brīṯå/ (m.) »creation«:

St. abs. St. cs. St. emph.

f.sg. Łìß… /dmū/ dč‘Ɖ@ñŁìß… /dmūṯ rẹ̄šå / cČčñŁìß… /dmūṯå/ @ »the image of the head«@ »image«@ f.pl. æìşßfl… /demwån / dč‘Ɖ@ñìşßfl… /demwåṯ rẹ̄šå / cČčñìşßfl… /demwåṯå/ »images of heads«@ »images«@ f.sg. − dčàÜčÇ@òmŠi /brīṯ ‛ålmå / cČčòmŠi /brīṯå/ »creation of the world«@ »creation«@ f.pl. åčíˆfli /beryån / dčàÜčÇ@òčíˆfli /beryåṯ ‛ålmå / cČčòčíˆfli /beryåṯå/ @ »creations of the world« @ »creations«@

Lesson 3 23

As the table shows, feminine nouns with the (derivational affixes) /-ūṯ/ and /-īṯ/ in the St. abs. sg. end with /-ū/ and /-ī/ respectively. The St. abs is relatively common for adjectives (including participles) in the predicate function, e.g. @dčî’đİß@dčàzđÛ ŽđÀná q /laḥmå (m.) mṭåššyå (m.) ḇassīm / (m.) »bread eaten in secret is pleasant«. By contrast, an adjective which modifies a noun takes the St. emph., e.g. dčà ŽđÀn q@dčàzđÛ /laḥmå (m.) ḇassīmå/ (m.) »pleasant bread«. Nouns in St. abs.: (1) following Ý× /kol / » every, all« (actually »the whole of.«), e.g. âþìí@Ý× @/kol yom / »every day«, “čãa@Ý× /kol ’nåš / »every one« (2) sometimes following dčÛ /lå / »not«, e.g. óčÛđđa@hčÛ… /d-lå ’alåh / »godless« (3) in conjunction with numbers, e.g. åmŠrđÀČç @cČčòčÛñ /tlåṯå ḡaḇrīn/ »three men« (4) with âflğ†flß /meddem / »something«, cf. also @åíĆŠya@âflğ†flß @/meddem ʾḥrẹ̄n/ »something else« (5) in distributive phrases . such as åđÀq‹@åđÀqŒđi /ba-zḇan zḇan / »now and then«, and in other (6) adverbial phrases, e.g. áđÜčÈÛ /l-‛ålam / »for ever«, âþìîÛ@âþìí@O /men yom l-yom/ »from day to day«. St. cs. occurs almost exclusively in set phrases and idiomatic sayings, e.g. cčğò‘Łìä× @ğl‰ /rab knūštå / »director of the synagogue«. In such cases, we can speak of a construct chain . Such chains can consist of several constituent parts, e.g. aĆˆnđa@òîğĆi ğl‰@ @şïđäîđÈi /b-ʿaynay rab bȩ̄ṯ ’assīrȩ̄/ »(Joseph found favour) in the eyes of the prison warden«, literally »in the eyes of the leader of the house of prisoners«. Some construct chains are joined to form a single word, e.g. dčrčqğ†ÜflÈi /bʿeldḇåḇå/ »enemy« (literally »master of slander«). However, in the majority of cases, the connection in question is expressed by periphrase (circumlocution).

3. 6. 2. Irregular Nominals

The following is a list of important nominals with irregular inflection. The following three things should be noted: a) Many of the nominals listed below have a two-consonant basis in the St. emph. singular, which in other forms is expanded by a third consonant, e.g. dčßa /’emmå / »mother« (sg. St. emph.), cČčòôşßa /’emmhåṯå/ »mothers« (pl. St. emph.). b) Several nominals are characterised by irregular plural formation (pl. St. emph.), taking /-ayyå / instead of /-ȩ̄/, e.g. dşÀÀčîđäi /bnayyå / »sons«, plural form of aŠi /brå / »son«. c) The lexemes dčîđ /šmayyå / »heaven« and dčîşÀÀđß /mayyå / »water«, which also take the ending /–ayyå /, are used only in the plural. d) Several masculine words take the feminine plural form, e.g. sg. dčí‰đa /’aryå / (m.) »lion«, pl. cČčñìčí‡đa /’aryåwåṯå / »lions«. e) Several feminine words have the feminine ending in the sg. but not in the pl., e.g. cČčñòžãđa /’anttṯå/ (f.) »woman, wife«, pl. dŽ’flã /neššȩ̄/ »women«.

24 Lektion 3

Sg. St. emph. St. cs. Pl. St. emph. name dč /šmå / (m.) áfl‘ /šem / cČčòôčàşÀÀ‘ /šmåhåṯå/ dŽôč /šmåhȩ̄/ mother dčßa /’emmå / (f.) âa /’em / cČčòôşßa /’emmhåṯå/ father dčqđa /’aḇå/ (m.) ― čqđaŽôd /’aḇåhȩ̄/ »parents, fathers« cČčòô şÀÀ čqđa /’aḇåhåṯå/ »forefathers« brother dčyđa /’aḥå/ (m.) ― dŽyđa /’aḥȩ̄/ other íčäd ĆŠya /’ḥrẹ̄nå/ (m.) åíĆŠya /’ḥrẹ̄n/ dĆãčˆya /’ḥrånȩ̄/ (pl.abs. ³ãčˆya /’ḥrånīn /) other cČčñĆŠya /’ḥrẹ̄ṯå/ (f.) òđîã Šya /’ḥrånyåṯ/ cČčòčîãčˆya /’ḥrånyåṯå/ (pl.abs. åčîãčˆya /’ḥrånyån/) hand a裆ma /’ī4då/ (f.) 裆đí /ya4d/ bčí裆şma /’īdayyå4 / Ł†ma /ʾīd4 / aŁ†ma /’ī4dȩ̄ / åmŁ†şma @/’ ī4dīn / lion dčí‰đa /’aryå / (m.) ― cČčñìčí‡đa /’aryåwåṯå/ æìčí‡đa /’aryåwån/ man, people dč’čãa /’nåšå / (m.) “čãa /’nåš / åşn’čãa /’nåšīn / (only pl.abs.) woman cČčñòžãđa /’anttṯå/ (f.) ñ čòÀžãđağ /’anttåṯ/ dŽ’flã /neššȩ̄/ son aŠi /brå/ (m.) Šđi /bar / dşÀÀčîđäi /bnayyå / daughter cČčñŠđi /barṯå/ (f.) ñžŠđi /ba rṯ/ cČčòşÀÀčäi /bnåṯå/ cč điîò /baytå/ (m.) Ćiòî /bȩ̄ṯ/ cĆòşÀÀči /båtȩ̄/; house (Pl.abs. åmòşÀÀči /båtīn /) father-in-law dč» /ḥmå/ (m.) ― dŽôč» /ḥmåhȩ̄/ sister cČčòčy /ḥåṯå/ (f.) ― cČčñìşyđa /’aḥwåṯå/ water dčîşÀÀđß /mayyå / (m.) ïşÀÀđß /may/ ― abs. ³şÀÀß /mīn/ Lord, God aŠčß /mårå/ (m.) aĆŠčß /mårȩ̄ dčíđˆčß /mårayyå / dčíŠčß /måryå / (m.) æëčˆčß /måråwån / Lady cčñŠčß /mårtå/ (f.) ñŠčß /måraṯ/ cČčñčˆčß /måråṯå/ village, field cČčòmŠÓ /qrīṯå/ (f.) cs. òđíŠÓ /qeryaṯ/ dč퇣ìÓ /quryå and òđ퉣ìÓ /quryaṯ/ abs. aĆŠÓ /qrȩ̄/ year cč žäđ‘òÀ /ša nttå / (f.) abs. dčä‘ /šnå / dşÀÀčîđä‘ /šnayyå / cs. òđä‘ /šnåṯ/ ³şä‘ /šnīn /

Lesson 3 25

3. 6. 3. Nominals and Attributive Adjectives

Attributive adjectives agree in gender, number and state with the noun which they describe. Generally speaking the adjective comes after the noun in question, e.g. cČčòrč dČčÏb× /kẹ̄ʾp̄å (f.) ṭåḇṯå/ (f.) »a precious stone« aÐđ‘ cčğòîđi /baytå (m.) šappīrå / (m.) »the beautiful house/a beautiful house« dč߉@a‰ŁìİÛ /l-ṭūrå (m.) råmå / (m.) »into a high mountain« (Mk 9,2). Where specific emphasis is placed on the adjective, it may precede the noun, e.g. şïđÜflß@ÝnÜđÓ ´Üô /hålȩ̄n qallīl mellay / »these few words«. The adjectives oğèđ /saggī/ »much, many« and åíĆŠya /’ḥrẹ̄n/ »other« often precede the noun even when they are not emphasised. Further attributive adjectives used in conjunction with them can be placed after the noun, e.g. aĆˆnÐđ‘@aŁ†črÇ@cbnğèđ /saggī ʾȩ̄ ‛ḇåḏȩ̄ šappīrȩ̄/ »many excellent works« (Jn 10,32) cf. however cbnğèđ@dč’čãa /’nåšå saggī ʾȩ̄/ »many people« (Jn 10,41) æčbnğèđ@³äq‹ /zaḇnīn saggī ʾån / »many times« čäd@đßòhčÛ íĆŠya /’ḥrȩ̄nå maṯlå/ »another parable« (Mt 13,24).

3. 6. 4. Nominals and Apposition .

An apposition can either precede or follow the noun to which it relates. Generally speaking, honorific appositions precede the noun, while explicatory appositions follow it. Examples: áíĆŠÏđa@ðŠčß /mår y ’Ap̄rȩ̄m/ »Mår Aphrem« y dčäčqŁì@áíĆŠÏđa@ðŠčß /mår ’Ap̄rȩ̄m ṭūḇånå / »blessed Mår Aphrem« còč ÀžämŁ†ß@Ł†nßča (WS ’Amīḏ) /’Åmīḏ mḏī nttå / »the city of Amid« cČčòmŠÓ@dčîäđÇ@òîĆi /Bȩ̄ṯ ‛anyå qrīṯå/ »the village of Bethany« (Jn 11,1) ÷þìݎđãđa@dčÀÀØÜđß /malkå ’Anasṭos / »the emperor Anastasius« dčî čÀÀ׋ @d čÀÀØÜđß @÷þìäđîänqþìí /Yoḇīnyanos malkå zakkåyå / »the victorious emperor Jovianus«.

3. 7. Vocabulary

A. mother /’emmå / dčßa Addai /’Adday / ðđğ…đa mountain /ṭūrå/ c艣ì Jacob /Ya‛qōḇ/ tþìÔÈđí beautiful /šappīrå/ aÐđ‘ Heaven /šmayyå / dčîđ Name /šmå / dč Street /šūqå/ dčÓŁì‘ B. good /ṭåḇå/ dčrč Holy /qaddīšå/ dč’mğ†đÓ offspring /zar‛å/ dčlj‹ blessed /ṭūḇånå/ dčäčqŁì apostle /šlīḥå/ dčznÜ‘ C. Anastasius /’Anasṭos / ÷þìݎđãđa much, many /saggī/ oğèđ Mår Aphrem /måry’Ap̄rȩ̄m / áíĆŠÏđa ðŠčß prophet /nḇīyå/ dčÀnrã

26 Lektion 3

3. 8. Exercises

A. Give the St. abs./cs. sg. and St. pl. forms of the following words: dč@10 aŠi@ 7 a‰Łì 6 cč điîò 5 dčßìčí 4 cČčñŁìØÜđß 3 dčßa 2 a裆ma 1@

B. Rewrite the following words according to the transcription used in this book, and translate: @7 dŽnrã@cbnğèđ 6 cbnğèđ@dč’ä× 5@tþìÔÈđí@ðŠčß@dč’mğ†đÓ 4 dčÓŁì’i 3@dčznÜ‘@ðđğ…đa @2@dčrč@dčlj‹ 1 @@dčqČčò×

C. Read the following words, and practise writing them until they are familiar: aĆˆnÐđ‘@aŁ†črÇ@cbnğèđ 4 dčîčÀÀ׋ @dčÀÀØÜđß @÷þìݎđãđa 3 tþìÔÈđí@ðŠčß@dč’mğ†đÓ 2 dčäčqŁì@áíĆŠÏđa@ðŠčß 1 dč’mğ†đÓ@dčyŁë‰ 5 @ 5 4 3 2 1

̈ ̈ 4 ܙ ܣ 3 ܒ ܝ 2 ܐ ܝ 1 ܘܪ 5

Lesson 4 4. 1. Important Types of Nominal Formation

The majority of Syriac nominals (nouns and adjectives) are formed according to the patterns listed below. All of them begin with a root consisting of three radicals. The following examples are all formed from the root word q-ṭ-l »kill«. All nominals are cited in the St. emph.

4. 1. 1. Monosyllabic Root

1. qaṭl, St. emph. hčÜİđÓ /qaṭlå/ dčÀÀÐÛđa /’alpå / »1000«, aŠrđç /gaḇrå/ »man«, dč’Ðđã /nap̄šå / »soul«, aŠÌđÏ /paḡråÒ / »body«, dčljđñ /tar‛å/ »door, gate«, dčÀÀØÜđß /malkå / »king«, f. cČčòØÜđß /malkṯå/ »queen«

2. qiṭl, St. emph. hčÜİÓ /qeṭlå/ aŠÐfl /sep̄rå / »book«, @hčÜËfl‰ /r eḡlå / »foot«, dčÀÀğjŽflÇ /‛esbå / »herb«, dğÀèÜÏ /pelgå/ »half«

3. quṭl, St. emph. hčÜŁìÓ /quṭlå/ dčÀÀ׉Łìi /burkå / »Knee«, dč‘Ł…ŁìÓ /quḏšå / »sanctuary«, ač†yŁì‘ğ /šuḥdå/ »bribery«, cČčò׉Łìi /burkṯå/ »blessing«

4. 1. 2. Disyllabic Root

1. qaṭal, St. emph. hčÜİđÓ /qaṭlå/ aŠrđ /saḇrå/ »hope«, d聊đ× /karḵå/ »city«, aŠrđy /ḥaḇrå/ »companion«

2. qiṭal, St. emph. hčÜİÓ /qeṭlå/ aŠŽfli /besrå / »flesh«, dČčÐä× /kenp̄å / »wing«

3. qaṭål, St. emph. hčÜčİÓ /qṭålå / dôčÛđa /’alåhå / »God«, dč’čãa /’nåšå / »man, people«, aŠč» /ḥmårå / »donkey«, a裆črÇ /‛ḇåḏå / »action«, dčqŠÓ /qråḇå/ »battle«, dčàčÜ‘ /šlåmå / »peace«

4. quṭål, St. emph. hčÜčİÓ /qṭålå / a‰þìÇ‹ /z‛ōrå / »small«, hčÛþìÈ‘ /š‛ōlå/ »coughing«

5. qiṭål, St. emph. hčÜčİÓ qṭålå dčzčrç gḇåḥå »baldheaded«, dčîčä‘ šnåyå »frenzy, infatuation«

6. qaṭil, St. emph. hčÜnİÓ /qṭīlå/ hčÜnÜ× /klīlå/ »crown«, cčòÀžänЍğ /sp̄ī nttå / »ship«

28 Lesson 4

7. qaṭūl, St. emph. hčÛŁìİÓ /qṭūlå/ cčòÛŁëòiğ /bṯūltå/ »virgin«, dč‘ŁìrÛ /lḇūšå/ »clothing«, dčߣìy‰ /rḥūmå/ »loved«

8. qåṭal, St. emph. hčÜİčÓ /qåṭlå/ dčßòčy /ḥåṯmå/ »seal«, dčàÜčÇ /‛ålmå / »eternity, world«

9. qåṭil, St. emph. hčÜİčÓ /qåṭlå/ = active participle of the Base Stem (→ 4. 4.): dčÀÀğiòč× /kåṯbå/ »writing«, dčyŠčÏ /pårḥå/ »flying«, d軉 /råḥmå/ »loving, friend«, cŠqČčñ /tåḇrå/ »breaking«

10. qåṭōl, St. emph. hčÛþìİčÓ /qåṭōlå/ = Nomen agentis: dčíþìÜčç /gålōyå/ »revelator«, dčÓþëŠčÏ /pårōqå/ »saviour«

11. qaṭṭål, St. emph. hčÜčİđÓ /qaṭṭålå / A common pattern for nouns denoting professional activities: dčîčÀÀ׋ /zakkåyå / »victorious«, dčrčäđç /gannåḇå/ »thief«, aŠčÀÀğjžäđç /ga nbbårå / »hero«

12. qiṭṭål, St. emph. hčÜčİÓ /qeṭṭålå / hčÜčÜ /ṭellålå / »shade«, @dčäč’Û /leššånå / »tongue, language«, dčîčÜflÇ /‛ellåyå / »upper«, aŠčÔflÇ /‛eqqårå / »root«

13. quṭṭål, St. emph. hčÜčŁìÓ /quṭṭålå / dčàčףëa /’ukkåmå / »black«, hčÛčaŁì‘ /šu ʾʾ ålå / »question«, dčàčÛŁì‘ /šullåmå / »completion«

14. qaṭṭīl, St. emph. hčÜnİđÓ /qaṭṭīlå/ = adjective: dč‚nØđß /makkīḵå/ »humble«, cčbnğèđ /saggī ʾå/ »much, many«, dčİnÜđ‘ /šallīṭå/ »strong«, aÐđ‘ /šappīrå/ »beautiful«

15. qaṭṭūl, St. emph. hčÛŁìİđÓ /qaṭṭūlå/ dčqŁìğiđa /’abbūḇå / »flute«, a装ŁìàđÇ @/‛ammūḏå / »pillar«, a装ŁìÜđí /yallūḏå / »child«

16. qiṭṭōl, St. emph. hčÛþìİÓ /qeṭṭōlå/ dčþì’fly /ḥeššōḵå/ »darkness«, a‰þìğifl… /debbōrå/ »wasp«, f. cčñ‰þìğifl…ğ /debbōrtå/ »bee«

17. quṭayl, St. emph. hčÜîđİÓ /qṭaylå/ dčàîđÜÇ /‛laymå / »young man«, cČčòàîđÜÇ /‛laymṯå/ »girl«

Lesson 4 29

4. 1. 3. With Prefixes (/ma-/, /mi-/, /ta-/)

1. maqṭal, St. emph. hčÜİÔđß maqṭlå dčÇğ†đß /mad‛å/ »knowledge«, dčäØ’đß /mašknå / »place of dwelling«, dčíò’đß /maštyå / »drink« 2. miqṭal, St. emph. hčÜİÔflß /meqṭlå/, St. abs. ÝđİÔflß /meqṭal / = Infintive base stem (→ 8. 3.): hčÛ‹bĆß /mẹ̄’zlå / »walk«, hč܁bĆß /mẹ̄’ḵlå / »food«, dčíñbĆß /mẹ̄’ṯyå/ »arrival«

3. maqṭål, St. emph. hčÜčİÔđß /maqṭålå / hčÜčÓòđß /maṯqålå / »weight«, a裆čÀÀğjÈđß /ma‛båḏå / »sorcery«

4. miqṭål, St. emph. hčÜčİÔflß /meqṭålå / aŠččíŁ†flß /meḏyårå / »dwelling«

5. maqṭūl, St. emph. hčÛŁìİÔđß /maqṭūlå/ dčÇŁìğjđß /mabbū‛å/ »spring«, hčÛŁì’zđß /maḥšūlå/ »storm«, hčÛŁì’‚đß /maḵšūlå/ »offence«

6. taqṭal, St. emph. hčÜİÓđñ /taqṭlå/ cČčòÜđÜôđñ /tahlalṯå/ »mockery«, cČčòäđäyđñ /taḥnanṯå/ »fervent prayer«, cčò‘ìđñğ /taṭwaštå/ »pollution«

7. taqṭål, St. emph. hčÜčİÓđñ /taqṭålå / dčq čñëđñğ /tawtåḇå/ »settler«

8. taqṭīl, St. emph. hčÜnİÓđñ /taqṭīlå/ a裆n½đñ /talmīḏå / »disciple, pupil«, aŠmğ†Çđñ /ta‛dīrå/ »help«

9. taqṭūl, St. emph. hčÛŁìİÓđñ /taqṭūlå/ dČčÏŁìÜyđñ /taḥlūp̄å / »an exchange«, a‰Łëòyđñ /taḥtūrå/ »haughtiness«, dč‘Łëòđñ /taḵtūšå/ »conflict, fight«

4. 1. 4. With Affixes ( /ån /, /ōn/)

1. q-ṭ-l-ån dčäčîäfli /benyånå/ »building«,@dčãûÛŁëa /ʾulṣånå/ »torment«,@dčã č†ÓŁìÏğ /puqdånå/ »order«

2. q-ṭ-l-ōnå (WS q-ṭ-l-ūnō) (diminutive) dčãþìîÜđ /ṭalyōnå/ »little boy«, dčãþëŠi /brōnå/ »little son«, dčãþìØÜđß /malkōnå/ »a kinglet«

3. Nominals ending in /-åyå/ (relational adjective, nisba) dčîčãìčí /yåwnåyå / »Greek«, dčîčqŠđÇ /‛arḇåyå / »Arab«, dčîčÀÀØÜđß /malkåyå / »kingly«

30 Lesson 4

4. q-ṭ-l-ūṯ (abstract ending) cČčñŁìØÜđß /malkūṯå/ »kingdom«, cČčñŁëŠčÀÀğjžäđç /ga nbbårūṯå/ »heroism«, cČčñŁìäčÔq đò’flßğ /meštaḇqånūṯå/ »abandonment«, cČčñŁìäčîÜđÀğçòflß /meṯgallyånūṯå/ »revelation«, cČčñŁìíŒđÌß /mḡazyūṯå/ »childlessness« Alongside nominals with three radicals, Syriac also has some nominals with two radicals (e.g. dč /šmå / »name« with an irregular plural (→ 3. 6. 2.) and dčß… /dmå / »blood«), as well as nominals with multiple radicals. A few examples: dčqŠđÔÇ /‛qarḇå/ »scorpion«, aŠğjÓŁìÇ /‛uqbrå / »mouse«.

4. 2. Particularities of */qV ṭl/-Nominals

Monosyllabic nominals of the type */qaṭl /, */qiṭl / and */quṭl / (such as aŠrđç /gaḇrå/ »man«, aŠÐfl /sep̄rå / »book« and dč‘Ł…ŁìÓ /quḏšå / »sanctuary«) in the endingless St. abs. = St. cs. form have a vowel following the second radical, while the root vowel is reduced to a schwa . For * quṭl -words, the new vowel always corresponds to the root vowel (ES /o/, WS /u/); for * qaṭl and * qiṭl words, the new vowel is usually an /e/, or an /a/ if the third radical which it precedes is either guttural or an /r/. Examples:

St. emph. St. abs./cs. dčÀÀØÜđß /malkå / ƒÜß /mleḵ/ < */meleḵ/ »king« dč’Ðđã /nap̄šå / “flÀÐã np̄eš < */nep̄eš/ »soul« dč‘Ł…ŁìÓ /quḏšå / ”þëŁ†Ó /qḏoš / < */qeḏoš / »sanctuary« hčÜËfl‰ /reḡlå / ÝflÀˉ /rḡel / < */reḡel / »foot« etc. but: dčljđñ /tar‛å/ ʉñ /tra‛/ (due to /‛/ as 3 rd radical) »door« aŠÐfl /sep̄rå / ŠđÀÀЍ /sp̄ar / (due to /r/ as 3 rd radical) »book«

4. 3. The Determinative Pronoun /d-/

The primary meaning of the indeclinable Syriac determinative pronoun ğ… /d-/ < */di / (also known as the relative pronoun ) is » that of«. It has the following roles: a) to introduce a genitive nominal phrase, and b) to introduce a whole relative clause ( → 14. 6.). The genitive /d-/ is used in paraphrases of the construct state. Examples: dčÀÀØÜđߣ…@c čòîđiğ /baytå ḏ-malkå / »the house of the king«. This can also be expressed using the constructus state dčÀÀØÜđß@òîĆi @/bȩ̄ṯ malkå/ »(those) of the house of king«. Frequently, the first term takes a (proleptic) pronominal suffix (→ 6. 1.) in order to denote a genitive construction, e.g. dğÀčØÜđßğ…@ôĆòîđi /baytȩ̄h d-malkå /, »his house, (that) of the king«.

Lesson 4 31

These three possibilities are summarised in the table below:

Genitive construction: Examples: [St. emph.] /ḏ-/ḏa-/[St. emph.] dčÀÀØÜđߣ…@c čòîđi /baytå ḏ-malkå / »the house of the king« [St. cs.] [St. emph.] dčÀÀØÜđß@òîĆi /bȩ̄ṯ malkå / »(those) of the house of king« [Nomen + Pron.suff.] /d-/da-/ [St. emph.] dčÀÀØÜđßğ…@ôĆòîđi /baytȩ̄h d-malkå / »his house, (that) of the king«

Sometimes St. cs. connections are also used, in which the second term is preceded by a preposition, e.g. @ðđ‡þìÇ‹ dčäčîäflàği /z‛ōray b-menyånå / »small in number«.

In this context, it is also important to memorize the form Ým… /dīl-/, which is formed from the determinative pronoun … /d-/ (base form p… /dī-/) together with the preposition Þ l-. Ým… dīl-, together with the relevant suffixes, denotes relations of possession ( → 6. 1.), e.g. óÜm… /dīl-ȩ̄h/ »(this) of him« = »his« ( óÜmŁ… @dčqČčò× /kṯåḇå ḏīl-ȩ̄h/ »his book«).

4. 4. Active Participle (Base Stem)

The active participle is an adjective derived from a verb. For the simplest verb stem, the so-called base stem, it follows the phoneme row K1-å-K2-e-K3 (K1-3 here denote the regular consonantal radicals of the root). It follows the inflection of nominals, and is used to express the present. In the following, its forms are demonstrated using the example word tflòğÀÀč×Č /kåṯeḇ / »writing«. They are as follows:

Sg. Pl. m. St. abs. tŞČòğÀÀč× /kåṯeḇ / ³ğiòğÀÀč× /kåṯbīn/ m. St. emph. dčÀÀğiòğÀÀč× /kåṯbå/ dŽÀÀğiòğÀÀč× /kåṯbȩ̄/

f. St. abs. dčÀÀğiòğÀÀč× /kåṯbå/ åčÀÀğişòğÀÀč× /kåṯbån / f. St. emph. cčòq òğÀÀč×ŞČ /kåṯeḇtå/ cČčòÀčÀÀğişòğÀÀč× /kåṯbåṯå/

Note: in ES, ĆtČ č×ğÀÀò /kåṯȩ̄ḇ/ (with a secondary lengthening of the stressed final syllable) is sometimes used in place of tflòğÀÀč×Č /kåṯeḇ /.

4. 5. Vocabulary

A. alive /ḥayyå/ dčîđy C. doing /ʽåḇeḏ / Ł† flflÀrčÇ eternity, world /‛ålmå / dčàÜčÇ writing /kåṯeḇ / tflòč× light /nuhrå/ aŠôŁìã putting /nåseḇ/ sflŽčã image /ṣalmå / dč½ú pursuing /råḏep̄/ ČÒŁ…‰ birthday /bȩ̄ṯ yaldå/ ačğ†ÀÜđí@òîĆ₣i helping /påreq / ÖflŠčÏ

32 Lesson 4

foot /reḡlå / hčÜËfl‰ saying /ʾåmar/ Šđßča Jesus /Īšō‛/ Êþì’m witnessing /såheḏ / Ł†flôč B. place of dwelling /mašknå / dčäØ’đß D. heart /lebbå/ dčÀÀğjÛ completion /šullåmå / dčàčÛŁì‘ soul, life, self /nap̄šå / dč’Ðđã goodness /ṭaybūṯå/ cČčñŁìğjîđ E. order /puqdånå/ dčã č†ÓŁìÏğ deed /su‛rånå / dčãŠÇŁì synagogue director /rab kåhnå/ dčäôčÀÀ×@ğl‰ number /menyånå / dčäčîäflß law (< gr.) /nåmōså/ dčþìàčã helper /‛åḏōrå/ a‰þ룆 čÇ tongue, language /leššånå / dčäč’Û

4. 6. Exercises

A. Transcribe and translate the following words: 6 aŁč†Üđí @òî ĆÀğiŁ… @dčßìčí 5@dčÀÀØÜđß@şïđqČčò× 4 dč’čãa@Ýˉ 3 dğÀčØÜđßğ…@ôĆòîđi 2 dčîđđŁ…@cČčñŁìØÜđß 1 dşĆîđy@ïđßìčí @8@dčàÜčÇğ…@ôĆŠôŁìã 7 Êþì’mğ…@ó½ú

B. Identify the following nominal forms: @dčÓþëŠčÏ ~a裆n½đñ@~ dčãŠÇŁì @~dčäØ’đß @~dčäč’Û@~aÐđ‘@~dčàčÛŁì‘@~hčÜËfl‰

C. Form the active participle (f.sg. and m.pl. in St. abs.) of the following verbs: ÖflŠğÀÀčÏ 7 čÇğÀflÀr†ŁŁ 6 ğflôč†Ł 5 sğflŽčã 4 đßčağÀÀŠ 3 ČÒ flŁ…‰ 2 tŞò č×ğÀÀ 1

D. Form the St. cs. of the following nominals: dč’Ðđã @~dčàÜčÇ@~dčÀÀØÜđß

E. Write out the following until familiar: @dčÀÀØÜđß@şïđqČčò× 1 dŽäôčÀÀ× @ğl‰ òîĆi 2 dğÀčØÜđßğ… @óƍþìàčã 3 dčÀÀØÜđߣ…@dčã č†ÓŁìÏğ 4 dØÜđß@ƒÜß@òîĆi 5

1 2 3 4 5

Lesson 4 33

̈ 1 ̈ ܒܪ 2 ܕ 3 ܕ 4 ̈ 5

Lesson 5 5. 1. Independent and Enclitic Personal Pronouns

Depending on syntactic usage, we can distinguish between independent and (shortened) enclitic personal pronouns. The latter are always enclitic, i.e. unstressed, and follow on from a preceding nominal word form. The forms are as follows:

Independent enclitic sg.1.c. dčãa /ʾ enå / »I« dčãa /-ʾnå / 2.m. òžãđa /ʾantt / »you« ñ @đÀÀ /-(a)tt / 2.f. ðòžãđa /ʾ antt y/ »you« ðñ @đÀÀ /-(a)tt y/ 3.m. Łìô /hū/ »he« ìžô /-hū/ or /–w/ 3.f. oô /hī/ »she« ïžô /-hī/ or /–y/ pl.1.c. åđäy /ḥnan / »we« åđã /-nan / 2.m. æþëòžãđa /ʾanttōn / »you« æþëñ /-tōn / n (WS /ʾa ttūn/) (WS /–tūn/) 2.f. åíĆòžãđa @/ʾanttȩ̄n/ »you« åíĆñ /-tȩ̄n/ 3.m. æþìäflô /hennōn / »they« æþìãa /ʾennōn / (WS /hennūn/) (WS /ʾennūn/) 3.f. ´Ćäflô /hennȩn/ »they« ´Ćãa /ʾennȩ̄n/

It is important to note the composite forms ŁìíŁìô /hūyū / »he is« (ž /l-ḥad-hū ’alåhå såḡḏīn-ḥnan / »we adore one God«.

5. 1. 1. The Active Participle with the Enclitic Personal Pronoun as Expression of the Present

Often, an enclitic pronoun follows a participle. The active participle in St. abs. followed by an enclitic pronoun serves to express the present tense:

sg. 1.m dčãa@t ŞČòğÀÀč× /kåṯeḇ-ʾnå /dčäq òğÀÀč×ŞČ /kåṯeḇ-nå / »I am writing« 1.f. dčãa@dčÀÀğiòğÀÀč× /kåṯbå-ʾnå /dčäčÀÀğiòğÀÀč× /kåṯbå-nå / »I am writing« 2.m. òžãđa tòğÀÀč×ŞČ /kåṯeḇ-ʾantt /òđÀğiòğÀÀč× /kåṯb-att/ »you are writing« 2.f. ðòžãđa dčÀÀğiòğÀÀč× /kåṯbå-ʾantt y/ðòđÀğiòğÀÀč× /kåṯb-att y/ »you are writing« 3.m. @tžôŁì ŞČòğÀÀč× /kåṯeḇ-hū/ŁŁìğiòč× /kåṯbū/tŞČòğÀÀč× @/kåṯeḇ / »he is writing«

3.f. ïžô@dčÀÀğiòğÀÀč× /kåṯbå-hy/ïčÀÀği òğÀÀč×ČČ /kåṯbåy /dčÀÀğiòğÀÀč× @ /kåṯbå / »she is writing« Lesson 5 35

pl. 1.m. åđäžy ³ğiòğÀÀč× /kåṯbīn-ḥnan /åđänğiòğÀÀč× @/kåṯbīn-an / »we are writing « 1.f. åđäžy åčÀÀğişòğÀÀč× /kåṯbån-ḥnan /åđäčÀÀğişòğÀÀč× @/kåṯbån-an / »we are writing « 2.m. æþëòžãa@³ğiòč× /kåṯbīn-ʾntōn /æþëònğiòč× /kåṯbī-tōn / »you are writing« 2.f. åíĆòžãa åčÀÀğişòč× /kåṯbån-ʾntȩ̄n/åíĆòčÀÀğişòč× /kåṯbå-tȩ̄n/ »you are writing« 3.m. æþìãa@³ğiòč× /kåṯbīn-ʾennōn /³ğiòč× @/kåṯbīn/ »they are writing« 3.f. ´Ć₣ãa åčÀÀğişòč× /kåṯbån-ʾennȩ̄n/åčÀÀğişòč× @/kåṯbån / »they are writing«

5. 1. 2. The Enclitic Personal Pronoun as Copula in Nominal Clauses

Following on from a noun or a pronoun, the enclitic pronoun functions as the so-called copula of a formal noun clause comprising three terms, i.e. a sentence without a verb, consisting of a subject (nominal), a predicate and a further element which serves to link the subject with the predicate. It corresponds roughly to the English auxiliary verb to be . Examples: dğÀčØÜđß@bčãa@dčãa /ʾenå-ʾnå malkå / »I am the king« ìžô@dğÀčØÜđß@Łìô /hū malkå-hw/ »he is the king« ïžô@cČčòØÜđß @oô /hī malkṯå-hy/ »she is the queen« Łìžô@åčß ñđČ @dğÀčØÜđß /malkå ṯammån-hū/ »the king is there« ožô@åčß ñ@cČčòØÜđßđČ /malkṯå ṯammån-hī/ »the queen is there« æþëòžãđa @åčß ñđ @æþëòžãđa /ʾanttōn tammån-ʾanttōn / »you (m. pl. informal) are there« dčàÜčÇŁ…@bčãa@ôĆŠôŁìã@dčãa /ʾenå nuhrȩ̄h-ʾnå ḏ-‛ålmå / »I am the light of the world« (cf. Jn 9,5)

As already noted in lesson one, ( → 1. 10.), /å/ followed by /y /or /i/ (or /ī/) becomes /åy / (WS /ōy/), e.g.@ïžô@cČčòØÜđß /malkṯå-hy/ < * /malkṯå/ + /hī/ »she is the queen«. In ES, /å/ followed by /w/ or /u/ (or /ū/) becomes /åw /; in WS however, it remains unchanged as /aw /, e.g. ES ìžô@dğÀčØÜđß /malkå-hw/ < * /malkå / + /hū/ »he is the king« [read: h malkåw ], WS /malka- w/.

In a three-term nominal clause, the copula can take either the second or the third position in the sentence – especially where the subject and the predicate are both nouns. »David is my Lord« can thus be expressed in the following ways: (1) †mëŁ …čğ @Łìžô@ðŠčß /mår y-hū D̠åwīḏ/ (predicate – copula – subject) (2) Łìžô @ Ł†më čğ…@ðŠčß /mår y Dåwīḏ-hū/ (predicate – subject – copula) (3) ðŠčß @ Łìžô@Ł†më č… /Dåwīḏ-hū mår y/ (subject – copula – predicate) (4) @Łìžô@ðŠčß@Ł†më @… /Dåwīḏ mår y-hū/ (subject – predicate – copula) Each of these variations involves a subtle shift of emphasis. The specific emphasis depends on which element of the sentence falls in the first, stressed position. Sentences (1) and (2) are descriptive. They are responses to the question:

36 Lektion 5

»Who is (David)?« (answer: »He is my Lord«). By contrast, Sentences (3) and (4) are responses to the question »Who is (my Lord)?« (answer: »It is David«). Sentence (4) gives the impression of drawing a contrast (»It is David and nobody else«). (Of the sentence forms listed here, (2) is especially common in poetry).

The 3rd person enclitic pronoun often functions as a copula in conjunction with a personal pronoun in the 2 nd or (less commonly) 1 st person. In this case, it takes the place of the 1st or 2nd person enclitic pronoun. Examples: dčzn’ß@Łìžô @òžãđa /ʾantt-hū mšīḥå/ »you are the Christ« (Mk 8,29) dčÀÀØÜđß@Łìžô @òžãđa /ʾantt-hū malkå/ »you are the king« Compare: òžãđa dčÀÀØÜđß òžãđa /ʾantt malk-ʾantt/ »you are king« Łìžô dčÀÀØÜđß òžãđa /ʾantt malkå-hw/ »you are king« åčß đ @ñ æþìãa @æþëòžãđa /ʾanttōn-ʾennōn tammån/ »you are there« dôčÛađ…ğ @Łìžô@dčznÜ‘@dčã a /ʾenå šlīḥå-hw d-ʾalåhå/ »I am the apostle of God« More commonly written as: dôčÛađğ…@dčznÜ‘@dčãa@dčã a /ʾenå-ʾnå šlīḥå ḏ-ʾalåhå/ »I am the apostle of God«

Nominal clauses consisting of two elements are less common than those with three: dčãa@dčÀÀØÜđß /malkå-ʾnå/ »I am king« dčàİÓë@dčãa@aŠÐđÇ /‛ap̄rå-ʾnå w-qeṭmå/ »I am dust and ashes.« In this form, the enclitic pronoun takes on the role of the subject.

5. 2. Demonstrative Pronouns

There are two sets of demonstrative pronouns: one for near deixis and one for far deixis. The near deixis takes the following forms:

Sg. Pl. m. dčäô /hånå/ »this« (rarely åô /hån/) ô´Ü /hålȩ̄n/ »these« f. aƆôŁ /håḏȩ̄/ »this« (rarely Ł†ô /håḏ/)

h Combination with enclitic personal pronouns in the singular results in the forms ìžô@dčäô /hånå- w/ (WS /håna-hw/) and @ïžô@a裆ô /håḏå-hy/ (!), usually to be translated as »this is ...«. The demonstratives listed above can be used either as substantives or adjectives (i.e. attributes). In the latter case, they can either directly precede or follow the word, e.g. cčğòîđÀq@d čäô /hånå ḇaytå/ »this house« or čäôd c@ čòîđiğ /baytå hånå/ »this house«.

Lesson 5 37

The far deixis takes the following forms:

Sg. Pl. m. ëčôğ /håw/ »that« æþìã čôğ /hånōn/ (WS /hōnūn/) »those« f. ðčôğ /håy/ »that« ´Ćã čôğ /hånȩ̄n/ »those« @

ğ…@ëčôğ /håw d-/ (m.sg.), ğ…@ðčôğ /håy d-/ (f.sg.) are used to express »he/she, who«, whereas in the plural ğ…@ ´Üô /hålȩ̄n d- / »those, who« is usually used. »This one (m.)/(f.), who« is expressed using čäôd ƒíađ… /d-’a yḵ hånå/, aŁ†ô ƒíađ… /d-’a yḵ håḏȩ̄/.

5. 3. Interrogative Pronouns and Adverbs

Substantive pronouns: åđÀğß /man/ »who?« with an enclitic: ŁìäđÀğß /manū/ (< * /mann-hū/) »who is it?« dčß /må/, åğÀčß /mån/, dčäčß /månå/ »what?« With an enclitic: ìčäčß /månåw/ (WS /mōnaw/)

• Adjective pronouns: m.sg. dčäíđa /ʾaynå/ »Which?« f.sg. ač†íđağ /ʾaydå/ »Which?« pl. ´Üíđa /ʾaylȩ̄n /»Which?«

• Important interrogative adverbs: dčÀÀØíđa /ʾaykå/ »Where?« ðòđßa /ʾemmaṯy/ »When?« dččäđÀÀØíđa /ʾaykannå/,@åđÀÀØíđa @/ʾaykan/ »How?« dčäčč½ /l-månå/ »Why?«

5. 4. Words for »Somebody« and »Something«

The expression »somebody« or »one« is denoted using “čãa /’nåš/ (eig.: »a man«); “čãa@hčÛ /lå ’nåš/ means »nobody«; the plural åşn’čãa /’nåšīn/ (St. abs.) means »some (people)«. »Some« can also be expressed with ğ…@òma /ʾīṯ d-/ (literally: »there is (someone), who«). »Something« is denoted using âflğ†flß /meddem/ (< * /mnd ‛m/, derived from the root y-d-‛ »to know«). When it is followed by an accompanying noun, it can be written in St. abs. (e.g. @“nği@âflğ†flß @/meddem bīš/ » something evil«) or in St. emph. (e.g. dčÀÀği‰@âflğ†flß /meddem rabbå/ »something great«).

38 Lektion 5

5. 5. kol »every, all« The noun Ý× /kol/ (WS /kul/), which has the basic meaning »every, all« (e.g. ݁@aĆŠčß /mårȩ̄ ḵol/ »The Lord of all«), takes a geminate /l/ when preceding a pronominal suffix (e.g. ´ĆôÜ× /kollhȩ̄n/ »they all«) and functions as an indeterminate word with the meaning »whole«, »every«, »all«. It can either precede or follow a substantive, either in St. cs or in combination with a pronominal suffix:

a) Ý× /kol/ in St. cs. before determined substantives in sg. oder pl.: cč Àò žämŁ† Ý×@ß @/kol mḏī nttå/ »every city« a‰ñđa Ý× /kol ʾaṯrå/ »every place« ÙşîÀčîđy@ïđßìčí@Ý× /kol yåwmay ḥayyåyk/ »every day of my life«

b) Ý× /kol/ with a pronominal suffix: æþì‚Ü× /kollḵōn/ »you all« åđÜ× /kollan/ »we all« ´ĆôÜ× /kollhȩ̄n/ »they all«

c) Ý× /kol/ with a pronominal suffix . preceding a substantive in the sg. or pl.: cč Àò žämŁ† @ß ğóčÜ× /kollåh mḏī nttå/ (f.) »the whole city« dŽ’mğ†đÓ æþìôÜ× /kollhōn qaddīšȩ̄/ (m. pl.) »all the saints« cČčòčßşìčí æþìôÜ× /kollhōn yåwmåṯå/ (m. pl.) »every day« ´Üô@hÜflß ´ĆôÜ× /kollhȩ̄n mellȩ̄ (f. pl.) hålȩ̄n/ »all these words«

d) Ý× /kol/ with pronominal suffix following a substantive in the sg. oder pl.: ğóčÜ×@c č Àò žämŁ†ß /mḏī nttå ḵollåh/ »the whole city« ğóčÜ×@ï’Ðđã /nap̄šy (f.) kollåh/ »my whole soul«

Also note: ğ…@Ý× @/kol d-/ »everyone who«; Ł…@dčäíđa@Ý× /kol ʾaynå ḏ-/ »everyone who«; ğ…@âğfl†flß@Ý× /kol meddem d-/ »everything which«.

5. 6. Reflexive Expressions

Syriac has no reflexive pronouns. Instead, the nouns dč’Ðđã /nap̄šå/ »soul, self« and dčßþìäÓ /qnōmå/ »self, nature« are used in place of reflexive pronouns e.g. dôčÛđa@ƒč’Ðđã @òžãđa@Ł†ğÀflÀrčÇ /‛åḇeḏ-ʾantt nap̄šåḵ ʾalåhå/ »(because you, being a man,) make yourself God« (Jn 10,33) óĆßþìäÔđÛ@cìžô@ŠğÀÀđßča /ʾåmar-hwå la-qnōmȩ̄h/ »he said within himself«.

Lesson 5 39

5. 7. Vocabulary

A. It is I /ʾenå-ʾnå/ dčãa@dčãa What? /mōn / æþìß father /ʾaḇå/ dčqđa Which? /ʾaynå/ dčäíđa if not /ʾellå/ hčÛa he wrote /kṯaḇ/ tđò× Flesh /besrå/ aŠŽfli you /ʾantt/ òžãđa testament (< gr.) Ł /dyåtẹ̄qȩ̄/ dÓò čí… bad, evil /bīš/ “ni God /ʾalåhå/ dôčÛ đađŁ Why? /l-månå/ dčäč½ What? /månå/ dčäčß just /kẹ̄ʾnå/ dčãb× it is he who /hūyū/ ŁìíŁìô truth /šrårå/ a‰Š‘ Nazarene /nåṣråyå/ dčí‰ûčã salt /melḥå/ dčzÜflß

5. 8. Exercises

A. Write the following sentences according to the transcription used in this book, and translate: (Jn 8,12) @dčàÜčÇğ…@ôĆŠôŁìã@dčãa@dčãa 1 @ @ @dčÀÀØÜđß@Łìžô@òžãđa 2 (Jn 8,23) @dčàÜčÇ@æþë òžãđa@dčäô@åČß@æþë òžãđa 3 @ @ dÓòčí …@Łìô tğŞòč× 4 dčàÜčÇğ…@óÓþëŠčÏ@a‰Š’đi@ŁìíŁìô 5 (Jn 9,17) @ìžô@dčnrãđ…@dčãa@ŠğÀÀđßča@dčãaŁ 6 (Jn 8,18) dčãa@Ł† ğflôč Ł…@dčãa@dčãa 7 (Mk 3,11) @dôčÛa đğ ôĆŠ@… Či@Łìô@òžãđa 8 (Ac 22,8) @ò žãđa@ČÒ Č…‰fl @òžãađ…Ł @dčí‰ûčã@Êþì’m@ìžô@dčãa 9 @ @ (Mk 9,50) @dčzÜflß@ïžô@aÐđ‘ 10 (AMS 432) @_oÛ@æþëòžã a@åmŠğßča@æþìß@dč’ô@hčÛa@c čò’ni@æþì¢ğ @dčãa@Ł†flÀğÀrčÇ@hčÛ @11 (Mk 8,29) @dčzn’ß@Łìžô@òžãđa 12

B. Write out according to the transcription used in this book: @ @ a裆črÇ@dčäíđa@Ýİ flß 1 “nği@âflğ†flß 2 cč Àò žämŁ† @ß ğóčÜ× 3

C. Read the following sentences, and practice writing them until fluent: (Jn 8,18) dčãa@Ł†ğflô荣…@dčãa@dčãa 1 (Mk 3,11) @dôčÛa đğ @… ôĆŠČi@Łìô@òžãđa 2 (Ac 22,8) @òžãđa@ČÒ fl…‰Ł @òžãađ…Ł @dčí‰ûčã@Êþì’m ìžô@dčãaŁ@ 3

40 Lektion 5

(Jn 8,18) 1 (Mk 3,11) @ 2 (Ac 22,8) @ 3

(Jn 8,18) ܐ̱ ܕܕ ܐ̱ ܐ 1 (Mk 3,11) @ܐܕ ܗ ܘܗ̱ ̱ܐ 2 ̇ (Ac 22,8) @̱ܐ ܦܕܪ ܐܕ̱ ܪ ܥ ܘܗ̱ ܐ 3

Lesson 6 6. 1. Pronominal Suffixes (Possessive Suffixes)

Like several other semitic languages, Syriac makes use of pronominal suffixes which can be attached to nouns, prepositions or verbs. When attached to a noun, they usually serve to indicate possession (= possessive suffixes); in conjunction with verbs, they serve to indicate the object (= object suffixes). At the formal level, possessive suffixes are attached to nominals in the St. emph without a final vowel, except for nouns in the masc. plural, in which case they are attached to the St. cs. with the ending /-ay/. We can distinguish between two main sets of personal pronouns, set A and set B. Roughly speaking, set A can be considered the singular set, and set B the plural set:

• Set A is used with most (formally) masculine nominals in the singular (for exceptions, see → 6. 3.), and with all feminine nominals in both the singular and the plural. In some suffixes, the final vowel has lost its stress and is no longer pronounced, although they are still written according to the old orthography, e.g ïØÜđß /malk y/ < * /malkī/ »my king«, m… /dīn y/ »my judgement«. The initial consonant k common to many pronominal suffixes attached to nouns is pronounced spirant in the singular, e.g. ƒčäm… /dīnåḵ/ »your judgement« (→ 2. 2.). • Set B is used only for nominals in the masc. plural. In the endings cited here, the element /-ay-/ is the St. cs ending; exceptions to this are the 3. Person sg. in set B: 3.m.sg. /-åw hy / and 3.f.sg. /-ȩ̄h/.

Set A Set B Singular set Plural set Sg.3.m. ôĆ /-ȩ̄h/ ïžôëč /-åwhy / hy (WS /-ȩ̄h /) (WS /-aw /) 3.f. ô@č /-åh / fşîĆÀÀ /-ȩ̄h/ 2.m. „ č /-åḵ/ ÙşîđÀÀ /-ayk / 2.f. ï‚ĆÀÀ /-ȩ̄ḵy/ ïØşîđÀÀ /-ayk y/ 1.c. ð –Ø (< /- y/) şïđÀÀ /-ay / Pl.3.m. æþìô /-hōn / æþìôşîđÀÀÀ /-ayhōn / (WS /-hūn/) (WS /-ayhūn/) 3.f. ´ĆĆô /-hȩ̄n/ ´ĆôşîđÀÀÀ /-ayhȩ̄n/

2.m. æþì /-ḵōn / æþìØşîđÀÀ /-aykōn / (WS /-ḵūn/) (WS /-aykūn/) 2.f. ´ĆÀ /-ḵȩ̄n/ ´ĆØşîđÀÀ /-aykȩ̄n/ 1.c. æ@đÀÀ /-an / åşîđÀÀ /-ayn / Lektion 6 42

Taking the example of dčäm… /dīnå/ »judgement«, the full paradigm is as follows (in all cases, the vowel of the final syllable is stressed, e.g. åđäm… /dīnan/ »our judgement«, Ùşîđäm… /dīnayk/ »your (m.) judgements«, æþìØşî đäm… /dīnaykōn/ »your (m.) judgement«). Nouns in the singular (masc.) with suffixes (set A): Sg. Pl. 3.m. óĆäm… /dīnȩ̄h/ »his judgement«@ æþìôäm… /dīnhōn/ »their judgements« (WS /dīnhūn/)@ 3.f. fčäm… /dīnåh/ »her judgement« ´ĆĆôäm… /dīnhȩ̄n/ »their judgements« @ 2.m. ƒčäm… /dīnåḵ/ »your judgement« æþì‚äm… /dīnḵōn/ »your judgements« @ (WS /dīnḵūn/)@ 2.f. ï‚Ćäm… /dīnȩ̄ḵ y/ »your judgement«@ ´ĆÀ‚äm… /dīnḵȩ̄n/ »your judgements« @ 1.c. m… /dīn y/ »my judgement« åđäm… /dīnan/ »our judgements«

Nouns in the plural (masc.) with suffixes (set B): Sg. Pl. 3.m. ïžôşìčäm… /dīnåw hy / »his judgements« æþìôşîđäm… /dīnayhōn / »their judgements« hy (WS /dīnaw /)@ (WS /dīnhūn/)@ 3.f. fşîĆäm… /dīnȩ̄h / »her judgements« @ ´ĆĆô şî đäm… /dīnayhȩ̄n / »their judgements« @ 2.m. Ùşîđäm… /dīnayk / »your judgements«@ æþì Ø şî đä m… /dīnaykōn / »your judgements«@ 2.f. ïØşîđäm… /dīnayk y/ »your judgements«@ ´ğØşî đäm… /dīnaykȩ̄n / »your judgements« @ 1.c. şï đäm… /dīnay / »my judgements« şîå đäm… /dīnayn / »our judgements«

6. 2. */qV ṭl/-Nominals with Possessive Suffixes

Pronominal suffixes attached to monosyllabic nominals of the form */qVṭl/ are always attached to the base form of the St. emph. The paradigm for */qVṭl/-nominals with possessive suffixes are as follows, illustrated using the example word dčÀÀØÜđß /malkå/ »king«, i.e. /malk-/: Sg. Pl. 3.m. óĆØÜđß /malkȩ̄h/ »his king« @ ïžôşìčÀÀØÜđß /malkåw hy / »his kings« @ 3.f. ğóčÀÀØÜđß /malkåh/ »her king« @ fşîĆÀØÜđß /malk ȩ̄h / »her kings« @ 2.m. ƒčÀÀØÜđß /malkåḵ/ »your king« @ ÙşÀÀîÀ đÀÀ ØÜđß /malkayk/ »your kings« @ 2.f. ïØĆØÜđß /malkȩ̄ḵy/ »your king« @ ïØşÀÀîÀ đÀÀ ØÜđß /malk ayk y/ »your kings« @ 1.c. ïØÜ đß /malky/ »my king« şï đÀÀ ØÜ đß /malkay/ »my kings« etc.@ etc.@

Lesson 6 43

6. 3. Irregular Nominals with Possessive Suffixes

Many of the nominals cited in → 3. 6. 2. take irregular forms when a possessive suffix is attached. A few examples: • For many nominals, the attachment of suffixes is based on the St. cs, e.g. cČčòØÜđß /malkṯå/ »queen« (sg. St. emph.): eČčòØÜđß /malkṯåh/ »her queen«, in contrast to æþìôòđÀØÜđß /malkaṯhōn/ (St. cs. + Suff.) »their (pl.) queen«. • Nominal forms with several consonants are often subject to vowel reductions when suffixes are attached, e.g. dčäØ’đß /mašknå/ (sg. St. emph.): fčäØ’đß /mašknåh/ »her place of dwelling« in contrast to æþìôòđäØ’đß /mašknaṯhōn/ (St. cs. + Suff.) »their (pl.) place of dwelling«. • For some nominals, such as đačqd /ʾaḇå/ »father«, dčyđa /ʾaḥå/ »brother«, dč» /ḥmå/ »father-in-law« and dč /šmå/ »name«, the attachment of a suffix in the 1.sg. ( čaqï /ʾåḇy/, ïyča /ʾåḥy/, ïà Ćy /ḥȩ̄my/, ïàĆ‘ /šȩ̄my/) results in a lengthening of the stem vowel; the nominals đačqd /ʾaḇå/ »father«, dčyđa /ʾaḥå/ »brother«, dč» /ḥmå/ »father-in-law« take /u/ as a final vowel prior to all possessive suffixes (except for the 1.sg.); (cf. e.g. ïžôŁìqđa /ʾaḇū hy/ »his Vater« in contrast to ó /šmȩ̄h/ »his name« and the suffixes which begin with consonants, e.g. æþìŁìqđa /ʾaḇūḵōn/ »your father« and æþì‚àfl‘ /šemḵōn/ »your name«).

The paradigm for irregular nominals with possessive suffixes is as follows, taking đačqd /ʾaḇå/ »father« as our example:

Sg. Pl. 3.m. ïžôŁìqđa /ʾaḇū hy/ æþìôŁìqđa /ʾaḇūhōn / ܽ ܽ ܰ (WS ܢܘܗܼ ܐ /ʾaḇūhūn/) 3.f. ôŁìqđa /ʾaḇūh / ´ĆôŁìqđa ʾaḇūhȩ̄n 2.m. „Łìqđa /ʾaḇūḵ / æþìŁìqđa /ʾaḇūḵōn / ܽ ܽ ܰ (WS ܢܼ ܼ ܐ /ʾaḇūḵūn/) 2.f. ïŁìqđa /ʾaḇūḵ y/ ´ĆÀÀŁìqđa /ʾaḇūḵȩ̄n/ 1.c. ïqča /ʾåḇy / æŁìqđa /ʾaḇūn /

The paradigm of čqđaŽôd /ʾaḇåhȩ̄/ »parents«, the plural of dčqđa /ʾaḇå/ »father«, is as follows:

Sg. Pl. 3.m. ïžôŁşì ôčqđa /ʾaḇåhūhy/ æþìôşîô čqđa /ʾaḇåhayhōn / 3.f. ôŁşì ôčqđa /ʾaḇåhūh / ´Ćôşîô čqđa /ʾaḇåhayhȩ̄n/ 2.m. ÚŁşì ôčqđa /ʾaḇåhūḵ/ æþìØşîô čqđa /ʾaḇåhaykōn/ 2.f. ïףşì ôčqđa /ʾaḇåhūḵy/ ´ĆÀØ şîô čqđa /ʾaḇåhaykȩ̄n/ 1.c. şïô čqđa /ʾaḇåhay/ åşîô čqđa /ʾaḇåhayn/

44 Lesson 6

6. 4. Prepositions with Pronominal Suffixes

Pronominal suffixes are often attached to prepositions. Some prepositions take the suffixes from set A ( singular set ), while others take the suffixes from set B ( plural set ). Examples: A. Prepositions with suffixes from set A:

Sg. Pl. 3.m. flßóĆä /mennȩ̄h / »from him«@æþìôä flß /menhōn / »from them«@ 3.f. flßfčä /mennåh/ »from her«@´ĆĆôä flß /menhȩ̄n / »from them«@ 2.m. fl߃čä /mennåḵ/ »from you«@æþì‚ä flß /menḵōn / »from you«@

2.f. ï‚Ćä flß /mennȩ̄ḵ y/ »from you«@´ ĆÀÀ‚äflß /menḵȩ̄n / »from you«@ 1.c. flß /men y/ »from me« flßåđä /menan / »from us«

It is important to note that with an attached suffix in 1.sg, l /b-/ »in, with« and Þ /l-/ »to, for« become io /bī/ and . Ûo /lī/ respectively (full vowel /i/!), and that preceding a suffix, the / n/ of the preposition åČß /men / »from« is geminate ( → 3. 1.).

• Here are some important prepositions with suffixes from set A: l /b-/ »in, with«, Þ /l-/ »to, for«, áđÇ /‛am / »together with«, åČß /men / »from«, ‰đòčiČ /båṯar / »after«, ‰đòŽfliČ /bestar / »after, behind«, ñìÛ /lwåṯ/ »beside, by« ñŁìÐÛ @ /lp̄uṯ / »according to, corresponding«; also: ÝđÀÀğjÓŁìÛ /luqbal / »against, facing« and ÝqŁìÔÛ /lquḇl-/ (e.g. óÜqŁìÔÛ /lquḇlȩ̄h/ »against him«).

B. Prepositions with suffixes from set B: Many prepositions are combined with suffixes from set B. In some cases, it is possible for suffixes from both sets to appear alongside one another. Certain prepositions take a particular form when attached to pronominal suffixes (e.g. the form with an additional /-åṯ-/), which are not identical with their basic form (without a suffix), e.g. ñìđa /ʾaḵwåṯ/ (without suffix: ƒíđa /ʾayḵ/ »like«), òčÜİflß /meṭṭolåṯ/ »on your account« (without suffix: Ýİß /meṭṭol /), òčäîđi /baynåṯ/ »between« (without suffix: òîĆi /bȩ̄ṯ/).

• Here are some important prepositions with suffixes from set B: ÝđÇ /‛al-/ »on, by« (e.g. ïđÜÇ /‛lay / »on him«, æþìØîđÜÇ /‛laykōn / »upon them«; without suffix: ÝđÇ /‛al /), Ł†í₣ú /ṣȩ̄ḏ/, …aĆú /ṣȩ̄’ḏ/ »beside, next to«, ČÑčÜy /ḥlåp̄/ »instead of«, âčŁ†Ó /qḏåm / or ⣅ŁìÓ /quḏm / »before« (without suffix: âčŁ†Ó /qḏåm /), Ł…þìzÜđi /ba-lḥoḏ / »alone« (e.g. ðđ…þìzÜđiŁ /ba-lḥoḏay / »I only«), Ł†čÈÜfli /bel‛åḏ / »without«, ñþìyñ /tḥoṯ / »under« (without suffix: òîĆyñ /tḥẹṯ/ and ñþìyñ /tḥoṯ /), ´ĆÈÛ /l‛ẹ̄n/ »in full view of«, ð‰čŁ†y /ḥḏåray / »around«, ´đi /bayn-/ »between« (e.g. æþìôîđäîđi /baynayhōn / »between them«; without suffix: òîĆi /bȩ̄ṯ/; cf. also òčäîđi /baynåṯ/ together with the suffixes from set A).

Lesson 6 45

C. Prepositions which do not take suffixes: Certain prepositions never take a pronominal suffix, and can only precede nouns. These are, for the most part, compound word forms. • The following prepositions are never combined with pronominal suffixes: Šđݍ /sṭar / »except«, ÝflÈÛ /l-‛el / »above«, òyđòÛČ /l-ṯaḥt / »under«, åČß@ìČč /l-ḡåw men / »within« and ŠđÀrÛ /l-ḇar / »outside«. òîĆi /bȩ̄ṯ/ »between« and dčß đ†ÇŁ /‛ḏammå / »until« are also frequently not directly suffixed. Instead, periphrase with Þ /l-/ »to, for« is common, e.g. æþì¨@dčß đ†ÇŁ /‛ḏammå l-ḵōn / »unto you«.

D. Prepositions which can be combined with one another, for example: óĆäflß@ÝflÈÛ /l-‛el mennȩ̄h/ »above him« æþìôäflß @ŠđÀrÛ /l-ḇar menhōn / »outside of them«

6. 5. Pronominal Suffixes (Object Suffixes)

The object suffixes attached to verbs are presented in full later in this book ( → 10. 3.; 10. 4.; 10. 5.; 10. 6.; 10. 7.). However, it is important to note at this stage that the object suffix 1.c.sg. takes the form -(a)n y (e.g. òqđđïã Č ò×Č kṯaḇṯan y < * katabat- anni »she wrote me«), and that enclitic personal pronouns are used in place of object suffixes in the 3.m./f.pl. forms (e.g. æþìãa@ÝđİÓ /qṭal-ʾennon / »he killed her (m.pl.)«, not: qṭal-hōn ).

6. 6. The Verb of Existence /ʾīṯ/

Syriac employs a word, òma /ʾīṯ/, whose basic function is to denote existence. It is used without a suffix (usually followed by the preposition Þ /l/ »to, for« + pronominal suffix) to mean »there is«, e.g. dčàčÜ‘@åđÛ@òma /ʾīṯ-lan šlåmå / »we have freedom« (literally: »there is peace for us«) åmŠßa č…@òmaë@NNNåmŠßağ č…@òmağ /ʾīṯ d-ʾåmrīn ... w-ʾīṯ d-ʾåmrīn / »there are those who say ... and there are those who say« (= »some claim…but others claim«).

òma /ʾīṯ/ is mostly used in conjunction with pronominal suffixes, taken from set B. The paradigm is as follows:

Sg. Pl. 3.m. ïžô ëČčò ma /ʾīṯåw hy / »he is« æþìôí đòČ ma /ʾīṯayhōn / »they are« 3.f. fíĆòČ ma /ʾīṯȩ̄yh/ »she is« ´ĆĆôí đòČ ma /ʾīṯayhȩ̄n / »they are« 2.m. Ù íđòČ ma /ʾīṯayk/ »you are« æþì Ø íđòČ ma /ʾīṯaykōn / »you are« 2.f. ïØ íđòČ ma /ʾīṯayk y/ »you are«@ ´ğØ íđòČ ma /ʾīṯaykȩ̄n/ »you are«@ 1.c. ðòđČ ma /ʾīṯay / »I am« åíđòČ ma /ʾīṯayn / »we are«

46 Lesson 6

Examples: dčÜØîôği@æþìôí đòmaČ /ʾīṯayhōn b-hayklå / »they are in the temple« dčÜØîôČi@dčÀÀØÜđß@ïžôëČčòma /ʾīṯåw hy malkå ḇ-hayklå / »the king is in the temple« dčrč@ð đòma@ĆÀČç@dčãaČ /ʾenå ḡȩ̄r ʾīṯay såḇå/ »for I am an old man« (LK 1,18). The corresponding negative form of òma /ʾīṯ/ is òma@hčÛ /lå ʾīṯ/ or (more frequently) òîđÛ /layt / (< */lå / + /ʾīt /) »there is not«; it also takes suffixes from set B, e.g.: ïžôë čğòîđÛ @dčÀÀşîđß /mayyå laytåw hy / »there is no water« dčzn’ß@Ùíđòma@hčÛČ òžãđa@æa /ʾen ʾantt lå ʾīṯayk mšīḥå/ »if you are not the Christ« (Jn 1,25).

òma /ʾīṯ/ and òîđÛ /layt / can also be used in combination with the preposition Þ /l/ »to, for« together with pronominal suffixes (from set A) to express belonging (or non-belonging), e.g. aĆˆ fl…@dŽîđäği@óÛ@òîđÛ@åíĆğ…@æaŁ /ʾen dȩ̄n lay-lȩ̄h bnayyȩ̄ ḏeḵrȩ̄/ »if he has no male children ...« (SR § 1,4) a装ŁìÜđí@dčäô@ƒíđa@ï‚Û@òmağ…@Zdčnßëa@ïØÛ@dčqŁì /ṭūḇå-lȩ̄ḵ y ʾEwmiyå d-ʾīṯ-lȩ̄ḵ y ʾayḵ hånå yallūḏå / »you are lucky, ʾEwmīyå, to have such a son« (AMS 435).

6. 7. Vocabulary

A. if /’en / æa woman, wife /’anttṯå / cČčñòžãđa son /brå/ aŠi I was /hwẹ̄ṯ/ òíĆìô (pl. /bnayyå/ dčÀÀşîđäi ) or /’åw/ ëča male (pl.) /deḵrȩ̄/ aĆˆŁ… either ... or /’åw …’åw /@@ ëča … ëča daughter /barṯå/ cČčñŠđi under /tḥȩ̄ṯ/ òîĆy ñ (pl. /bnåṯå/ cČčòşÀÀčäi ) authority /šulṭånå/ dčäčİÛŁì‘ he answered (→ 13. 1.) /‛nå/ dčäÇ mother /ʾemmå/ dčßa he inherited (→ 11. 3.) /īreṯ/ ñflŠČí (those) which /ʾaylȩ̄n/ ´Üíđa B. leaving /šåḇeq / ÕflÀrğÀÀč‘ The Gospel /sḇarṯå/@cČčñŠđÀČj brother /ʾaḥå/ dčyđa house /baytå/ cčòîđi (pl. /ʾaḥȩ̄/ dŽyđa ) (pl. /båtȩ̄/ cĆòşÀčÀÀi ) fear /deḥelṯå/ cČčòÜĞyfl… old /såḇå/ dčrč sister /ḥåṯå/ cČčòčy C. strength /ḥaylå hčÜîđy (pl. /ʾaḥwåṯå/ cČčñìşyđa ) till /‛ḏammå / dčß đČ†Ç there is /ʾīṯ/ òma after /båṯar / ‰đòči there is not /layt / òîđÛ deluge (< akkad.) /ṭåwpånå/ dčäčÀÀÏ ìč village, field /qrīṯå/ cČčòmŠÓ temple /hayklå / dčÜØîô (Pl. /quryå / dč퇣ìÓ ) Amen /ʾåmẹ̄n/ ´Ćß ča

Lesson 6 47

6. 8. Exercises

A. Add vowels to the following: @ @ (Jn 8,12) dN@ àÜÇ…@bãa@ôŠôìã@dãa 1 NdôÛa@Ù’Ðã@òžãa@†ğÀÀjÇ 2 (SR § 1,4) N@ aÌÛ@µ@æñˆí@ôòäi@aˆ…@dÀşîäi@µ@òîÛ@åí…@æa 3 (SR § 2) N@ æìôìia…@dia…@däİÛì‘@òîyñ@dÀşîäi@µ@òía@åÏaë 4

B. Rewrite the following using the transcription used in this book, and translate: @ (Jn 16,15) NŁìžô@ïÜmğ…@ïqbčÛ@òmağ…@âflğ† flß @ ×Ý @1 (Lk 1,18) @Ndčrč@ðđòma@ĆÀË@dčãa@NNN@dčbđÜđ½@dčíŠđÀ‹@ŠđßaĆëČ @2 (Ac 22,8) N@ òžãđa@ČÒ flŁ…‰@òžã a…đŁ @bčí‰ûčã@Êþì’m@ìžô@dčãa 3 @dčqđa@ëča @܇cČčñìşyđa@ëča@dŽyđa@ëča@cĆòşÀčÀÀği@ÕflrğÀÀč‘ğ…@“čãa@òîđÛğ… @܆æþì¨@dčãa@Šđßča@³ßđa@ŠđßaĆë @Êþì’m@dčäÇ 4 (Mk 10,29-31) NðñŠđÀÀČj@Ýİßë@ðòčÜİflßN dč퇣ìÓ ëčaN dčÀÀÀşîđäği @ëča@cČčñòžãđa@ëča @܇dčßa@ëča @hčÛa@÷þìàčã@hčÛŁ…@dôčÛbđÛ@ðđòma@hčÛ@Ł†đÀÀ×@÷þìàčã@hčÛğ…@ƒíđa@òíĆìôČ @æþìôÛ@òîđÛ@dčþìàčãğ…@´ÜíhđÛë 5 (1. Cor 9,21) N@ dčzn’ß đğ…@óƍþìàčäq C. Rewrite the following using the transcription used in this book: @ @ @dčÀÀØÜ đß @âčŁ†Ó 1 @ @ @hčÜîđzqë@dčyŁëŠi 2 @dčßìčîÛ@dčß đ†ÇŁ 3 @dčäčÀÀÏìč @‰ đČòči @åČßë 4 (Mt 6,13) @hčÜîđyë@cČčñŁìØÜđß@ožô@ƒčÜmŁ…ğ…@Ýİß 5 D. Write out the following until familiar:

@ @ dčàčÜ‘@åđÛ@òma 1 @ @ (SR § 1,4) aĆˆ fl…@dŽîđäği@óÛ@òîđÛ@åíĆğ…@æaŁ 2 ïžôë čòîđÛ@dčÀÀşîđßğ 3

1 (SR § 1,4) 2 3

ܐ 1 (SR § 1,4) ܕ ̈ ܕ ܢܐ 2 ܝ ܗܘ̄ ̈ 3

Lesson 7 7. 1. The Perfect: Basic Stem

In Syriac, the perfect indicates past action, making it a preterite tense. It is also known as the suffix conjugation, since inflection is achieved using specific endings. The perfect (abbreviation: pf.) of the basic stem is formed on the basis of the morpheme types */qaṭal /, */qaṭil / oder */qaṭul / (see also → 9. 1.), which in Syriac correspond to ÝđİÓ /qṭal /, ÝİÓ /qṭel / and ÞþìİÓ /qṭol /, owing to vowel reduction. The variable vowel is known as the thematic vowel . Of the morpheme types listed, /qṭal / is the most common, above all for transitive verbs, while /qṭel / and /qṭol / (WS /qṭul /) are for the most part limited to intransitive verbs. The type qṭol is used with very few verbs (e.g. Ł…þìÐ Ó /qp̄oḏ /, WS /qp̄uḏ / »to bristle«); as such, it will not be further considered in the following. The specific personal endings correspond to the suffix conjungation endings in other semitic languages. Particular note should be taken of the ending of the 1 st person sg., /-eṯ/ (in contrast to hebr. -ti and arab. -tu ). In the 2.f.sg., 3.m.pl. and (in part) the 3.f.pl., the written form indicates the former presence of a final vowel (*/-ti /, */-ū/, */-ī/), which is no longer pronounced.

An overview of the personal endings:

Sg. Pl. 3.m. Ø ë /-w/, æŁë /- ūn/ (newer Form) 3.f. ñ@đÀÀ /-aṯ/ Ø, şð /- y/, åşîĆÀ /-ȩ̄n/ (newer Form) @ 2.m. ñ /-t/@ æþëñ / -tōn / 2.f. ðñ /-ty/@ åíĆñ /-tȩ̄n/@ 1.c. ñ@flÀÀ /-eṯ/@ æ /-n/, åđã /-nan / (newer Form) @

Endings which begin with a vowel (3.f.sg. and 1.sg.) take an auxiliary vowel, /e/, between the 1st and 2nd radicals, e.g. 3.f.sg. òđÜİÓ /qeṭlaṯ/ < */qaṭVlaṯ/, 1.sg. òÜİÓ /qeṭleṯ/ < */qaṭVleṯ/. All verb forms in the 3.f.pl. are written with plural dots, e.g. ò×đşïq Č /kṯaḇy/ »they wrote«. The regressive assimilation of dentals can also be observed ( → 3. 1. 1.), e.g. ñğ† đÀrÇ /‛ḇatt / < */‛ḇadt / »you made«.

Lesson 7 49

The following table presents the paradigm for the types ÝđİÓ /qṭal / and ÝİÓ /qṭel /, taking the verbs tđò×Č /kṯaḇ / »to write« and áfly‰ /rḥem / »to love« as examples.

a-Type (transitive) e-Type (intransitive) Sg.3.m. tđò×Č /kṯaḇ / »he wrote« áfly‰ /rḥem / »he loved« 3.f. òđÀği ò×Č /keṯbaṯ / »she wrote« òđ»fl‰ /reḥmaṯ / »she loved« 2.m. òqđò×Č /kṯaḇt / »you wrote« òàfly‰ /rḥemt / »you loved« 2.f. ðòqđò×Č /kṯaḇt y/ »you wrote« ðòàfly‰ /rḥemt y/ »you loved« 1.c. òflği ò×Č /keṯbeṯ / »I wrote« ò»fl‰ /reḥmeṯ / »I loved« Pl.3.m. qđì ò×Č /kṯaḇ w/ »they wrote« ìàfly‰ /rḥem w/ »they loved« æŁìqđò×Č /kṯaḇūn / æŁìàfly‰ /rḥemūn / 3.f. tđò×Č /kṯaḇ / »they wrote« áfly‰ /rḥem / »they loved« şïqđò×Č /kṯaḇ y/ ïàfly‡ /rḥem y/ åşîĆÀqđČò× /kṯaḇȩ̄n/ ´Ćàfly‡ /rḥemȩ̄n/ 2.m. æþëòÀqđò×Č /kṯaḇtōn / »you wrote« æþëòàfly‰ /rḥemtōn / »you loved« 2.f. åíĆòqđò×Č /kṯaḇtȩ̄n/ »you wrote« åíĆòàfly‰ /rḥemtȩ̄n/ »you loved« 1.c. qđå ò×Č /kṯaḇn / »we wrote« åàfly‰ /rḥemn / »we loved« åđäqđò×Č /kṯaḇnan / åđäàfly‰ /rḥemnan /

In the purely consonantal script , the following forms are always identical, as already noted above: 3.f.sg. òiò× /keṯbaṯ / »she wrote« ò»‰ /reḥmaṯ / »she loved« 2.m.sg. òiò× /kṯaḇt / »you wrote« ò»‰ /rḥemt / »you loved« 1.c.sg. òiò× /keṯbeṯ / »I wrote« ò»‰ /reḥmeṯ / »I loved« In the absence of a transcription or vowel signs, the sense must be decided on the basis of context. Note.: In ES ò×Ćğiò /keṯbȩ̄ṯ/ (with a secondary lengthening of the stressed final syllable) is sometimes used in place of òflğiò× /keṯbeṯ /. The 3.m.sg. perfect is identical to the verb stem, and takes no ending. As such, it is the form in which verbs are cited, functioning as an infinitive (tđò×Č /kṯaḇ / »write«), i.e. it is the basic form of the verb which is listed in dictionaries. In addition to this, all verbs have a true infinitive form (s. e.g. . Inf. tđò‚flßğ /meḵtaḇ / → 8. 3.). Since in most dictionaries, the perfect form is given with the infinitive, we adhere to this principle in the vocabulary section of this chapter for the sake of simplicitly.

7. 2. The Preposition /l-/

The Syriac preposition Þ /l-/ has several syntactic functions. It is used: (1) to introduce an indirect object, and (2) to introduce a direct object which is considered as determined.

50 Lesson 7

Examples for (1) and (2): (1) dčäô@bčã č†ÓŁìÏ@æþìØÛ@tđğ ò×Č /kṯåḇlḵōn puqdånå hånå / »he wrote you this commandment« (Mk 10,5) (2) ó܁@dč’ä¨@Êþì’m@aŠÓë (√qr ʾ Pf.) /wa-qrå Īšō‛ l-ḵenšå ḵollȩ̄h / »And Jesus called the people to him« (Mk 7,14).

7. 3. The Perfect Form of the Verb of Being /hwå/

The perfect of the verb cìô /hwå / »to be, to happen« ( √hwy ) is used very frequently. As a verb with a so-called weak third radical ( y), its flexion is as follows (cf. → 13. 1. Verben III-y):

Sg. Pl. 3.m. cìô /hwå / »he was« şëìô /hwåw / »they were« 3.f. ñìô /hwåṯ/ »she was« şðìô /hway / »they were« 2.m. òíìô /hwayt / »you were« æþëòşíìô /hwaytōn / »you were« 2.f. ðòíìô /hwayt y/ »you were« åşíĆòíìô /hwaytȩ̄n/ »you were« 1.c. òíĆìô /hwẹ̄ṯ/ »I was« åşíìô /hwayn / »we were« (WS /hwīṯ/)

When used in the enclitic form, the initial consonant /h/ is not pronounced, but is preserved in the orthography, written with a linea occultans , e.g. cì žô@Ł†flrčÇ /‛åḇeḏ-hwå / »he was making«, žôñì ačğ rčdž /‛åḇdå-hwåṯ/ »she was making« (active participle ( → 5. 1. 1.)+ cìô /hwå /). The verb cìô /hwå / »to be, to happen« is used above all: a) as an independent verb denoting the present, e.g. òíĆìô /hwẹ̄ṯ/ »I am« in dčàÜčÇ@dčäô@åČß @òíĆìô @hčÛ@dčãa /ʾenå lå hwẹ̄ṯ men hånå ‛ålmå / »I am not of this world« (Jn 8,23).

b) in the enclitic form following an active participle; in this case, the addition of žôcì /hwå / determines the continuous form expressed by the participle as past; e.g. dôčÛđaŁ…@dčã †ÓŁìčğ ÐČi@c žôČì @Ł†ğflÀÀrčÇ@cČčòôşnßñ@´Üôë /w-hålȩ̄n tmīhåṯå ‛åḇeḏ-hwå ḇ-p̄uqdånå ḏ-’alåhå / »he performed this miracle on God’s command« (AMS 446).

c) in combination with the forms of the perfect or imperfect to build the so-called compound tenses (→ 11. 6.), e.g. ëìžô@ìäflàîô@cČčòÜflß @ëìžô@ìÈđđŁ…@cb ŽÀn ğèđë /w-saggīʾȩ̄ ḏa-šma‛w-hwåw mellṯå haymen w-hwåw/ »But many of those who had heard the word believed« (Ac 4,4).

7. 3. 1. Indicating Focus with the Enclitic /-hū/

The enclitic personal pronoun in the 3.m.sg. often follows a sentence element (either a nominal or a verb) with the sole purpose of stressing the element in question .. Examples: åđämğ†Ìč@dôčÛđa@Łìžô@Ł†đ§ /l-ḥaḏ-hū ʾalåhå såḡdīnan / »we worship but one God« snôm@Łìžô@æþì¨ /lḵōn-hū īhīḇ/ »To you it has been given« (Mt 13,11)

Lesson 7 51

Łìžô@Þfl‹ @/zel-hū/ »go!«. 7. 4. The Passive Participle

Two participles can be built using the basic stem: a) an active participle (abbreviated as: Part. Act.); b) a passive participle (abbreviated as: Part. Pass.).

The active participle forms (basic form: /qåṭel /) have already been listed at → 5. 1. 1. The passive participle has the basic form ÝnİÓ /qṭīl / (< */qaṭīl /), e.g. smò× /kṯīḇ / »written«. It is inflected in the same way as a nominal:

Sg. Pl. m. St. abs. smò× /kṯīḇ/ åşn rmò× /kṯīḇīn / m. St. emph. dčrmò× /kṯīḇå/ dŽÀ rmò× /kṯīḇȩ̄/ f. St. abs. dčrmò× /kṯīḇå/ åčr şmò× /kṯīḇån/ f. St. emph. cčò rmò× /kṯīḇtå/ cČčò čr şmò× /kṯīḇåṯå/

7. 5. Adverbs ending in /-åʾīṯ/

Syriac makes productive use of the ending òm čÀÀb /-åʾīṯ/, which does not feature in other semitic languages. On the basis of adjectives in the singular St. abs. f./St. emph. m. (ending /–å/), it can be used to build corresponding adverbs . Analogously, (secondary) adverbs can also be directly turned into nouns (on the basis of the St. emph. m. auf /–å/). This gives rise to what can be loosely considered a specific adverbial ending, òm a čÀÀ /-åʾīṯ/. Examples :

aÐđ‘ /šappīrå/ »beautiful« òmaÐđ‘ /šappīråʾīṯ / »beautifully« (Adv.) aŠmŠđ‘ /šarrīrå/ »true« òmaŠmŠđ‘ /šarrīråʾīṯ / »truly« dčãŠÌđÏ /paḡrånå / »carnal« òmbčãŠÌđÏ /paḡrånåʾīṯ / »carnally« (Adv.) dôčÛđa /ʾalåhå / »god« òmbôčÛđa /ʾalåhåʾīṯ / »divinely« (Adv.)

In addition, some other adverbial lexemes take the feminine ending /-aṯ/ (mostly likely from the St. abs. with the /ṯ/ retained), e.g. òđîđy /ḥayyaṯ / »alive«, òđîčߣ†đÓ /qaḏmåyaṯ / »at first«. Certain Lexemes are also used as adverbs without a specific ending in the St. abs.m.

7. 6. Vocabulary

A. blessed /brīḵ/ ƒmŠi one /ḥaḏ/ Ł†đy without /bel‛åḏ / Ł†čÈÜfli family /šarbṯå/ cČčòğiŠđ‘ free, noble /ḥẹ̄rå / a‰bĆy he came near /qreḇ/ tflŠÓ when /kaḏ/ Ł† đ× name /šmå/ dč

52 Lesson 7

day /yåwmå / dčß ìčí C. he set in order /sḏar / ‰đ†2 (pl. /yåwmåṯå/ cČčòčßşìčí ) that is to say /’amīrå/ aßđa In the beginning /b-rẹ̄šīṯ/ òn’ íĆŠi he heard /šma‛/ Éđ word /mellṯå/ cČčòÜflß excellent (→ 11. 3.) /myattar / ‰đòđîß (pl. /mellȩ̄/ hÜflß ) three /tlåṯå/ cČčòčÛñ service /tešmeštå/ cčò’ ñ helper /‛åḏōrå/ a‰þ룆čÇ rich /‛attīrå / aŠmòđÇ no, not /låw / ìčÛ nature /kyånå / dčäčî× elephant /pīlå/ hčÜnÏ man /gaḇrå/ aŠr đç teacher /mallp̄ånå/ dčäčÀÀ Ð Üđß true /šarrīrå/ aŠmŠđ‘ sea /yammå/ dčàđí with, near /lwåṯ/ ñìÛ disciple /talmīḏå / a裆n ½đñ he feared /dḥel / ÝĆy… month /yarḥå/ dčyŠđí believer /mhaymnå/@dčäàîôß two /trȩ̄n/ åíƉñ family (< pers.) /ṭohmå/@dčàôþì hour /šå‛ṯå/ cČčòÈč‘ that is /’åwkȩ̄ṯ/ òîĆ×ëča he made /s‛ar / ŠđÈ  B. he went out /np̄aq / ÕđÀÐã D. he dwelt /‛mar / ŠđàÇ he ordered /pqaḏ / Ł†đÔÏ he saved /praq/ ÖŠ Ï

7. 7. Exercises

A. Translate the following: (Lk 19,38) NdčÀÀØÜđß@Łìžô@ƒmŠği @܆ëìžô@åmŠßaë 1 @Łìô@cìžô@ïžôë čČòma@dôčÛaë@NdôčÛđa@ñìÛ@cìžô@ïžôë òčČ ma@cČčòÜflß@Łìôë@NcČčòÜflß@cìžô@ïžôë čČ maò @òn’íĆŠi 2 (Jn 1,1) @NdôčÛđa@ñìÛ @òn’íĆŠČi @cìžô@ïžôë čČòma@dčäô@NcČčòÜflß (Jn 1,1-3)Ncìô …@âflğ†flß@ñìČô@a裆y@hčÜÏča@ïžôşë裆čÈÜflÀqë@NcìČôđğ @ô †mbği@Ý×Ć2 @Zdčäčî đ…@´Üôqë@dčàÜčÇ…@´Üôi@åğß@aŠmòđÇ@ZdôčÛđü@ÝĆğyŁč……@a‰bĆy@dčäàîôßğ @“čãa@åğß@cČìžô@òma 3 (MJ 3) N@ cČčòğiŠđ’që@dčàôþìİği@åí Ć…@dčÈmŁ†m2 Í (Jn 8,17)Nïžô@aŠmŠđ‘@åmˆrđÀÀğç@åíƇñ đ…@cČčñŁëğ†ôčğ…@smò×@åíĆğ…@æþ삍Łìàčäqë2 4 (AMS 436) NğôŠği@ƒíđa@cČìžô@ïžôëČčòmağ…@Ýİflß 5 B. Translate the following: (Mt 4,11) @ìqflŠÓ@dŽÀhđÜđß@dôë 1 (Mk 2,13) Ndčàđí@ñìÛ@tŁëñ@ÕđÀÀÐãë 2 (Mk 14,47) @dŽäôčÀÀ× @ğl‰ğ…@ôĆğ†rđÈÛ 3 (Lk 1,63) Nó@Łìžô @åčäđyþìí @ŠđßaĆë@tđò×ëČ @4 (Ac 9,13)@dčäô@aŠrđÀÀğç@ÝđÇ@cbĆÀşnğèđ@åČß@òflÈàfl‘@ðŠčß@dčîäđäđy@ŠđßaĆë 5

Lesson 7 53

C. Add vowels and translate the following: @òîi…@còÈ‘ë@dßìíë@dyŠđí ë@còÀžä‘@còØÜß@oÛ@ðŠđßa @ğµ@ŠČßa@æìãa@‰ đ2†…@´Üô@‰òi@åČß ë 1 (VA 9) @ač†nÐßþìÛča@µ@ñŠßa Ćë@ï׆Üí d@N äÐÜß åß@ dä@ ÐÜß @ë@finÏ@åß@finÏë@aç@åß@aç@Z†y@åß@†y@‰òîß@còÛñ@´Üô…@aßaë 2 @ @ (KD 8) NdãŠÇì@ŠÈğÀ@a‡ë†Ç…@cñìjîİi@⁄a@a‡ë†Ç…@däîä¶@ìÛ@“ãa…@Ýİß

D. a) Build the passive participle (f. St. abs./sg. and m. St. emph./pl.) of the following verbs: ČÒ đ…‰Ł 5 Ł†đÔÏ 4 tđò×Č 3 ŠđàÇ 2 ÖŠÏ 1 b) Build the perfect (3.f. and 2.f. sg./pl.) of the following words, and give their definition: @tflŠÓ 6 ÕđÀÐã 5 ČÒ đ…‰Ł 4 Ł†đÔÏ 3 tđò×Č 2 Šđȍ 1 E. Add vowels to the following: @åí…@æa@NæìØi@aŠğàÇ@dôÛa…@óyë‰@òíaŠíŠ‘@æa@€ëŠi@⁄a@NŠŽji@æëòíìžô@⁄@åí…@æëòžãa 1 (Rm 8,9)NóÜí…@cìžô@⁄@däô@dzî’ß…@óyë‰@ói@òîÛ@“ãa (AMS 447) @NdôÛa…@ô†jÇ@dčàčß@dãa@dãa 2 (Mk 2,13) Nd¹@ñìÛ@lëñ@ÕÀÐČãë @3 F. Write out the following until familiar:

@ @ (Mk 10,5) dčäô@bčã č†ÓŁìÏ@æþìØÛ@tđğ ò×Č 1 @ @ (AMS 436) ğôŠği@ƒíđa@cČìžô@ïžôëČčòmağ…@Ýİflß 2

(Mk 10,5) 1 (AMS 436) 2

(Mk 10,5) ܢ ܒ 1 ܿ (AMS 436) ܗ ܐ ܘ ܗ݇ ܝ ܗܘܐܕ݇ 2

Lesson 8 8. 1. The Imperfect: Basic Stem

In Syriac, both future states of affairs and actions as well as modal verbs ( should, must, may, can etc.) are generally expressed using the imperfect (abbreviate as : impf.). This conjugation is also known as the prefix conjugation , since its flexion is mostly achieved using prefixes, though it sometimes also makes use of suffixes. In Syriac, the imperfect of the basic stem is built on the basis of the morpheme types /Keqṭol / (WS /Keqṭul /), /Keqṭal / or /Keqṭel / (K = prefix consonant). Of these, /Keqṭol / is the most common, and /Keqṭel / the least common (only five verbs take /Keqṭel /: ÈflãflğjŁ† /ne‛beḏ / »he shall make«, Œflãflğiå /nezben / »he shall buy«, flãÝflÐ /neppel / < */nenpel / »he shall fall down«, ûflÐflã /neppeṣ/ < */nenpeṣ/ »he shall shake off«, tflò flã /netteḇ/ < */newteḇ »he shall sit«). /Keqṭol / is particularly common for transitive verbs, while /Keqṭal / is common for intransitive verbs (including verbs of movement) on the one hand (e.g. ƒđߣ† flã /neḏmaḵ / »he shall sleep«), and verbs with a guttaral as 3rd radical on the other (e.g. Éđà’ flã /nešma‛/ »he shall hear«). The thematic vowels in the perfect and imperfect are thus often opposed. Typical transitive verbs are characterised by the opposition a : u (ÝđİÓ /qṭal / : ÞþìİÔflã /neqṭol / (WS /neqṭul /) »to kill«; tđò×Č /kṯaḇ / : tþëò‚flã /neḵtoḇ / (WS /neḵtuḇ /) »to write«, and typical intransitive verbs by the opposition e : a (e.g. ƒflß… /dmeḵ/ : ƒđߣ†flã /neḏmaḵ / »to sleep«, áfly‰ /rḥem / : áđyŠflã /nerḥam / »to love«). The pairing a : a is also common, above all for verbs with a guttaral as 3rd radical (e.g. Éđ /šma‛/ : Éđà’flã /nešma‛/ »to hear«, ÉđÀČj /sḇa‛/ : ÉđÀğjŽflã /nesba‛/ »to be satisfied«). By contrast, the oppositions a : e (e.g. Ł†đÀČjÇ /‛ḇaḏ / : ÈflãflğjŁ† /ne‛beḏ / »to make«), e : e (tŞòm /īṯeḇ / : tflòflã /netteḇ/ »to sit«) and e : o (e.g. tflŠÓ /qreḇ/ : tþëŠÔflã /neqroḇ/ (WS /neqruḇ/) »to come near«) are rare. As such, we can speak of the / a-o/-conjugation, the / e-a/-conjugation, the / a-e/-conjugation, the /e-e/-conjugation and the /e-o/- conjugation. In principle, the specific personal prefixes and endings (2.f.sg. and 3./2.pl) correspond to the affixes of the prefix conjugation in other semitic languages. However, all grammatical persons which take a /y-/ prefix in other languages .yaktubu / and hebr/ َﻳﻜﺘُ ُﺐ .take the consonant /n-/ in Syriac (e.g. tþëò‚flã /neḵtoḇ / »he shall write« in contrast to arab .(/ yiḵtoḇ/ ̣ יכְ תֺּב In contrast to older aramaic (and other semitic) languages, which distinguish between a long form (imperfect) and a short form (jussive), syriac knows only one formal variant of the prefix conjugation. Its function corresponds to that of both the imperfect and the jussive.

Lesson 8 55

The following is an overview of the personal prefixes and the endings of the imperfect:

Sg. Pl. 3.m. ãflÀ ― Ø ãflÀ ― æŁë /ne / ― Ø /ne / ― /ūn / 3.f. ñ ― Ø ãflÀ ― åÀşÀ /te / ― Ø /ne / ― /ån / ñ ― ð /te / ― /y/ 2.m. ñ ― Ø ñ ― æŁë /te / ― Ø /te / ― /ūn / 2.f. ñ ― åm ñ ― åÀč /te / ― īn /te / ― /ån / 1.c. a ― Ø ãflÀ ― Ø /’e/ ― Ø /ne / ― Ø

Below is the paradigm for the types /Keqṭol / and /Keqṭal /, using the verbs tđò×Č /kṯaḇ / »to write« and áđy‰ /rḥem / »to love« as examples:

o-Type (transitive) a-Type (often intransitive) Sg.3.m. tþëò‚flã /neḵtoḇ / »he shall write« áđyŠ flã /nerḥam / »he shall love« 3.f. tþëò ñ /teḵtoḇ / »she shall write« áđy‰ ñ /terḥam / »she shall love« ïqþëò ñ /teḵtoḇ y/ »she shall write« ïàđy‰ ñ /terḥam y/ »she shall love« 2.m. tþëò ñ /teḵtoḇ / »you shall write« áđy‰ ñ /terḥam / »you shall love« 2.f. ³ ñòq /teḵtḇīn / »you shall write« ³»‰ ñ /terḥmīn / »you shall love« 1.c. tþëò a /’eḵtoḇ / »I shall write« áđy‰ a /ʾerḥam / »I shall love«

Pl.3.m. æŁì qò‚flã /neḵtḇūn/ »they shall write« æŁì»Š flã @/nerḥmūn / »they shall love« 3.f. flãòş‚čqå /neḵtḇån / »they shall write« /åč»ˆ flã @nerḥmån / »they shall love« 2.m. æŁì ñòq /teḵtḇūn/ »you shall write« æŁì»‰ ñ @/terḥmūn / »you shall love« 2.f. ñòşčqå /teḵtḇån / »you shall write« å軇 ñ /terḥmån / »you shall love« 1.c. tþëò‚flã /neḵtoḇ / »we shall write« áđyŠ flã /nerḥam / »we shall love«

56 Lesson 8

In the purely consonantal script , the following forms are identical: 3.m.sg. lëò Øã »he shall write« áyŠã »he shall love« 1.c.pl. lëò Øã »we shall write« áyŠã »we shall love« and 3.f.sg. lëò ×ñ »she shall write« áy‰ñ »she shall love« 2.m.sg. lëò ×ñ »you shall write« áy‰ñ »you shall love« In the absence of a transcription or vowel signs, the meaning must be determined on the basis of context.

From this point onward, all verbs listed in the vocabulary section at the end of each chapter will be given in two forms: 3.m.sg. perfect and 3.m.sg. imperfect, e.g. »to write« tđò×Č /kṯaḇ / : tþëò‚flã /neḵtoḇ /.

8. 2. The Imperative: Basic Stem .

The imperative (abbreviation: imp.) largely corresponds to the 2nd person imperfect without prefixes. The thematic vowels are identical. Below is the paradigm for the types ÞþìİÓ /qṭol / (WS /qṭul /) (which corresponds to the imperfect Keqṭol ) and ÝđİÓ /qṭal / (corresponding to /Keqṭal /), using the verbs tđò×Č /kṯaḇ / »write« and áfly‰ /rḥem / »to love« as examples (there are two variants of the plural forms):

o-Type (transitive) a-Type (often intransitive) sg.m. tþë ò× /kṯoḇ/ »write! « áđy‰ /rḥam / »love! « f. qþëï ò× /kṯoḇy/ »write! « ïàđy‰ /rḥam y/ »love! « pl.m. qþëì ò× /kṯoḇw/ »write! « ìàđy‰ /rḥamw/ »love! « æŁì qþëò× /kṯoḇūn/ »write! « æŁìàđy‰ /rḥamūn / »love! « f. qþëşï ò× /kṯoḇy/ »write! « ïàđy‡ /rḥam y/ »love! « åşîĆÀ þëòq × /kṯoḇȩ̄n/ »write! « ´Ćàđy‡ /rḥamȩ̄n/ »love! «

Imperatives cannot be negated. Instead, negation is expressed using hčÛ /lå / + the 2 nd person imperfect . ( = jussive .). Examples: dĆÀÀØrflã@hčÛğ… @ĆÀË@Łìäđß /manū ḡȩ̄r d-lå neḇkȩ̄/ »who should not cry?« ( √bk ’ »to weep«) dčãČčòߣ늁@dŽÀÀÏđa@ČÑmûđ§@cŠrđyë@d軉@cĆìôflñ@hčÛ2 /lå ṯehwȩ̄ råḥmå w-ḥaḇrå l-ḥaṣṣīp̄ ’appȩ̄ ḵrūmṯånå/ » you should not be a friend to insolent, impertinent people« ( √hw ’ »to be«) (EA, KdD 11/10).

8. 3. The Infinitive: Basic Stem

The nominal formation type ÝđİÔflß /meqṭal / (→ 4. 1. 3.) serves as the infinitive (abbreviation: inf.) of the basic stem, e.g. tđò‚flßğ /meḵtaḇ / and áđyŠflß /merḥam /. Infinitiv .es are often used in final clauses, usually following the preposition . Þ /l-/ »to, for«, e.g. tđò‚½ğ /l-meḵtaḇ / »to write« tđò‚½@pŠđ‘ğ /šarrī l-meḵtaḇ / »he began to write«

Lesson 8 57

8. 4. The So-Called dativus ethicus

In Syriac, verb forms (especially verbs of movement) are often followed by the preposition Þ /l-/ with a pronominal suffix referring back to the actor (the so-called dativus ethicus ). This reference to the actor can in most cases not be captured in English translations. As such, constructions of this kind are generally not translated. Examples: óÛ@ÕđÀÀÐã /np̄aq-lȩ̄h/ »he went out« fčÛ@òđİôfl‰ /rehṭaṯ-låh / »she ran« ƒčÛ@âŁìÓ /qum-låḵ/ »arise!« æþìôÛ@ònß /mīṯ-lhōn / »they died« åčãğ…‰þìíŁ…@aŠrflÈÛ@óÛ @Þ‹aë @æþìôí đȆma@òîğĆi@åČß@óÛ@ÕđÀÀÐãë /wa-np̄aq-lȩ̄h men bȩ̄ṯ ʾīḏayhōn w-’ezallȩ̄h l-‛eḇrå ḏ-yordnån / »but he escaped from their hands. He went away again across the Jordan« (Jn 10,39-40).

8. 5. Negation of Words and Clauses

In Syriac, the general word used to express negation is hčÛ /lå / »no, not«. It can be used both to negate single words (e.g. æþìôñŁìäčàîô@hčÛ /lå haymånūṯhōn / »your faithlessness«) or to negate any kind of clause. In verbal clauses, hčÛ /lå / usually comes immediately before the verb .. Examples: dčÀÀØÜđߣ…@dčã č†ÓŁìÏ@ëŠđÀÀČjČÇ@hčÛ@æþìØşîôčqđağ…@Ýİflßğ /meṭṭol d-’aḇåhaykōn lå ‛ḇar w puqdånå ḏ-malkå / »since your parents have not disobeyed the king’s order « (AMS 432) d½ûÛ @ïžôşë裆n½đñ@hčÛë2 @ë ô̤ @hčÛ@ZŁ†flÌğÀÀč@hčÛğ… /d-lå såḡeḏ lå hū w-lå ṯalmīḏåw hy l-ṣalmȩ̄/ »neither he nor his students have worshiped the images« (AMS 436) cčò ’nği @æþìØq@dčãa@Ł†ğflÀrčÇ@hčÛ@Zşïđã čğ†ÓŁìÏ @æŁìÈğñ@æa@dč’ôë /w-håšå ’en tešm‛ūn puqdånay lå ‛åḇeḏ-’nå-ḇḵōn bīštå/ »and now, if you heed my command, I will do you no evil (literally: I will not do you evil)« (AMS 432).

Nominal clauses are also usually negated using hčÛ /lå/: ³Èğàč‘@hčÜÏčaë@³ÜÜđ¾@hčÛŁ…@dĆ‘ˆđy@d½ČČûÛ@ëČìžô@æŁëŁ†ğèŽflãŁ…ë /wa-ḏ-nesgḏūn-hwåw l-ṣalmȩ̄ ḥaršȩ̄ ḏ-lå mmamllīn w-åp̄-lå šåm‛īn / »such that they worshiped the silent images, which could neither speak nor hear« (AMS 431).

In such clauses, the negation is often followed by the enclitic cìô /hwå / (√hwy , Pf. Pe.), which generally serves to achieve a particular emphasis: aŠčÀÀğèđãğ…@ôĆŠČi@dčäô@cìžô@hčÛ /lå-hwå hånå ḇrȩ̄h d-naggårå / »Is not this the carpenter’s son?« (Mt 13,55) cČčñŁëğ†ôč@dčãa@sflŽğÀÀčã@dč’ččãa@ŠđÀÀği@åČß@cìžô@hčÛ@åíĆ…@dčãaŁ /ʾenå ḏȩ̄n lå-hwå men bar-ʾnåšå nåseḇ-ʾnå såhdūṯå/ »But I receive not testimony from man« (Jn 5,34). cìžô@hčÛ /lå-hwå / is also found in nominal question clauses: æþì¨ @ñflŠßa @dčàzđÛ@ÝđÇ@cìžô@hčÛğ…@æþëòÜđÀÀ×đòa@hčÛ@åđÀØíđa /ʾaykan lå ʾestakkaltōn d-lå-hwå ‛al laḥmå ʾemreṯ-lḵōn / »how do you not understand that I did not speak to you of bread« (Mt 16,11)

58 Lesson 8

In ES, the negation hčÛ /lå / followed by the enclitic personal pronoun /–ū/ or /–w/ is written ìčÛ /låw /; in WS, it is h h written /law /, e.g. ìžô @dôčÛđa@ìčÛ @ /låw ʾalåhå- w/ (WS /law ʾalōha- w/) »he is no God «.

òma /ʾīṯ/-nominal clauses are negated with either òma hčÛ /lå ʾīṯ/ or òîđÛ @ /layt / e.g. ïžôë òîđÛ@dčÀÀşîđßčğ @ /mayyå laytåw hy / »there is no water« aŠčÔflÇ@óÛ@cìžô@òîđÛ /layt-hwå- lȩ̄h ‛eqqårå / »he had no root« (Mt 13,6).

8. 6. Vocabulary

A. magician /ḥarråšå / dč‘Šđy B. barley /s‛årȩ̄/ aĆˆčȍ governor /hẹ̄ḡmōnå / dčãþìàÌĆô wheat /ḥeṭṭṯå/ cČčòİfly faith /haymånūṯå/ cČčñŁìäčàîô (pl. /ḥeṭṭȩ̄/ dİfly ) silver, money /kespå/ dčÐŽ× sin /ḥṭåhå / dôčİy eat /ʾeḏnå / dčãŁ…a (pl. /ḥṭåhȩ̄/ dŽôčİy ) (pl. /ʾeḏnȩ̄/ dŽãŁ…a ) stone /kẹ̄ʾp̄å / dČčÏb× way /ʾurḥå/ dčy‰Łëa they went /ʾezal w/ ìÛ‹a boy /ṭalyå/ dčîÜđ dream /ḥelmå/ dčàÜfly Satan /såṭånå / dčäčİč bread /laḥmå/ dčàzđÛ defectiveness /ḥassīrūṯå/ cČčñŁëŽđy bone /garmå/ dčߊđç man, people /bar ʾnåšå / dč’ččãa@Š đi (pl. /garmȩ̄/ dĆ߈ đç ) (pl. /bnay nåšå / dč’čäşîđä i) Lord, master /mårå/ aŠčß word (< pers.) /peṯḡåmå / dčàČčçòÏ

Verb Forms Pe. to choose /neḡbȩ̄/ dğĆjČèflã : /gḇå/ dčrç Pe. to say, to speak (→ 11. 2.) /nẹ̄ʾmar / ŠđßbĆã : /ʾemar / Šđßa Pe. to take (→ 11. 1.) /nessaḇ/ sđŽ flã : /nsaḇ/ sđŽã Pe. to go out (a-o) (→ 11. 1.) /neppoq / ÖþìÐflã : /np̄aq / ÕđÀÐã Pe. to go (→ 14. 2.) /nẹ̄ʾzal / Þ‹bĆã : /ʾezal / Þ‹a Pe. to make (a-e) /neʽbeḏ / Ł† flğjÈflã : /ʽḇaḏ/ Ł† đÀrÇ Pe. to hear (a-a) /nešmaʽ/ Éđà’flã : /šmaʽ/ Éđ Pe. to deny (a-o) /neḵpor / ‰þìÐØflã : /kp̄ar / ŠđÀÀÐ× Pe. to bury (a-o) /neṭmor / ‰þìàİflã : /ṭmar / Šđà Pe. to love (e-a) /nerḥam / áđy Šflã : /rḥem / fly‰á Pe. to flee (a-o) /ne‛roq/ ÖþëŠÈflã : /‛raq / ÖŠÇ Pe. to take away (a-o) /nešqol/ ÞþìÔ ’flã : /šqal / ÝđÔ‘ Pe. to know (→ 11. 3.) /nedda‛/ Êđğ†flã : /īḏa‛/ ʆm Pe. to turn back (a-o) /nehpoḵ/ „þìÀÐôflã : /hp̄aḵ / ƒđÀÀÐô

Lesson 8 59

Pe. to worship (e-o) /nesgoḏ/ Ł… þìğèŽflã : /sḡeḏ / Ł†flÀČè Pe. to serve, to work (a-o) /nep̄loḥ / €þì ÜÐflã : /plaḥ/ |đÜÏ Pe. to be, to happen (→ 14. 2.) /nehwȩ̄/ cĆìôflã : /hwå/ cìô Pe. to write (a-o) /neḵtoḇ/ tþëò‚flã : /kṯaḇ tČđò× Pe. to answer (→ 13. 2.) /ne‛nȩ̄/ dĆä Èflã : /‛nå/ dčäÇ

8. 7. Exercises

A. Translate the following: (AMS 434) Nðđòma@bčrčë@NhčÜîđy@oği@òîđÛğ…@Ýİflß2 1 (AMS 448) @NóĆäflß@æþëòrđŽã@dčЎ×@ZdčãþìàÌĆô@æþìôÛ@ŠđÀÀğßča@Ndč’ni@ëča@ìžô@dč‘Šđy@ìčÛ@aŠrđç@dčäô 2 (Mt 10,33) Ndčîđà’đÀqğ…@ïqča@â裆Ó@dčãa@ČÒča@óĆği@‰þìЁa@Ndč’čäşîđäği@â裆Ó@oği@‰þìЂflãğ…@åíĆğ…@åđß 3 (AMS 437) NdŽôčİy@ƒčÛ@Ł†flğjČÇflñ@hčÛ@ZÙíđ2 2òma@dčîÜđ @òžãđa@ZdčÀÀØÜđß@óÛ@Šđßa 4 (Mt 11,15) @NÉđà’flã@Éđà’flãŁ…@dŽãŁ…a@óÛ@òmağ… åđß@ 5 (AMS 438) Ndčäčİč@ÚŁìqđü@hčÛë@ZÙşîđܽ@hčÛë@ZƒčÛ dčãa@ÉđÀÀğàč‘@hčÛ@dčãaŁ…@Zdč’mŁ†đÓ@dčàčß@ðŠčß@óÛ@ŠđÀğßča 6 (MJ 7) Nåčß đğñ@ŠđàȽ@óÛ@dčrËë@æþìôÜm…@cČčòžäíŁ†ß@åČß@Ł†đy@dčßìčí…@dčy‰Łëa@ČÞ‹aë @åíĆğ…@ÕđÀÐã 7 (VA 12) @NŁ†đrȽ@cČčñŁëŽđy@a†ô@òžãa@|đØ’flß@òžãaë 8 B. Add vowels and translate the following: (Heb 2,3)NÖëŠÈã@åäy@däØía 1 @ÙôÛa@d튽…@ìžô@kíò×@µ@Šßaë@Êì’í@dČčäÇ @NóÜ×@cìôã@ïÜí…@ïß†Ó @…ì Čè ñ@ÝîØô@æa 2 (Lk 4,7-8)N€ìÜÏñ@ïžôë…ìzÜi@µë@…ìèñ (Lk 17,7) N@ a†jÇ@µ@òía…@æìØäß@åí …@ìäß 3 (Lk 24,39) Nğµ@òîÛ@d߈çë@aŠŽi d@ yëŠÛ … 4 (Jn 11,39) aN †ô@dÏb×@ìÛìÔ‘@Êì’í@Šßaë 5 @áçòÏ@ ÝØi@ ⁄a @ d’ãŠi@ dîy@ …ìzÜi@ dàzÜi@ cìžô@ ⁄…@ ìžô@ kíò×@ µ@ ŠČßaë@ Êì’í@ dČäÇ 6 (Lk 4,4)NdôÛa… @ @ (KD 7)@NaˆÈ@åß@dİy@³Ç†í@⁄ë@dljbi@æˆnà…@aˆÈë@dİy@Ùía 7

C. Write out the following until familiar: @ @ dĆÀÀØrflã@hčÛğ…@ĆÀË@Łìäđß 1 @ @ (AMS 431) ³Èğàč‘@hčÜÏčaë@³ÜÜđ¾@hčÛŁ…@dĆ‘ˆđy@d½ČČûÛ@ëČìžô@æŁëŁ†ğèŽflãŁ…ë 2

1 (AMS 431) 2

ܕ 1 (AMS 431) ܐܘ ܕ ̈ ܘܘ ܗ݇ ܢܘܕܘ 2

Lesson 9 9. 1. The Verb Stem System: Introduction

All of the verb forms discussed in previous chapters, including participles and infinitives, use the ground stem. In addition to this stem, Syriac has several derived patterns. The various verb patterns serve to distinguish between kinds of verbal action (intensive/factitive ., causative) and between grammatical voices (active, passive/reflexive). Syriac has a system of six productive patterns. The morphological means of building and differentiating these patterns are: a) consonantal prefixes (/ʾ/ and /t-/), b) the lengthing of the central radical and c) a combination of (a) and (b).

The system of verb stems can be combined with other morphological verb categories: on the one hand with the finite verb forms (perfect, imperfect, imperative .), and on the other, the nominal categories of the participle and the infinitive. Every stem can be used to build a perfect, an imperfect, an imperative and an infinitive. For passive/reflexive stems, there is only a passive participle; all other stems have both an active and a passive participle. In theory, each verb stem can be build using each verb root. Generally speaking, however, only certain stems are customary and attested in extant texts. Since there is no pattern as to which roots build which stems, this can only be determined by consulting a lexicon. The six Syriac verb stems have names which are formed on the basis of the root p-‛-l »to work, to do« (which is itself only attested in the basic stem ÝđÈÏ p‛al ). These names reflect the morphological characteristics of the respective perfect forms:

Transitive Verb Intransitive Verb Pcal ÝđÈÏ tđò×Č /kṯaḇ/ áfly‰ /rḥem / Pa‛‛el ÝflÈđÏ tflğòđ× /katteḇ/ áfly‰ /raḥḥem / ʾAp̄‛el ÝflÈÏđa tflğòđa /ʾaḵteḇ/ áfly‰đa /ʾarḥem / ʾEṯp‛el . ÝflÈÏña tflò×ñaČ /ʾeṯkṯeḇ/ áfly‰ ña /ʾeṯrḥem / ʾEṯpa‛‛al . ÝđÈđÀÀÏña tđòđÀÀ×ñağ /ʾeṯkattaḇ/ ña‰đyá /ʾeṯraḥḥam/ ʾEttap̄‛al ÝđÈÏ đññağ tđòğ đññağ /ʾettaḵtaḇ/ ‰đyá đññağ /ʾettarḥam

In this book, we will use the following abbreviations: Pe. = Pcal ÝđÈÏ ; Pa. = Pa‛‛el ÝflÈđÏ ; ʾAp̄. = ʾAp̄‛el ÝflÈÏđa ; ʾEṯpe. = ʾEṯp‛el . ÝflÈÏña ; ʾEṯpa. = ʾEṯpa‛‛al . ÝđÈđÀÀÏña and ʾEttap̄. = ʾEttap̄‛al ÝđÈÏ đññağ . The schema can be understood as follows: there are three basic patterns, each of which also has a corresponding so- called T-variant, i.e. a variant preceded by a ña /ʾeṯ/-element, with slightly varying vowel patterns. The somewhat unusual construction ʾEttap̄‛al can be traced back to * ʾEt ʾap̄‛al, and corresponds directly to ʾAp̄‛el. The base of Pa‛‛el and ʾEṯpa‛‛al is characterised by the lengthening (doubling .) of the middle radical; the base of ʾAp̄‛el and ʾEttap̄‛al is Lesson 9 61 characterised by a prefigured đa /ʾa/- element in the perfect. (On the P‛al base, see → 7. 1.; ʾEṯp‛el corresponds to its T- stem). The basic functions of the verb stems listed above can be described as follows: • P‛al serves to express the basic lexical meaning of a verb. • For verbs of action, Pa‛‛el often has an intensive or iterative meaning, whereas for state verbs, it has a factitive meaning. Examples: ÝđÀrÓ /qḇal / »to accuse« : ÝğfljđÓ /qabbel / »to receive« áflŽi /bsem / »to enjoy onself« : áflŽđi /bassem / »to delight« Ýİi /bṭel / »to cease« : Ýİđi /baṭṭel / »to abolish« ƒflzç /gḥeḵ/ »to laugh« : ƒflzđç /gaḥḥeḵ/ »to mock« • ʾAº‛el serves to express a causative action, e.g. tđò×Č /kṯaḇ / »to write« : tflòđa /ʾaḵteḇ / »to compose« • ʾEṯp‛el, ʾEṯpa‛‛al and ʾEttap̄‛al are the passive or (more rarely) reflexive. forms of the basic verb stems. Examples: Šđİã /nṭar / »to guard« : Šđİãña /ʾeṯnṭar / »to be preserved« (passive) and »to keep onself« (reflexive .) ÝflğjđÓ /qabbel / »to receive« : ÝđÀÀğjđÓña /ʾeṯqabbal / »to be receive«. In the case of action verbs, Pa‛‛el can sometimes scarcely be distinguished from P‛al; on the other hand, for state verbs, Pa‛‛el and ʾAp̄‛el often serve to express similar meanings, e.g. Pa. oÜđß /mallī/ and ʾAp̄. oÜßđa /ʾamlī/, respectively »to fill out«; and Pe. hčÜß /mlå / »to be full«. The precise meaning of the verb stems of concrete verbs can only be determined by consulting a dictionary. The first three Syriac verb stems correspond to the following Hebrew and Arabic stems:

Syriac Hebrew Arabic َﻓ َﻌ َﻝ fa‛ala פַָ ל P‛al ÝđÈÏ Qal

َﻓ َﻌﱠﻞ Ä fa‛‛alaפ• לע Pa‛‛el ÝflÈđÏ Pi‛el

. ﺍَ َﻓﻌ َﻞ ÄÄ ʾaf ‛alaהÔפÄ עיל ʾAp̄‛el ÝflÈÏđa Hif ‛il

The remaining Syriac verb stems correspond to the following Hebrew and Arabic stems:

Syriac Hebrew Arabic ﺍﻓﺘَ َﻌ َﻞ ifta‛ala 12 11( נִפַֽ ל ʾEṯp‛el . ÝflÈÏña (Nif ‛al ﺗَ َﻔ ﱠﻌ َ ﻞ Ä tafa‛‛ala התֽ פַּ לֵ ʾEṯpa‛‛al ÝđÈđÀÀÏña Hiṯpa‛‛el ʾEttap̄‛al ÝđÈÏ đññağ — —13

. פַֽלנִ This form is in fact not attested, but its function corresponds to that of Nif ‛al 11 12 In Arabic, this is stem form VIII (with an infixed /t/). . ﺍﺳﺘَ َﻔﻌ َﻞ Morphologically, stem form X corresponds to 13

Lesson 9 62

9. 2. The Paradigm of the Verb Stems The following is the complete paradigm of the six productive verb stems taking the example verb tđò×Č /kṯaḇ / (√ktb ) »to write«. This example was chosen since all three radicals can be spirantized: The perfect P‘al, Pa‘‘el and ʾAp̄‛el:

P‘al Pa‘‘el ʾAp̄‛el Sg.3.m. tđò×Č @ tflòđ× @ tflòđa /kṯaḇ / /katteḇ/ /ʾaḵteḇ/ 3.f. òđÀği ò×Č òđ×đÀČiò qòđÀ òđa /keṯbaṯ/ /katḇaṯ/ /ʾaḵtḇaṯ/ 2.m. òqđò×Č òqflòđ× qò flòđa /kṯaḇt / /katteḇt / /ʾaḵteḇt / 2.f. ðòqđò×Č ðòqflòđ× ðò qflòđa /kṯaḇty/ /katteḇt y/ /ʾaḵteḇt y/ 1.c. òflği ò×Č òflÀČiòđ× qòflÀ òđa /keṯbeṯ/ /katḇeṯ/ /ʾaḵtḇeṯ / Pl.3.m. qđì ò×Č ìqflòđ× @ ìqflòđa

/kṯaḇw/ /katteḇw/ /ʾaḵteḇw/ æŁìqđò×Č æŁìqflòđ× æŁì qflòđa /kṯaḇūn / /katteḇūn / /ʾaḵteḇūn / 3.f. tđò×Č 14 tflòđ× 15 tflòđa 16

/kṯaḇ/ /katteḇ/ /ʾaḵteḇ/ åşîĆÀqđČò× åşîĆÀqflòđ× åşîĆÀ ×đaflòq /kṯaḇȩ̄n/ /katteḇȩ̄n/ /ʾaḵteḇȩ̄n/ 2.m. æþëòÀqđò×Č æþëòÀqflòđ× æþëò ×đaflòq /kṯaḇtōn / /katteḇtōn / /ʾaḵteḇtōn / 2.f. åíĆòqđò×Č åíĆòqflòđ× åíĆò ×đaflòq /kṯaḇtȩ̄n/ /katteḇtȩ̄n/ /ʾaḵteḇtȩ̄n/ 1.c. åqđò×Č åqflòđ× ×đaflòqå /kṯaḇn/ /katteḇn/ /ʾaḵteḇn/ åđäqđò×Č åđäqflòđ× åđä ×đaflòq /kṯaḇnan / /katteḇnan / /ʾaḵteḇnan/

14 In WS /kṯaḇ y/ is also attested. 15 y In WS /katteḇ / is also attested. 16 In WS /ʾaḵteḇ y/ is also attested.

Lesson 9 63

The perfect ʾEṯp‛el, ʾEṯpa‛‛al and ʾEttap̄‛al:

ʾEṯp‛el ʾEṯpa‛‛al ʾEttap̄‛al Sg.3.m. tflò×ñaČ tđ đÀÀò ×ña tđò đñña /ʾeṯkṯeḇ/ /ʾeṯkattaḇ/ /ʾettaḵtaḇ/ 3.f. òđÀğiòđÀ×ña ò đÀČiòđÀ×ña òqòđÀ đñña @ /ʾeṯkaṯbaṯ/ /ʾeṯkatḇaṯ/ /ʾettaḵtḇaṯ/ 2.m. qò flò×ñaČ òČi đòđÀ×ña qò đò đñña /ʾeṯkṯeḇt/ /ʾeṯkattaḇt/ /ʾettaḵtaḇt / 2.f. ðò qflò×ñaČ ðòČi đòđÀ×ña ðò qđò đñña /ʾeṯkṯeḇty/ /ʾeṯkattaḇty/ /ʾettaḵtaḇt y/ 1. c. òflğiòđÀ×ña ò flÀČiòđÀ×ña òqòflÀ đñña /ʾeṯkaṯbeṯ/ /ʾeṯkatḇeṯ/ /ʾettaḵtḇeṯ / Pl.3.m. qì flò×ñaČ qì đ đÀÀò ×ña qì đò đñña

/ʾeṯkṯeḇw/ /ʾeṯkattaḇw/ /ʾettaḵtaḇw/ æŁì qflò×ñaČ æŁì qđ đÀÀò ×ña æŁì qđò đñña /ʾeṯkṯeḇūn / /ʾeṯkattaḇūn / /ʾettaḵtaḇūn / 3.f. tflò×ñaČ 17 tđ đÀÀò ×ña 18 tđò đñña 19

/ʾeṯkṯeḇ/ /ʾeṯkattaḇ/ /ʾettaḵtaḇ/ åşîĆÀ qflò×ñaČ åşîĆÀ qđ đÀÀò ×ña åşîĆÀ qđò đñña /ʾeṯkṯeḇȩ̄n/ /ʾeṯkattaḇȩ̄n/ /ʾettaḵtaḇȩ̄n/ 2.m. æþëò qflò×ñaČ æþëò qđ đÀÀò ×ña æþëò qđò đñña /ʾeṯkṯeḇtōn / /ʾeṯkattaḇtōn / /ʾettaḵtaḇtōn / 2.f. åíĆòq ò×ñaflČ åíĆòq đòđÀÀ×ña åíĆò qđò đñña /ʾeṯkṯeḇtȩ̄n/ /ʾeṯkattaḇtȩ̄n/ /ʾettaḵtaḇtȩ̄n/ 1.c. òflqå Č ×ña qå đ đÀÀò ×ña qå đò đñña /ʾeṯkṯeḇn/ /ʾeṯkattaḇn/ /ʾettaḵtaḇn/ åđä flqČò×ña åđä qđ đÀÀò ×ña åđä qđò đñña /ʾeṯkṯeḇnan/ /ʾeṯkattaḇnan/ /ʾettaḵtaḇnan/

17 y In WS /ʾeṯkṯeḇ / is also attested. 18 y In WS /ʾeṯkattaḇ / is also attested. 19 In WS /ʾettaḵtaḇ y/ is also attested.

Lesson 9 64

The imperfect P‘al, Pa‘‘el, ʾAp̄‛el:

P‘al Pa‘‘el ʾAp̄‛el Sg.3.m. tþëò‚flã ®đÀtflò tflò‚ đã /neḵtoḇ / /nḵatteḇ / /naḵteḇ / 3.f. tþëò ñ ñđÀtflò tflò đñ /teḵtoḇ /20 /tḵatteḇ/21 /taḵteḇ/22 2.m. tþëò ñ ñđÀtflò tflò đñ /teḵtoḇ / /tḵatteḇ/ /taḵteḇ/ 2.f. ³ ñòq ³ òđÀq ñ ³ đñòq /teḵtḇīn / /tḵatḇīn / /taḵtḇīn / 1.c. tþëò a flòt đÀÀ×a ×đaflòt /ʾeḵtoḇ / /ʾekkatteḇ/ /ʾaḵteḇ/ Pl.3.m. æŁì qò‚flã æŁì òđÀq ® æŁì đã‚òq /neḵtḇūn/ /nḵatḇūn/ /naḵtḇūn/ 3.f. flãòş‚čqå ®òđÀÀčqå đãòş‚čqå /neḵtḇån/ /nḵatḇån/ /naḵtḇån/ 2.m. æŁì qòñ æŁì ñòđÀq æŁì đñòq /teḵtḇūn/ /tḵatḇūn/ /taḵtḇūn/ 2.f. ñòşčqå čqå òđÀÀş ñ đñòşčqå /teḵtḇån/ /tḵatḇån/ /taḵtḇån/ 1.c. tþëò‚flã flòt đÀÀØã Øđãflòt /neḵtoḇ / /nḵatteḇ/@ /naḵteḇ/

20 y In WS /teḵtoḇ / is also attested. 21 y In WS /tḵatteḇ / is also attested. 22 In WS /taḵteḇ y/ is also attested.

Lesson 9 65

The Imperfect ʾEṯp‛el, ʾEṯpa‛‛al and ʾEttap̄‛al:

ʾEṯp‛el ʾEṯpa‛‛al ʾEttap̄‛al Sg.3.m. tflò×òČ flã tđ flã×òđÀÀò tđò đ flãñò /neṯkṯeḇ/ /neṯkattaḇ/ /nettaḵtaḇ/ 3.f. tflČò×ñ ñ 23 tđ ñ×ñđÀÀò 24 tđò đ ññ 25 /teṯkṯeḇ/ /teṯkattaḇ/ /tettaḵtaḇ/ 2.m. tflČò×ñ ñ tđ ñ×ñđÀÀò tđò đ ññ /teṯkṯeḇ/ /teṯkattaḇ/ /tettaḵtaḇ / 2.f. ³ği ò đÀÀ×ññ ³Či ò đÀÀ×ññ ³Či ×ò đññ /teṯkaṯbīn / /teṯkatḇīn / /tettaḵtḇīn / 1.c. tflČò×ñ a tđ a×ñđÀÀò tđò đñña /ʾeṯkṯeḇ/ /ʾeṯkattaḇ/ /ʾettaḵtaḇ / Pl.3.m. æŁìği flã×òđÀÀò æŁì flã×òđÀÀòq æŁì ×òq đ flãòñ

/neṯkaṯbūn/ /neṯkatḇūn/ /nettaḵtḇūn/ 3.f. flãşò×đÀÀòåčÀÀği flãşò×đÀÀòåčÀÀČi ş×òčqå đ flãòñ

/neṯkaṯbån/ /neṯkatḇån/ /nettaḵtḇån/ 2.m. æŁìği ñ×ñđÀÀò æŁì ñ×ñđÀÀòq æŁì ×òq đññ

/teṯkaṯbūn/ /teṯkatḇūn/ /tettaḵtḇūn/ 2.f. ñşñ×đÀÀòåčÀÀği ñşñ×đÀÀòåčÀÀČi ş×òčqå đññ /teṯkaṯbån/ /teṯkatḇån/ /tettaḵtḇån/ 1.c. tflò×òČ flã tđ flã×òđÀÀò tđò đ flãñò /neṯkṯeḇ/ /neṯkattaḇ/ /nettaḵtaḇ/

23 y In WS /teṯkṯeḇ / is also attested. 24 y In WS /teṯkattaḇ / is also attested. 25 In WS /tettaḵtaḇ y/ is also attested.

Lesson 9 66

The imperative P‘al, Pa‘‘el, ʾAp̄‛el:

P‛al Pa‘‘el ʾAp̄‛el Sg.m. tþëò× đ×tflò ×đaflòt /kṯoḇ / /katteḇ/ /ʾaḵteḇ/ f. ×òqþëï đ×qflòï ×đaflòqï ktoḇy katteḇy ʾaḵteḇy Pl.m. qì þëò× đ×qflòì ×đaflòqì /kṯoḇ w/ /katteḇw/ /ʾaḵteḇw/ æŁì qþëò× æŁì đ×qflò æŁì ×đaflòq /kṯoḇūn / /katteḇūn / /ʾaḵteḇūn / f. şqï þëò× đ׺qflòï ×đaflòşqï /kṯoḇ y/ /katteḇy/ /ʾaḵteḇy/ şq´ĆÀ þëò× @ ´ŽÀ đ×qflò ´ŽÀ ×đaflòq /kṯoḇȩ̄n/@ /katteḇȩ̄n/@ /ʾaḵteḇȩ̄n/@

The imperative ʾEṯp‛el, ʾEṯpa‛‛al and ʾEttap̄‛al:

ʾEṯp‛el ʾEṯpa‛‛al ʾEttap̄‛al Sg.m. a×ñđÀÀòğl tđ a×ñđÀÀò tđò đ aññ /ʾeṯkaṯb / /ʾeṯkattaḇ/ /ʾettaḵtaḇ/ f. a×ñđÀÀòïği qï đ a×ñđÀÀò qï đò đ aññ /ʾeṯkaṯb y/ /ʾeṯkattaḇy/ /ʾettaḵtaḇy/ Pl.m. a×ñđÀÀòìği qì đ a×ñđÀÀò qì đò đ aññ

/ʾeṯkaṯb w/ /ʾeṯkattaḇw/ /ʾettaḵtaḇw/ æŁìği a×ñđÀÀò æŁì qđ a×ñđÀÀò æŁì qđò đ aññ

/ʾeṯkaṯbūn/ /ʾeṯkattaḇūn/ /ʾettaḵtaḇūn/ f. a×ñđÀÀòşïği qşï đ a×ñđÀÀò qşï đò đ aññ

/ʾeṯkaṯb y/ /ʾeṯkattaḇy/ /ʾettaḵtaḇy/ åşîĆği a×ñđÀÀò åşîĆÀ qđ a×ñđÀÀò åşîĆÀ qđò đ aññ

/ʾeṯkaṯbȩ̄n/ /ʾeṯkattaḇȩ̄n/ /ʾettaḵtaḇȩ̄n/

Lesson 9 67

The active participle P‘al, Pa‘‘el, ʾAp̄‛el:

P‛al Pa‘‘el ʾAp̄‛el Sg.m. tflòč× tflòđÀÀ« Øđßflòt /kåṯeḇ/ /mḵatteḇ / /maḵteḇ/ f. dčÀÀğiòč× @ čqd òđÀÀ« Øđßòčqd /kåṯbå/ /mḵatḇå/ /maḵtḇå/ Pl.m. ³ğiòč× @ ³qòđÀÀ« ³ Øđßòq /kåṯbīn/ /mḵattḇīn/ /maḵtḇīn/ f. dŽÀÀğiòč× @ čqå òđÀÀ« čqå ò‚đß /kåṯbȩ̄/@ /mḵattḇån / /maḵtḇån /

The passive participle P‘al, Pa‘‘el, ʾAp̄‛el:

P‛al Pa‘‘el ʾAp̄‛el Sg.m. smò× tđòđÀÀ« tđò‚đß /kṯīḇ/ /mḵattaḇ / /maḵtaḇ/ f. dčrmò× @ čqd òđÀÀ« Øđßòčqd /kṯīḇå/ /mḵatḇå/ /maḵtḇå/ Pl.m. åşn rmò× @ ³qòđÀÀ« ³ Øđßòq /kṯīḇīn / /mḵattḇīn/ /maḵtḇīn/ f. dŽÀ rmò× @ čqåşÀÀ òđÀÀ« čqåşÀÀ ò‚đß /kṯīḇȩ̄/@ /mḵattḇån / /maḵtḇån /

The active participle ʾEṯp‛el, ʾEṯpa‛‛al and ʾEttap̄‛al:

ʾEṯp‛el ʾEṯpa‛‛al ʾEttap̄‛al m. tò×òfl flß tđ flß×òđÀÀò tđò đ flßñò /meṯkṯeḇ/ /meṯkattaḇ/ /mettaḵtaḇ/ f. dčÀÀği flß×òđÀÀò flß×òđÀÀòčqd dčqò đ flßñò /meṯkaṯbå/ /meṯkatḇå/ /mettaḵtḇå/

Lesson 9 68

The infinitives for all stems:

P‛al Pa‘‘el ʾAp̄‛el ʾEṯp‛el ʾEṯpa‛‛al ʾEttap̄‛al tđò‚flß @ qŁì čòđÀÀ« qŁì čò‚đß Łìq Ččò×ò flß qŁì č flß×òđÀÀò qŁì čò đ flßñò /meḵtaḇ /@ /mḵattåḇū/ /maḵtåḇū/ /meṯkṯåḇū/ /meṯkattåḇū/ /mettaḵtåḇū/

9. 3. Remarks on Some Forms in the Paradigms

• Paʽʽel, impf. 1.c.sg.: on the basis of tradition, the form is pronounced tflòđÀÀ×a /ʾekkatteḇ/ (however, the gemination of the 1 st radical is secondary). • ʾEṯpʽel: Two morpheme variants can be observed, /ʾeṯ-kṯeḇ-/ and /ʾeṯ-kaṯb-/, which are used for different forms: /ʾeṯ-kaṯb-/ is used: a. for the pf. 3.f.sg. and 1.sg., e.g. òđÀğiòđÀ×ña /ʾeṯkaṯbaṯ /; òflğiòđÀ×ña /ʾeṯkaṯbeṯ / b. as well as for all impf. and particple forms which take endings, e.g. 2.f.sg. (Impf.) ³ğiòđÀÀ×ññ /teṯkaṯbīn /; dčÀÀğiòđÀÀ×òflß /meṯkaṯbå/ (part. act, f.sg.) c. and all imp. forms (most likely modelled on the impf. form with endings), e.g. ğlòđÀÀ×ña /ʾeṯkaṯb / (m.sg.); ïğiòđÀÀ×ña /ʾeṯkaṯb y/ (f.sg.). d. For all other forms, the morpheme variant /ʾeṯ-kṯeḇ-/ is used. • Concerning the distinction between ʾEṯpaʽʽal and ʾEṯpʽel: the forms listed in the last section have the same vowel sequence in ʾEṯpʽel and in ʾEṯpaʽʽal. Nonetheless, the ʾEṯpaʽʽal-forms are characterised by the gemination of the middle radical, e.g. pf. 3.m.sg.: Čl đòđÀÀ×ñağ /ʾeṯkattaḇ / (ʾEṯpa.) : tò×ñaČ /ʾeṯkṯeḇ / (ʾEṯpe.) Part. m.sg.: Čl đòđÀÀ×òflßğ /meṯkattaḇ / (ʾEṯpa.) : tò×òflßČ /meṯkṯeḇ / (ʾEṯpe.). • Imp. ʾEṯpaʽʽal: In later WS, /ʾeṯkatḇ / is usually used instead of /ʾeṯkattaḇ /. In contrast to the imp. ʾEṯpʽel ( ğl òđÀÀ×ñaČ /ʾeṯkaṯb /), the third radical is always pronounced as spirant.

Note: in the ʾEttap̄ʿal-verb stem (and only here) the geminate /tt/ (originating in /t/ + /ʾ/) is always written doubled, e.g. ÖŠß đ ñañ /ʾettamraq / »be cleansed« ( √mrq) Êđ…ëğ đ ñañ /ʾettawdaʿ/ »be recognised« ( √ydʿ ). In the T-stems ( ʾEṯp‛el, ʾEṯpa‛‛al, ʾEttap̄‛al), the presence of adjacent dentals results in partial assimilation. The direction of assimilation is usually regressive (→ 3. 1. 1.). These assimilations are not expressed in the consonantal orthography. Examples: o’đ ña /ʾeṭṭaššī/ < */ʾeṯṭaššī/ »to be hidden« ( √ṭšy ) Šđßđğ…ña /ʾeddammar / < */ʾeṯdammar / »to be amazed« ( √dmr ) |đã đ…ñağ /ʾeddannaḥ/ < */ʾeṯdannaḥ/ »to appear« ( √dnḥ) ŠğÀđi đññağ /ʾettabbar / < */ʾeṯtabbar / »to be broken«» ( √tbr ).

Lesson 9 69

However, the sequence /t/ + vowelless /d/ is assimilated to /tt/ (progessive assimilation), e.g. ŠđÀğ…ña /ʾettḵar / < */ʾeṯd( e)ḵar / «»to remember«» ( √dkr ).

In verbs in which the first radical is a sibilant, the stem marker / t/ of the T-stem is partially assimilated, e.g. preceding /z/ it is assimilated to / d/, and preceding /ṣ/ it is assimilated to / ṭ/; at the same time, the sequence dental (= / t/) – sibilant is always transposed to sibilant – dental ( metathesis ) e.g. åĆqğ…‹a /ʾezdḇen / < /ʾezdben / < */ʾetz( e)ḇen / »to be sold« ( √zbn ) ÉđÀrúa /ʾeṣṭḇa‛/ < /ʾeṭṣḇa‛/ < */ʾetṣ( e)ḇa‛/ »to be immersed« ( √ṣb‛).

9. 4. Other (unproductive) Verb Stems: Šap̄ ʽel, ʾEštap ̄ ʽal

Alongside the six productive verb stems given above, Syriac also contains the remnants of verb stems with different formations. They are only attested for a few particular verb roots, which are however common. The stems Šap̄. = Šap̄ʽel ÝflÈÐđ‘ (with the rarer phonetic variant Sap̄. = Sap̄ʽel ÝflÈÐđ ) and ʾEštap̄. = ʾEštap̄ʽal ÝđÈÏ đò‘a (with the rarer variant ʾEstap̄ = ʾEstap̄ʽal ÝđÈÏ đòa ) are relatively common. They are known to have been used with more than twenty roots, in particular those with a weak 1 st radical and a double weak root. Šap̄ʽel (and Sap̄ʽel) is morphologically and semantically comparable with ʾAp̄ʽel; like the latter, it usually has a causative meaning. ʾEštap̄ʽal and ʾEstap̄ʽal are the passive-reflexive counterparts to Šap̄ʽel and Sap̄ʽel, and are thus comparable with ʾEttap̄ʽal. There are verbs which, build ʾAp̄ʽel and Šap̄ʽel (with similar meanings), e.g. √ydʽ »to know« for ʾAp̄. Êđþ…ëča /ʾåwda ʽ/ (WS /ʾawda ʽ/) »to inform« Šap̄. Êđþ…ìč‘ /šåwda ʽ/ (WS /šawda ʽ/) »to make clear« ʾEštap̄. Êđþ…ë č ‘aÀò /ʾeštåwda ʽ/ (WS /ʾeštawda ʽ/) »to recognize«. The forms are built analogously to ʾAp̄ʽel/Paʽʽel and ʾEṯpaʽʽal/ ʾEttap̄ʽal; compare the following (simplified) paradigm for Šap̄ʽel/ ʾEštap̄ʽal-verbs (example verb ČÑÜzđ‘ /šaḥlep̄/ »to change«, ČÑđÜy đò‘a /ʾeštaḥlap̄/ »to be changed«; Sap̄ʽel/ ʾEstap̄ʽel-verbs follow the same inflection pattern):

Šap̄ʽel ʾEštap̄ʽal Pf. 3.m.sg. ČÑÜzđ‘ /šaḥlep̄/ ČÑđÜy đò‘a /ʾeštaḥlap̄/ Impf. 3.m.sg. ČÑÜzđ’ã /nšaḥlep̄/ ČÑđÜy đò’flã /neštaḥlap̄/ Imp. m.sg. ČÑÜzđ‘ /šaḥlep̄/ ČÑđÜy đò‘a /ʾeštaḥlap̄/ Part. m.sg. ČÑÜzđ’ß /mšaḥlep̄/ ČÑđÜy đò’flß /meštaḥlap̄/

Lesson 9 70

Here are some common Šap̄ʽel/ ʾEštap̄ʽal-verbs:

Šap̄ʽel ʾEštap̄ʽal Ł†flğjÈđ‘ /ša ʽbeḏ / »to enslave« (√ʽbd ) Ł† đÀÀğjÇ đò‘a /ʾešta ʽbaḏ / oÜÈđ‘ /ša ʽlī/ »to exalt« ( √ʽly ) oÜÇ đò‘a /ʾešta ʽlī/ ÝğfliŠđ‘ /šarbel / »to dirty« ( √rbl ) ÝđÀÀği‰ đò‘a /ʾeštarbal / ÝflğçŠđ‘ /šargel / »to impede« ( √rgl ) ÝđÀÀğç‰ đò‘a /ʾeštargal / sflôÜđ‘ /šalheḇ/ »to inflame« ( √lhb ) ôÛs đò‘a /ʾeštalhaḇ / oÜàđ‘ /šamlī/ »to accomplish« ( √mly ) oÜß đò‘a /ʾeštamlī / ÝÜØđ‘ /šaklel / »to finish« ( √kll ) đÜ×Ý đò‘a /ʾeštaklal/ Ýfl‘Šđ‘ /šaršel / »to drag (of clothing)« (√ršl ) đ‘‰Ý đò‘a /ʾeštaršal/ Éđ‘Šđ‘ /šarša ʽ/ »to conceal wickedness« ( √ršʽ) É𑉠đò‘a /ʾeštarša ʽ/ €đñŠđ‘ /šartaḥ/ »to supply abundantly« ( √rtḥ) €đñ‰ đò‘a /ʾeštartaḥ/ ŠđÀÀğçì č‘ /šåwgar / »to hurl« ( √ygr ) ŠđÀÀğçë čğ aò‘ /ʾešt åwgar / Êđ č‘ğ…ì /šåwda ʽ/ »to recognize« ( √ydʽ) Êđğ…ë čò‘ağ /ʾešt åwda ʽ/ tfl‹ì č‘ /šåwzeḇ/ »to deliver« (< akkad.) ( √šwzb ) ë‹t čğ aò‘ /ʾešt åwzaḇ/ Šđyì č‘ /šåwḥar / »to hinder« ( √ʾḥr ) Šđyë čğ aò‘ /ʾešt åwḥar / Áfl‘ì č‘ /šåwšeṭ/ »to cause to advance« ( √yšṭ) Áđ‘ ëčò‘ğ a /ʾešt åwšaṭ/

Here are some common Sap̄ʽel/ ʾEstap̄ʽal-verbs:

Sap̄ʽel ʾEstap̄ʽal oì č /såwsī/ »to heal« (√ʾsʾ ) oë č aò /ʾest åwsī/ sflôŠđ /sarheḇ/ »to hasten« ( √rhb ) ô‰s đ aò /ʾestarhaḇ / ÝflğjÔđ /saqbel / »to accuse« ( √qbl ) ÝđÀÀğjÓ đò a /ʾestaqbal /

9. 5. Vocabulary

A. sacrifice /qurbånå/ dčäčÀÀği‰ŁìÓ barrel /ḥezbå/ dčÀÀğiŒfly people /ʽammå/ dčàđÇ creation /brīṯå/ cČčò mŠi (pl. /ʽammȩ̄/ dŽààđÇ ) (Pl. /beryåṯå/ cČčòčíˆfli ) gloom /ʽamṭånå / dčäčİ àđÇ quality /dīlåytå/ cčòîğ čÜ m… blood /dmå/ dčß… to have mercy /ʾeṯraḥḥam / áđy‰ña foreign /nuḵråyå/ dč튁Łìã B. land, place /ʾaṯrå/ a‰ñđa @ he rejoices /ḥåḏȩ̄/ aƆčy2 face, countenance (< gr.) /parṣōpå/ dčÀÀ ÏþëúŠđÏ Sun /šemšå dč’ àfl‘ to have mercy /ʾeṯraḥḥam / áđy‰ña lie /kaddåḇūṯå/ cČčñŁìq čğ†đ× glance /ḥyårå/ aŠ čî y moon /sahrå/ aŠôđ thought, idea /re‛yånå/ dčäčîÇfl‰

Lesson 9 71

secret (< pers.) /ʾråzå/ cõ‹‰a wise /ḥakkīmå/ dčànØđy petition /båʽūṯå/ cČčñŁìÈčÀÀği sort, kind (< pers.) /znå/ dčã‹

Verb Forms Pe. to love (e-a) /nerḥam / áđyŠflã : /rḥem / áfly‰ ʾAp̄. to find, to attain 26 /neškaḥ/ |đÀÀØ’ flã : /ʾeškaḥ/ |đÀÀØ‘a ʾEṯpe. to be loved /neṯrḥam / áfly‰ò flã : /ʾeṯrḥem / áfly ‰ña Pe. to turn back (a-o) /nehpoḵ/ „þìÐôflã : /hp̄aḵ / ƒđÀÐô ʾEṯpe. to turn /neṯhp̄eḵ/ ƒflÀÀÐôòflã : /ʾeṯhp̄eḵ/ ƒflÀÀÐôña ʾEṯpe. to forgive, to be left /neštḇeq/ ÕflÀqòÀ’flã : /ʾeštḇeq / ÕflÀqòÀ‘a Pa. to receive /nqabbel / Ýflğj đÔã : /qabbel / ÝflğjđÓ Pa. to exchange /nḥallep̄/ ČÑÜ đ− : /ḥallep̄/ ČÑÜđy ʾEṯpa. to be exchange /neṯḥallap̄/ ČÑđÜđyòflã : /ʾeṯḥallap̄/ ČÑđÜđyña Pe. to work (a-o) /nep̄loḥ/ €þìÜÐflã : /plaḥ/ |đÜÏ Šap̄. to change /nšaḥlep̄/ ČÑÜzđ’ã : /šaḥlep̄/ ČÑÜzđ‘ ʾEštap̄. to recognize /neštåwda ʽ/ Êđğ…ë čò’flã : /ʾeštåwda ʽ/ Êđğ…ë čò‘a Pe. to wish (→ 13. 1.) /neṣḇå/ dĆğiûflã : /ṣḇå/ dčqú Pa. to serve /nšammeš/ “flà đ’ã : /šammeš/ “flà đ‘ Pe. to sleep (e-a) /neḏmaḵ/ ƒđß Ł†flã : /dmeḵ/ ƒflß… Pa. to sanctify /nqaddeš/ ”flğ†đÔã : /qaddeš/ ”flğ†đÓ ʾEṯpa. to be broken /nettabbar / ŠđÀÀği đñòflã : /ʾettabbar / ŠđÀÀği đñña ʾEṯpa. to be protected /nestattar / ‰đñđò Žflã : /ʾestattar / ‰đñđò a Pa. to answer (→ 13. 1.) /np̄annȩ̄/ dĆä đÀÀÐã : /pannī/ oäđÏ ʾAp̄. to feel /nargeš / “flğç Šđã : /ʾargeš / “flğç ‰đa Pe. to laugh (a-a) /neḡḥaḵ/ ƒđzČèflã : /gḥaḵ/ ƒđzç Pa. to praise /nšabbaḥ/ |đÀÀ ğj đ’ã : /šabbaḥ/ |đÀÀ ğjđ‘ ʾEṯpe. to be said /neṯȩ̄ʾmar / Šđßa òflãĆČ : /ʾeṯȩ̄ʾmar / Šđß aĆñaČ

9. 6. Exercises

A. Translate the following: (Jn 14,21)Nïqča@åČß@áfly‰òflã@oÛ@áfly‰ğ…@åíĆğ…@ìô 1 Ndčzn’àđÀČiğ…@æđñŁìäčàîô@åđänÐÜ zđ’ß@hčÛë@Zðñđòžãđa@hčÛë@dčãa@ƒĆÐô@dčãa@hčÛ…@Z÷þìþ룅þëañ@óÛ@ŠđÀÀğßča 2 (AMS 432f.) (MJ 4) NæþìôîđÜÇ@áđy‰ñaë@æþìôñŁìÈčÀÀği@ČÝflğjđÓ@ïžôìč»đˆqë@ôĆñŁìğjîđİği@ĆÀČç@ë2 ô8 3 (Rm 1,25) NcČčòčíˆflrÛ@ì’flàđ‘ë@ìÜflyŁ…ë@NcČčñŁìqđ†đÀÀ‚q@dôčÛađğ …@ôƉŠ‘@ìÐÜđyëğ 4 (1. Cor 15,51) NČÑđÜđyòflã@åíĆğ…@åđÜ× @܆ƒđߣ†flã@åđÜ×@ìčÛ@Ncõ‹‰a@æþì¨@dčãa@Šđßča@dô 5

26 For /a/ > /e/ see 1. 9. 1.

Lesson 9 72

@dčäčÀÀği‰ŁìÓ@cĆìôflãğ…@dôčÛađğ @… æþìnÜđÀğèãëhÛ @€þìÜÏaĆë@NdŽààđÈq@dčzn’ß@Êþì’nÛ@dčäč’àđ’ß@cĆìôaĆ… 6 @ @ (Rm 15,16) Ndč‘Ł…ŁìÓŁ…@dčyŁëŠği@” đğ†đÔßë@ÝflğjđÔß@dŽààđÇŁ… (Ac 2,20) Ndčߣ†đÀq@aŠôđë @dčäčİàđÈği@ČÑđÜđyòflã@dč’àfl‘ 7 (AMS 442) NdôčÛđü@|đÀÀğjđ’ßë@aƆčyë@cìžô@ƒflğzčËŁ…@hčÛa@âflğ†flàği@“flğç‰đa@hčÛë2 8

B. Add vowels and translate the following: @diŒy@æa…@oäÏ@ìČôë@†jÇñ@däß@òãa@‰ñòŽß@ói…@diŒy@däô@Šiñòã@æa…@µ@ŠČßa@åíŠyaë 1 (BH, KdT 7)܀Šiñòã@⁄@ói… @a‰ña@Šiñòã @l‰…@däíü@æ컊ã@⁄…@dØÜß…@ïô@còîÜí……@oäÏ@ìČôë@dØÜß@ÙÛ@áğy‰@⁄@däß@ÝÇ…@Šđßaña 2 (BH, KdT 9) ܀ (→ 15. 3.) æìôäß @diğú… @åğßë @däîlj@Ê…ëò’ß@“ãa… @ôy @åßë@ïôşìã‹@åßë@óÏëúŠÏ@åß@dànØy@“ãa…@Ýİß 3 (KD 5) N†jÈã…

C. Write out the following until familiar:

(AMS 442) NdôčÛđü@|đÀÀğjđ’ßë@aƆčyë@cìžô@ƒflğzčËŁ…@hčÛa@âflğ†flàği@“flğç‰đa@hčÛë2 1 @ @ (Joh 14,21)Nïqča@åČß@áfly‰òflã@oÛ@áfly‰ğ…@åíĆğ…@ìô 2

(AMS 442) . 1 (Joh 14,21). 2

(AMS 442) . ܘ ܘ ܘ ܗ݇ ܕ ܐ ܡ ܪܐ ܘ 1 (Jn 14,21) .ܐ ܪ ܪܕ ܕ ܘܗܘ 2 @ @

Lesson 10 10. 1. Distinctive Characteristics of Verbs with a Pharyngal or an /r/ as 3rd Radical

For verbs with a pharyngal /ḥ/ or /‛/ as 3 rd radical, /e/ becomes / a/ – i.e. the verbs in question always exhibit an a- vocalism before the 3 rd radical instead of an /e/. For example, the Pf. Pa. of √šdr is ‰đþ†đ‘ /šaddar / < */šadder / »he sent«. The ʾAp̄. of √dkr is ŠđÀÀף…đa /ʾaḏkar / < */ʾaḏker / »he mentioned«. Further examples: Šđßča /ʾåmar / < */ʾåmer / »saying« đ‘ğjđÀÀ| /šabbaḥ/ < */šabbeḥ/ »he praised« †číđÊ2 /yåḏa‛/ < */yåḏe‛/ »knowing«

10. 2. Distinctive Characteristics of Verbs with a Sibilant as 1st Radical

For verbs with a sibilant as 1 st radical, the forms of the verb stems ʾEṯp‛el and ʾEṯpa‛‛al are irregular. The sequence dental – sibilant is reversed to sibilant – dental (i.e. ʾEºt‛el and ʾEºta‛‛al instead of ʾEṯp‛el and ʾEṯpa‛‛al). If the sibilant in question is /z/ or / ṣ/, there is also a partial assimilation of the stem marker /t/, which is also expressed in the orthography. Examples: “đßđğ ‘aò /ʾeštammaš / < */ʾeṯšammaš / »he was served« ( √šmš ) ÝđÀÀ× đğ aò /ʾestakkal / < */ʾeṯsakkal / »he understood« ( √skl ) åflÀqğ…‹a /ʾezdḇen / < /ʾedzḇen / < */ʾeṯzḇen / »he/it was bought« ( √zbn ) ÉđÀÀğjđúa /ʾeṣṭabba‛/ < /ʾeṭṣabba‛/ < */ʾeṯṣabba‛/ »he was immersed (in water)/ he was made wet« ( √ṣb‛)

By contrast, the formation of ʾEtta º‛al is regular.

10. 3. Verbs with Object Suffixes: Introduction

The perfect, imperfect, imperative and infinitive – but not the participle – can have directly attached pronominal suffixes (object suffixes) (→ 6. 1.). There are no object suffixes for 3.m./f.pl.; instead, the enclitic personal pronouns are used (.e.g. æþìãa@t đČ ×ò /kṯaḇ-ʾennon / »he wrote to them (m.pl.)«, not: kṯaḇ-hon ). Verb forms of the 1.c.sg. cannot be attached to the 1.sg. suffix (»I wrote to myself«), nor can forms of the 1.c.pl. be attached to 1.c.pl. suffixes, or forms in the 2 nd person sg. or pl. to the 2 nd person. sg. or pl suffixes. Verb forms with object suffixes are generally speaking not formally identical to the corresponding non-suffixed forms. They often have a different syllable structure as well as old endings which are not (or no longer) present in the corresponding non-suffixed forms, since they have dropped away in the absolute word ending.

74 Lesson 10

The object suffixes in the perfect are as follows:

1.c.sg. 2.m.sg. 2.f.sg. 3.m.sg. 3.f.sg. 1.c.pl. 2.m.pl. Sg.3.m. đÀÀ /-an y/@ čÀÀƒ /-åḵ/@ ÀÀ‚ĆÀï /-ȩ̄ḵy/ ÀÀóĆÀ /-ȩ̄h/@ čÀÀf /-åh / ÀđđÀÀå /-an /@ æþì /-ḵōn /@ 3.f. đÀÀ /-an y/@ čÀÀƒ /-åḵ/@ ÀÀ‚ĆÀï /-ȩ̄ḵy/ ÀÀóĆÀ /-ȩ̄h/@ čÀÀf /-åh / ÀđđÀÀå /-an / æþì /-ḵōn /@ 2.m. čÀÀ /-ån y/ — — ïžôí /-yhy / čÀÀf /-åh / čÀÀå /-ån/ — 2.f. ïã /-ny/ — — ïžôë /-why / ğô /-h/ æ /-n/ — 1.c. — ƒčÀÀ /-åḵ/ ï‚ĆÀ ÀÀ /-ȩ̄ḵy/ óĆÀ ÀÀ /-ȩ̄h/@ fčÀÀ /–åh / — æþì /-ḵōn /@ Pl.3.m. ïã /-ny/ „ /-ḵ/@ ï /-ḵy/@ ïžô /-hy/ ğô /-h/@ åÀ /-n/@ æþì /-ḵōn / 3.f. ş čÀÀ /-ån y/ čÀÀşÀÀƒ /-åḵ/@ ĆÀÀşï‚ /-ȩ̄ḵy/ şïžôí /-yhy / fşÀÀčÀÀ /-åh /@ åşÀÀÀčÀÀ /-ån / æþì‚ şÀÀ /-ḵōn / 2.m. čÀÀ /-ån y/ — — ïžôí /-yhy / fčÀÀ /-åh /@ åčÀÀ /-ån / — 2.f. čÀÀ /-ån y/ — — ïžôí /-yhy / fčÀÀ /-åh /@ åčÀÀ /-ån / — 1.c. — čÀÀƒ /-åḵ/ ĆÀÀï‚ /-ȩ̄ḵy/ ïžôí /-yhy / fčÀÀ /-åh / — æŁì /-ḵōn /

With regard to the form of the object suffixes, the following must be emphasized: • The 1.c.sg. suffix has a basic form, đÀÀ /-(a)n y/ < */-(a)nni /, i.e. following on from the consonant ending /–an y/, e.g. ïã đ qò đČ ×ò /kṯaḇṯan y/ < */katabat-anni / »she wrote to me«, otherwise /–ny/ in m qò đČ ×ò /kṯaḇtīn y/ »you (f.) wrote to me«. • The 2.m./f.sg. suffixes čÀÀƒ /-åḵ/ and ï‚ĆÀ ÀÀ /-ȩ̄ḵy/ when following forms ending on a vowel become „ /-ḵ/ and ï /-ḵy/, e.g. òđ×ği„Łì /kaṯbūḵ/ »they (m.) wrote to you (m.)« ïŁì ğiòđ× /kaṯbūḵy/ »they (m.) wrote to you (f.)«. • The 3.m.sg. suffix has both a short form, ÀÀóĆÀ /-ȩ̄h/, and several long form variants: ïžôí /-yhy /, ïžôë /-why/ and ïžô /-hy/ (the consonant sequence is never pronounced!). The short form ÀÀóĆÀ /-ȩ̄h/ usually follows forms which end on a consonant,27 including đ×òóĆği /kaṯbȩ̄h/ »he wrote to him« (Pf. Pe.), ôĆČ qò đČ ×ò /kṯaḇṯȩ̄h / »she wrote to him« (Pf. Pe.), qğòô đČ ×ò /kṯaḇtȩ̄h / »I wrote to him« (Pf. Pe.) and ‚flßòóĆq /meḵtḇȩ̄h / »his writing« (Inf. Pe.). The long form variants often follow forms which end on a vowel, including the 2.f.sg. and 1.-3. pl. perfect, as well as all forms of the imperative. By contrast, both suffix forms (the short form and the long form variants) can be used with all imperfect forms (see also → 10. 3.).

27 These endings can most likely be explained historically as follows: /-ȩ̄h/ < /-Vhī/; /-åy / < /-åhi /; /-īw / < /-īhū /; /-ū/ < /-ūhū / (/-hū/ and /-hī/ as variations of the basic form of the suffix 3.m.sg.). Lesson 10 75

Further rules can be specified for the long form variants ïžôë /-why/ and ïžô /-hy/: - the ïžôë /-why/ variant mostly occurs following the feminine ending /- y/ (full vowel /–ī-/) e.g. ïžôìmòq đČ ×ò /kṯaḇtīw hy / »you (f.) wrote to him« (Pf. Pe.), ïžôìnqþë ×ò /kṯoḇīw hy / »write (f.) to him!« (Imp. Pe.). - the /-hy/ variant occurs only after the masculine ending /-w/ (full vowel /–ū-/) e.g. in ïžôŁì đ×òği /kaṯbū hy/ »they (m.) wrote to him« [read: kaṯḇūy ] (Pf. Pe.) and ïžôŁì Łì×ñği /kuṯbūhy/ »write (m.) to him!« [read: kuṯbūy ] (Imp. Pe.). Further examples: ïžôìmòq đò×Č /kṯaḇtīw hy / »she wrote to him« (Pf., Pe.) ïžô îčãŁìq ‚flãò /neḵtḇūnåy hy / »they (m.) shall write to him« (Impf., Pe.) óĆãŁìq ‚flãò /neḵtḇūnȩ̄h / »they (m.) shall write to him« (Impf., Pe.) ïžô îčq þë Č ×ò /kṯoḇåy hy / »write to him!« (Imp., Pe.) • The 3.f.sg. suffix is čÀÀf /-åh / (following a final consonant) or e /-h/ (following a final vowel in the verb form ., e.g. ğô čòqğ đČ ×ò /kṯaḇtåh / < */katabt-h(å) / »you (m.) wrote to her«). • The . 1.c.pl. suffix is ÀđđÀÀå /–an /, ÀčÀÀå /-ån / (following a final consonant) or åÀ /-n/ (following a final vowel in the verb form, e.g. qòåm đČ ×ò /kṯaḇtīn / < */katabtī-n(a) / »you (f.) wrote to us«).

Wih regard to personal endings preceding .suffixes, the following must be emphasized: • The 2.m.sg. form in the imperfect and imperative takes the (secondary) ending /–ay-/ when followed by the 1.c.sg. suffix, e.g. îđÀÀqþëòñ /teḵtoḇayn y/ »you (m.) shall write to me«; îđÀÀqþë ×ò /kṯoḇayn y/ »write to me!«. • The 3.m.sg. form in the imperfect takes the ending /–ī-/ (full vowel) when followed by the 3.m.sg. suffix, analogous to the feminine form, e.g. ïžôìnÀqò‚flã /neḵtḇīw hy/ »he shall write to him«. • The m.pl. form in the imperative . takes one of two endings, either /–ū-/ or (in parallel to the 2.m.pl. preceding suffixes .) /–ūnå-/ e.g. ïãŁìğiñŁì× /kuṯbūn y/ »write (m.) to me!« or čãŁìğiñŁì× /kuṯbūnån y/ »write (m.) to me!«. • The f.pl. form takes one of two endings, either /–å-/ or /–ȩ̄nå-/, e.g. ïşäčqþëò× /kṯoḇån y/ »write (f.) to me!« or čäîĆÀqþëò× /kṯoḇȩ̄nån y/ »write (f.) to me!«

10. 4. The Perfect with Object Suffixes

When it precedes object suffixes (with the exception of 2.pl.), the base of the perfect in several forms is đ×òğl /kaṯb -/ < */katab -/ (in contrast to tđČ ×ò /kṯaḇ -/ for corresponding forms without suffixes .); otherwise, it is tđČ ×ò /kṯaḇ -/ (also in the 3.f.sg. and 1.c.sg., in contrast to the base áyfl‰ /reḥm-/ for corresponding forms without suffixes). Verbs with the thematic vowel e have */qṭel / as their base instead of */qṭal /, e.g. eČčòàfly‰ /rḥemṯåh / »she loved her«.

76 Lektion 10

The following is the paradigm for the perfect P‛al with object suffixes, taking tđČ ×ò /kṯaḇ / »to write« as an example:

P‛al 1.c.sg. 2.m.sg. 2.f.sg. Sg.3.m. tđò×Č @ đÀğiò đ× @ ƒčÀÀğiòđ× @ ï‚Ćğiòđ× @ /kṯaḇ / /kaṯban y/ /kaṯbåḵ/ /kaṯbȩ̄ḵy/ 3.f. òđÀğiò× đïã Č qđò đò×Č „Ččòq đò×Č ïĆòqČ đò×Č /keṯbaṯ/ /kṯaḇṯan y/ /kṯaḇṯåḵ/ /kṯaḇṯȩ̄ḵy/ 2.m. òq Čđò× ïã čòq Čđò× — — /kṯaḇt/ /kṯaḇtåny/ 2.f. ðòq đò×Č mòÀqđđò×Č — — /kṯaḇty/ /kṯaḇtīn y/ 1.c. òflğiò× — „čòq Čđò× ïĆòq đò×Č /keṯbeṯ/ /kṯaḇtåḵ/ /kṯaḇtȩ̄ḵy/ Pl.3.m. qđì đò×Č ïãŁìğiòđ× „Łìğiòđ× @ ïŁìğiòđ× @ /kṯaḇw/ /kaṯbūn y/ /kaṯbūḵ/ /kaṯbūḵy/ 3.f. tđò×Č @ ş čÀÀğiòđ× ƒşÀčÀÀğiòđ× @ ï‚ĆşÀÀğiòđ× /kṯaḇ/ /kaṯbåny/ /kaṯbåḵ/ /kaṯbȩ̄ḵy/ 2.m. æþëòÀq đò×Č čãþëòÀq đò×Č — — /kṯaḇtōn / /kṯaḇtōnåny/ 2.f. åíĆòq đò×Č @ čäíĆòÀq đò×Č — — /kṯaḇtȩ̄n/ /kṯaḇtȩ̄nåny/ 1.c. åq đò×Č — ƒčäq Čđò× @ ï‚Ćäq đò×Č @ /kṯaḇn/ /kṯaḇnåḵ/ /kṯaḇnȩ̄ḵy/

Lesson 10 77

P‛al 3.m.sg. 3.f.sg. 1.c.pl. 2.m.pl. Sg.3.m. tđò×Č @ óĆĆğiòđ× @ fčÀÀğiòđ× åđÀÀğiòđ× @ æþì‚q đò×Č @ /kṯaḇ / /kaṯbȩ̄h/ /kaṯbåh/ /kaṯban / /kṯaḇḵōn / 3.f. òđÀği ò×Č ôĆòqČ đò×Č eČčòq đò×Č æđòqČ đò×Č æþìòđÀğiò× /keṯbaṯ/ /kṯaḇṯȩ̄h/ /kṯaḇṯåh/ /kṯaḇṯan / /keṯbaṯḵōn / 2.m. òqđČò× ïžôí čòq đò×Č ğô čòqđđò×Č æčòqđđò×đČ — /kṯaḇt/ /kṯaḇtåy hy / /kṯaḇtåh/ /kṯaḇtån/ 2.f. ðòqđò×Č ïžôìmòqđđò×Č ğómòqđČđò× åmòqđČđò× — /kṯaḇty/ /kṯaḇtīw hy / /kṯaḇtīh / /kṯaḇtīn / 1.c. òflği ò×Č ôĆòqđđò×Č ečòqđò× — æþìòČiđđò×Č @ /keṯbeṯ/ /kṯaḇtȩ̄h/ /kṯaḇtåh/ /kṯaḇtḵōn / Pl.3.m. qđì ò×Č ïžôŁìğiòđ× ğôŁìğiòđ× @ æŁìğiòđ× @ æþìŁìğiòđ× @

/kṯaḇw/ /kaṯbūhy/ /kaṯbūh / /kaṯbūn / /kaṯbūḵōn / 3.f. tđò×Č @ şïžôîčÀÀğiòđ× fşÀÀčÀÀğiòđ× @ åşÀÀčÀÀğiòđ× æþì‚şÀÀqđđò×Č /kṯaḇ/ /kaṯbåy hy/ /kaṯbåh/ /kaṯbån/ /kṯaḇḵōn / 2.m. æþëòÀqđò×Č ïžôîčãþëòÀqđđò×Č fčãþëòÀqđđò×Č åčãþëòÀqđđò×Č — /kṯaḇtōn / /kṯaḇtōnåyhy/ /kṯaḇtōnåh/ /kṯaḇtōnån/ 2.f. åíĆòqđò×Č @ ïžôîčãĆòÀqđđò×Č fčäíĆòÀqđđò×Č åčäíĆòÀqđđò×Č — /kṯaḇtȩ̄n/ /kṯaḇtēnåy hy/ /kṯaḇtȩ̄nåh/ /kṯaḇtȩ̄nån/ 1.c. åqđò×Č ïžôîčäÀqđđđò×đČ fčäqđđò×Č @ — æŁì‚čäqđđò×Č @ /kṯaḇn/ /kṯaḇnåyhy/ /kṯaḇnåh/ /kṯaḇnåḵōn /

The perfect forms of derived verb stems with suffixes are formed analogously.

78 Lektion 10

10. 5. The Imperfect with Object Suffixes

The paradigm of the imperfect with object suffixes is as follows:

P‛al 1.c.sg. 2.m.sg. 2.f.sg. Sg.3.m. tþëò‚flã đÀÀ qò‚flã čqƒ ò‚flflã ï‚ĆÀ qò‚flã /neḵtoḇ / /neḵtḇan y/ /neḵtḇåḵ/ /neḵtḇȩ̄ḵy/ 3.f. tþëò ñ đÀÀ qòñ čqƒ òñ ï‚ĆÀ qòñ /teḵtoḇ / /teḵtḇan y/ /teḵtḇåḵ/ /teḵtḇȩ̄ḵy/ 2.m. tþëò ñ îđÀÀ qþëòñ — —

/teḵtoḇ / /teḵtoḇayny/ 2.f. ³ ñòq čän qòñ — — /teḵtḇīn / /teḵtḇīnåny/ Pl.3.m. æŁì qò‚flã čãŁì qò‚flã ƒčãŁì qò‚flã ï‚ĆãŁì qò‚flã /neḵtḇūn/ /neḵtḇūnåny/ /neḵtḇūnåḵ/ /neḵtḇūnȩ̄ḵy/ 3.f. flãò‚čqşÀÀå ïşäčä flãò‚čq ƒşÀÀčä čq ò‚flã ïş‚Ćä čq ò‚flã /neḵtḇån / /neḵtḇånåny/ /neḵtḇånåḵ/ /neḵtḇånȩ̄ḵy/

Lesson 10 79

P‛al 3.m.sg. 3.f.sg. 1.c.pl. 2.m.pl. Sg.3.m. tþëò‚flã óĆÀqò‚flã @ fnÀqò‚flã @ åđÀÀqò‚flã @ æþì‚qþëò‚flã @ /neḵtoḇ / /neḵtḇȩ̄h/ /neḵtḇīh / /neḵtḇan / /neḵtoḇḵōn / ïžôìnÀqò‚flã @ /neḵtḇīw hy/ 3.f. tþëò ñ óĆÀqò ñ @ /teḵtoḇ / /teḵtḇȩ̄h/ ïžôìnqòñ /teḵtḇīw hy/ 2.m. tþëò ñ ïžôìnqòñ fnqòñ åđÀÀqòñ @ — /teḵtoḇ / /teḵtḇīw hy/ /teḵtḇīh / /teḵtḇan / óĆÀqòñ fîĆÀqþëòñ ´đÀÀqþëòñ /teḵtḇȩ̄h/ /teḵtoḇȩ̄h/ /teḵtoḇayn/ ïžôîčqþëòñ

/teḵtoḇåyhy/ 2.f. ³ ñòq ïžôîčänqòñ fčänqòñ åčänqòñ —

/teḵtḇīn / /teḵtḇīnåy hy/ /teḵtḇīnåh/ /teḵtḇīnån/ óĆänqòñ /teḵtḇīnȩ̄h/ Pl.3.m. æŁì qò‚flã ïžôîčãŁìqò‚flã fčãŁìqò‚flã åčãŁìqò‚flã æþì‚čãŁìqò‚flã

/neḵtḇūn/ /neḵtḇūnåy hy/ /neḵtḇūnåh/ /neḵtḇūnån/ /neḵtḇūnåḵōn / óĆãŁìqò‚flã /neḵtḇūnȩ̄h/ 3.f. flãò‚čqåşÀÀ şïžôîčäčqò‚flã fşÀÀčäčqò‚flã åşÀÀčäčÀqò‚flã æþìş‚čäčqò‚flã

/neḵtḇån/ /neḵtḇånåy hy/ /neḵtḇånåh/ /neḵtḇånån/ /neḵtḇånåḵōn / óŽäčqò‚flã /neḵtḇånȩ̄h/

10. 6. The Imperative with Object Suffixes

Imperatives only take 1st and 3rd person suffixes. With the exception of the 2.m.pl, the base is ò×þët /kṯoḇ -/, and is thus the same as the forms without suffixes (with the thematic vowel a e.g. áđy‰ /rḥam-/ »love!«, and with the thematic vowel /e/ e.g.: åflÀÀq‹ @/zḇen-/ »buy!«). As a general rule, only the 2.m.pl. takes the base ףìñğl /kuṯb-/.

80 Lektion 10

The paradigm of the imperative with object suffixes is as follows:

P‛al 1.c.sg. 2.m.sg. 2.f.sg. Sg.m. tþëò× îđÀ qþëò× — — /kṯoḇ / /kṯoḇayny/ f. ×òqþëï n qþëò× — — /ḵtoḇ y/ /kṯoḇīn y/ Pl.m. qì þëò× ïãŁìğiñŁì× — — /kṯoḇ w/ /kuṯbūn y/ æŁì qþëò× čãŁìğiñŁì× — —

/kṯoḇūn / /kuṯbūnåny/ @ @ f. qşï þëò× čqïşä þëò× @ — — /kṯoḇ w/ /kṯoḇåny/ şq´ĆÀ þëò× @ čäîĆÀ qþëò× @ — — /kṯoḇȩ̄n/@ /kṯoḇȩ̄nåny/ @ @

P‛al 3.m.sg. 3.f.sg. 1.c.pl. 2.m.pl. Sg.m. tþëò× ïžôî čq þëò× fîĆÀ qþëò× ´đÀ qþëò× — /kṯoḇ / /kṯoḇåy hy / /kṯoḇȩ̄h/ /kṯoḇayn / f. ×òqþëï ïžôìn qþëò× fn qþëò× @ ³qþëò× @ — /ḵtoḇ y/ /kṯoḇīw hy / /kṯoḇīh / /kṯoḇīn / Pl.3.m. qì þëò× ïžôŁìğiñ ףì ğôŁìğiñŁì× @ æŁìğiñŁì× @ —@ /kṯoḇ w/ /kuṯbūhy/ /kuṯboh / /kuṯbūn / @ æŁì qþëò× ïžôîčãŁìğiñ ףì fčãŁìğiñ ףì åčãŁìğiñ ×Łì — /kṯoḇōn / /kuṯbunåy hy / /kuṯbunåh/ /kuṯbunån/ 3.f. şqì þëò× ïžôşî čq þëò× @ čqfşÀÀ þëò× @ čqåşÀÀ þëò× @ —@ /kṯoḇ w/ /kṯoḇåy hy / /kṯoḇåh/ /kṯoḇån/ @ ´ĆÀ qþëò× ïžôîčäşîĆÀ qþëò× @ fčäşîĆÀ qþëò× @ åčäşîĆÀ qþëò× @ — /kṯoḇȩ̄n/ /kṯoḇȩ̄nåy hy / /kṯoḇȩ̄nåh/ /kṯoḇȩ̄nån/

10. 7. The Infinitive with Object Suffixes

Infinitives can have nominal or verbal rection. As such, they can take possessive suffixes or object suffixes, according to syntax: e.g. ò‚flßđïq ğ /meḵtaḇ y/ »my writing«; but also: qđÀ ò‚½ /l-meḵtḇan y/ »to write to me/in order to write to me«.

Lesson 10 81

For the infinitive of the basic stem, the a-vowel of the second syllable is reduced to schwa when preceding a suffix, except for the 2.pl. The forms (of tđò×Č /kṯaḇ / are:

P‛al 1.c.sg. 2.m.sg. 2.f.sg. 3.m.sg. 3.f.sg. 1.c.pl. 2.m.pl. tđò‚flß đÀqò‚flß ƒčqò‚flß ï‚ĆÀqò‚flß óĆÀqò‚flß @ fčÀqò‚flß @ åđÀqò‚flß @ æþì‚q đò‚flß @ /meḵtaḇ / /meḵtḇan y/ /meḵtḇåḵ/ /meḵtḇȩ̄ḵy/ /meḵtḇȩ̄h/ /meḵtḇåh/ /meḵtḇan / /meḵtaḇḵōn /

The infinitives of derived stems take the ending /-ūṯ-/ (in place of /–ū/) when followed by a suffix. The syllable structure does not change. The forms of ʾAº‛el are as follows (the forms of the remaining stems are built analogously):

ʾAº‛el 1.c.sg. 2.m.sg. 2.f.sg. 3.m.sg. 3.f.sg. 1.c.pl. 2.m.pl. qŁì čò‚đß ïã đñŁì qčò‚đß „ČčñŁì qčò‚đß ïĆČñŁì qčò‚đß ôĆČñŁì qčò‚đß eČčñŁì qčò‚đß æđñŁì qčò‚đß æþìñŁì qčò‚đß /maḵtåḇū / /maḵtåḇūṯan y/ /maḵtåḇūṯåḵ/ /maḵtåḇūṯȩ̄ḵ y/ /maḵtåḇūṯȩ̄h/ /maḵtåḇūṯåh / /maḵtåḇūṯan / /maḵtåḇūṯḵōn/

10. 8. Vocabulary

A. blasphemy /guddåp̄å/ dČčÏ čğ…Łì ç assembly /knūštå/ cčò‘Łìä×ğ judge /dayyånå/ dčäčíđ… @ pain /ḥaššå/ dč’đy pain /kẹ̄ʾḇå/ dčqb× bosom /‛ubbå/ dčÀÀ ğiŁìÇ single, hermit /īḥīḏåyå/ dčí裆n¤ profit /yuṯrånå/ dčã‰ñŁìí prison /bȩ̄ṯ ’assīrȩ̄ / aĆˆnđa@òîĆi B. foolish /saḵlå/ hčÜ‚đ peace /šlåmå/ dčàčÜ‘ person, self /qnōmå/ dčß ìäÓþ festering /‛ubyånåyå/ dčîčäčîğiŁìÇ Verb Forms ʾEṯpa. to be apportioned /neṯpallaḡ/ ČéđÜđÀÀÏò flã : /ʾeṯpallaḡ/ ČéđÜđÀÀÏña ʾEṯpe. to be crucified /nezḏqep̄/ ČÑ ÓŁ…Œflã : /ʾezḏqep̄/ ČÑ ÓŁ…‹a Pe. to be baptized (a-a) /ne‛maḏ/ Ł† đà Èflã : /‛maḏ/ Ł† đàÇ ʾEṯpa. to be justified /nezdaddaq/ Öđ…ğ đ…ğ Œflã : /ʾezdaddaq/ Öđ…ğ đ…ğ ‹a Pe. to accompany /neqqap̄/ ČÑ đÔ flã : /nqep̄/ ČÑÔã Pe. to kill (a-o) /neqṭol/ Þþì İÔflã : /qṭal/ ÝđİÓ Pe. to kill by stoning (a-o) /nerḡom/ âþìČçŠflã : /rḡam/ áđÀÀČç ‰ ʾEṯpa. to provoke (→ 12. 3.) /neṯḥammaṯ/ òđàđyò flã : /’eṯḥammaṯ/ òđàđyña ʾEṯpa. to have mercy /neṯraḥḥam/ áđy‰ò flã : /ʾeṯraḥḥam/ áđy‰ña ʾAp̄. to hand over /našlem/ áÜ ’đã : /’ašlem/ áÜ ‘đa ʾEṯpe. to become separated /neṯpreš/ ”flŠÏòflã : / ʾeṯpreš/ ”flŠÏña Pe. to injure /nsaggep̄/ ČÑ flğè đŽã : /saggep̄/ ČÑ flğè đ ʾAp̄. to obtain /naḏreḵ/ „fl‰Ł† đã : /’aḏreḵ/ „fl‰Ł…đa

82 Lektion 10

ʾAp̄. to be aware of /narḡeš/ “flÀÀČç Šđã : /’arḡeš/ “flÀÀČç ‰đa

10. 9. Exercises

A. Translate the following: @ZæþìôÛ@ ČÑÔã@ dčîčäčîğiŁìÇ@ dčqbĆÀÀ×ë@ Zæþìãa@ „fl‰Ł…đa@ dčÀÀi‰@ dč’đy@ ZaƆôi@2 ïôşìôčqđa@ ìČ’flç‰đa@ åíĆ…@2 Ł†đ× 1 (MJ 6)Næþìôäflß@”flŠÏòflß@æþìôŁ†n¤… @÷þìÛìčÀÀÏğ… @óĆà’đÀği@ëča@NæþìØşîđÀÀÏđa@ÝđÇ@ČÑÓğ…‹a@÷ìčÛìčÀÀÏ@dč½@ëča@Ndčzn’ß@óÛ@ČéđÜđÀÀÏña@dč½ đ… 2 (1. Cor 1,13)Næþëñğ†đàÇ (Rm 5,1) @Ndčzn’ß@Êþì’m@æŠčàği@NdôčÛđa@ñìÛ@dčàčÜ‘@åđÛ@cĆìôflã@cČčñŁìäčàîôği@ÝîĆ‚ô @åÓ đ…ğ đ…‹aflğ…@Ýİßğ 3 @dŽãþìàÌĆôë@dŽÀÀØÜđß@â裆Ó@æþì‚čãŁìqŠđÔãë@aĆˆnđa@òîĆrÛë@cČčòč‘Łìä‚đÛ@æþì‚čãŁìàÜ’đãë@æþì‚čãŁìÏğ…Šflãë 4 (Lk 21,12) Nïàfl‘@Ýİflß @ÝđÇğ…@åí Ć…@dČčÏ2 đ…Łìğç@Ndč’čäşîđärđÛ@æŁìÔqğ đò’flã@NåşnÏğ č…ŁìËë@åşnôčİy@݁ğ…@æþì¨@dčãa@Šđßča@dčäô@Ýİßğ 5 (Mt 12,31)Ndč’čäşîđärđÛ @Õflqò’flã@hčÛ@dčyŁë‰ (Mk 9,31)NïžôîčãŁìÜİÔflãë Ndč’čãa@ð đ†şmbği@áÛò’flß@dč’čãağ…@ôĆŠq2 đ2 @… NæþìôÛ@Šđßaë 6 (AMS 438) Ndč’mğ†đÔÛ@ïôîčãŁìàğçŠflãğ… @Ł†đÔÏë@Zdčäčíđ…@òđàđyña@åíƆîô 7

B. Add vowels and translate the following: @dđîqđa@òîi… @cò’ñ@åß@NdčíŠđÀÀ׋@cìžô@ó… @†y@däô×Na装ŁìômŁ…@dØÜß ÷@ fl2…þëŠflô… @ô ßşìò îi@cìô 1 (Lk 1,5) N@ ÉđÀÀČj’nÛa@cìžô@ğó@æþëŠôađ… òô@ şäi@åß@ô ñòžãaë (Lk 16,24) N‰ŒÈčÜÛ@‰†‘ë@NïÜÇ @áy‰ ña @áôŠqđa@Nïia@Šßaë@d߉@fiÔi@aŠÓë 2 (BH, KdT 15)܀ìžô@fi؍@ôy…@â†ß@dã‰ñìí@Ýİß@óßìäÓ@ÑèŽß…@åğß…@ŠČßa@îŠÓìÏa 3

C. Write out the following until familiar:

(AMS 438) Ndč’mğ†đÔÛ@ïôîčãŁìàğçŠflãğ…@Ł†đÔÏë@Zdčäčíđ…@òđàđyña@åíƆîô 1 @ @ (MJ 4)NæþìôîđÜÇ@áđy‰ñaë@æþìôñŁìÈčÀÀği@ČÝflğjđÓ @ïžôìč»đˆqë@ôĆñŁìğjîđİği@ĆÀČç@ë2 ô8 2

(AMS 438) . 1 (MJ 4). 2

(AMS 438) . ܝܕ ܘ ܕ ܬܐ ܗ 1 ̄ (MJ 4) .ܢܘ ܪܬܐܘ ܢ ܘܗܬ ܝܗܘ ܗܬ ܘܗ 2

Lesson 11 11. 1. Weak Verbs: I-n Verbs

Verbs with three or (more rarely) four consonantal radicals which do not exhibit any changes (in the sense of assimilations or similar phenomena) in the different verb forms are known as strong verbs. By contrast, weak verbs are verbs which contain at least one variable radical. This inclues the semivowels /w/ and /y/, as well as /ʾ/, and also /n/ when it occupies the first position in the root. Traditionally, the mediae geminatae verbs with identical 2 nd and 3 rd radicals are also considered to be weak verbs (e.g. Œđi /baz/ »to plunder « √bzz ). I-n verbs (also known as primae Nun verbs) have a distinctive characteristic, namely, that the initial n, when non- vocalized , is assimilated to the consonant which follows it (with the exception of h) (→ 3. 1.). For example, the p‛al of ÕđÀÐã /np̄aq/ is: ÖþìÐflã /neppoq/ < * /nenpoq/ »to go out« (by contrast, there is no assimilation in Šôã /nhar/ : Šôäflã /nenhar/ »to be lit«). Analogous assimilations also occur in ʾAº‛el and ʾEtta º‛al, e.g. ÕflÏđa /ʾappeq/ < * /ʾanpeq/ »he brought out«, ÕđÀÀÏ đññağ /ʾettappaq/ < * /ʾettanpaq/ »he was driven out«.

For most I-n verbs, the imperative . P‛al is built without the 1 st radical, e.g. ÖþìÏ /poq/ »go out!« ÝÏ /pel/ »fall down!« sđ /saḇ/ »take!«.

All I-n verbs which are also III-y verbs build the imperative with the 1 st radical ., e.g. pûã /nṣī/ »argue!«.

84 Lesson 11

The following is the paradigm for I-n verbs, taking ÕđÀÀÐã /np̄aq/ »to go out«, ÝđÀÀÐã /np̄al/ »to fall down«, sđŽã /nsaḇ/ »to take« as examples: Imperfect: P‛al Sg.3.m. flãþìÐÖ flãÝflÐ sđŽ flã /neppoq/ /neppel / /nessaḇ/ 3.f. ÖþìÏñ ÝflÏñ sđñ /teppoq/ /teppel / /tessaḇ/ 2.m. ÖþìÏñ ÝflÏñ sđñ /teppoq/ /teppel / /tessaḇ/ 2.f. ³ ÏñÔ ³ÜÏñ ³rñ /tepqīn/ /teplīn / /tesḇīn / 1.c. ÖþìÏa ÝflÏa sđa /’eppoq/@ /’eppel /@ /’essaḇ/@ Pl.3.m. æŁì flãÐÔ æŁìÜÐ flã æŁìrŽ flã /nepqūn/ /neplūn/ /nesḇūn/ 3.f. flãÐčÔåşÀÀ åşÀÀčÜÐ flã åşÀÀčrŽ flã /nepqån/ /neplån/ /nesḇån/ 2.m. æŁì ÏñÔ æŁìÜÏñ æŁìrñ /tepqūn / /teplūn/ /nesḇūn/ 2.f. ÏñčÔåşÀÀ åşÀÀčÜÏñ åşÀÀčrñ /tepqån / /teplån/ /tesḇån/ 1.c. flãþìÐÖ flãÝflÐ sđŽ flã /neppoq /@ /neppel /@ /nessaḇ/@ Lesson 11 85

Perfect: Imperfect: ʾAp̄‛el ʾEtta º‛al ʾAp̄‛el ʾEtta º‛al Sg.3.m. flÏđaÕ đÀÀÏÕ đñña flÐđãÕ đÀÀÏÕ đñòflã /’appeq / /ʾettappaq / /nappeq / /nettappaq / 3.f. ÏđađÔò ÏđÔò đñña flÏđñÕ đÀÀÏÕ đññ /’apqaṯ/ /ʾettapqaṯ/ /tappeq / /tettappaq / 2.m. flÏđaÔò đÀÀÏÔò ññađ flÏđñÕ đÀÀÏÕ ññđ /’appeqt/ /ʾettappaqt / /tappeq / /tettappaq / 2.f. ðò flÏđaÔ ðò đÀÀÏÔ đñña ³ ÏđñÔ ³ ÏÔ ññđ /’appeqty/ /ʾettappaqty/ /tapqīn / /tettapqīn / 1.c. ÏđaÔò ÏÔò ññađ flÏđaÕ đÀÀÏÕ đñña /’appqeṯ/ /ʾettapqeṯ/ /’appeq /@ /’ettappaq / Pl.3.m. flÏđaÔì đÀÀÏÔì đñña æŁì ÐđãÔ æŁì ÏÔ đñòflã /’appeqw/@ /’ettappaq w/ /napqūn/ /nettapqūn/ 3.f. flÏđaÔşï đÀÀÏÔşï ññađ ÐđãčÔåşÀÀ ÏčÔåşÀÀ đñòflã y y /’appeq / /’ettappaq / /napqån/ /nettapqån/ 2.m. flÏđaÔòæþë æþëò đÀÀÏÔ ññađ æŁì ÏđñÔ æŁì ÏÔ đññ /’appeqtōn / /’ettappaqtōn / /tapqūn/ /tettapqūn/ 2.f. åíĆò flÏđaÔ åíĆò đÀÀÏÔ đñña ÏđñčÔåşÀÀ ÏčÔåşÀÀ ññđ /’appeqtȩ̄n / /’ettappaqtȩ̄n / /tapqån/ /tettapqån/ 1.c. flÏđaÔå đÀÀÏÔå đñña flÐđãÕ đÀÀÏÕ đñòflã /’appeqn/@ /’ettappaqn / /nappeq/@ /nettapaq/@ åđä flÏđaÔ åđä đÀÀÏÔ đñña /’appeqnan / /’ettappaqnan /@

Lektion 11 86

Imperative:

P‛al ʾAp̄‛el ʾEtta º‛al Sg.2.m. þìÏÖ ÝÏ sđ flÏđaÕ đÀÀÏÕ đñña /poq/ /pel / /saḇ/ /’appeq / /’ettappaq / 2.f. þìÏÓï ïÜÏ rđï flÏđaÔï đÀÀÏÔï đñña /poqy/@ /pel y/@ /saḇy/@ /’appeqy/@ /’ettappaq y/@ Pl.2.m. ÏþìÓì ìÜÏ ìrđ flÏđaÔì đÀÀÏÔì đñña /poqw/ /pel w/ /saḇw/ /’appeqw/ /’ettappaq w/ æŁì ÏþìÓ æŁìÜÏ æŁìrđ æŁì flÏđaÔ æŁì đÀÀÏÔ đñña /poqūn/ /pelūn/ /saḇūn/ /’appeqūn/ /’ettappaqūn/ 2.f. ÏþìÓşï şïÜÏ rđşï flÏđaÔşï đÀÀÏÔşï ññađ /poqy/ /pel y/ /saḇy/ /’appeqy/ /’ettappaq y/ ÏþìÓåşî åşîÜÏ åşî ĆÀrđ flÏđaÔåşî đÀÀÏÔåşî ññađ /poqȩ̄n/@ /pelȩ̄n/@ /saḇȩ̄n/@ /’appeqȩ̄n/@ /’ettappaqȩ̄n/@ Participles: P‛al ʾAp̄‛el ʾEtta º‛al Part. Act. m. čãflÀÐÕ čãÝflÀÐ sflŽčã flÐđßÕ đÀÀÏÕ đñòflß /nåp̄eq /@ /nåp̄el / /nåseḇ/ /mappeq/ /mettappaq / Part. Act. f. čãÀÐčÔd hčÜÀÐ čã dğÀčjŽčã ÐđßčÔd ÏčÔd đñòflß /nåp̄qå/@ /nåp̄lå/@ /nåsbå/@ /mapqå/@ /mettapqå/@ Part. Pass. m. nÐÕ ã ÝnÐ ã snŽã ÕđÀÀÐđß —@ /np̄īq/ /np̄īl/ /nsīḇ/ /mappaq/ @ Part. Pass. f. nÐčÔd ã hčÜnÐ ã dčrnŽã ÐđßčÔd —@ /np̄īqå/@ /np̄īlå/@ /nsīḇå/@ /mapqå/@ Infinitive: P‛al ʾAp̄‛el ʾEtta º‛al ÕđÀÀÐflß ÝđÀÀÐflß sđŽflß đßčÀÀÐÔŁì čÀÀÏÔŁì đñòflß /meppaq/@ /meppal /@ /messaḇ/@ /mappåqū/@ /mettappåqū/@

11. 2. I-ʾÅlap ̄ Verbs

The following rules apply to the paradigm for I-ʾÅlap̄ verbs: 1. In forms where a strong verb would take a schwa-vowel after the 1 st radical ., I-ʾÅlap̄ verbs take a full vowel. It is usually /e/, or more rarely /a/ (when preceding an /o/-vowel or an /i/-vowel), e.g. Pe. Pf. 3.m.sg. ÝđÀa /ʾeḵal / »he ate« (cf. Pe. Pf. 3.m.sg. tđò×Č /kṯaḇ /) Pe. Imp. m.sg. Þþìđa /ʾaḵol / »eat!« (cf. Pe. Imp. m.sg. ò×þët /kṯoḇ /) Pe. Imp. m.sg. Šđßa /ʾemar / »say!« (cf. Pe. Imp. m.sg. áđy‰ /rḥam /) Pe. Part. Pass. Ýnđa /ʾaḵīl / »eaten«; ßđa /ʾamīr / »said«

Lesson 11 87

ʾEṯpe. Pf. 3.m.sg. ÝflÀÀa Čña 28 /ʾeṯʾḵel / < */ʾeṯʾeḵel / »he was eaten« (cf. ʾEṯpe. Pf. 3.m.sg. tflò×ña2 /ʾeṯkṯeḇ /) ʾEṯpe. Impf. 3.m.sg. ÝflÀÀa òflãČ 29 /neṯʾḵel / < */neṯʾeḵel / »he will be eaten« (cf. ʾEṯpe. Pf. 3.m.sg. tflò×òflã2 /neṯkṯeḇ /) ʾEṯpe. Part. ÝflÀÀa òflßČ 30 /meṯʾḵel / < */meṯʾeḵel / »eaten« (cf. ʾEṯpe. Part. tflò×2 òflßČ /meṯkṯeḇ /), etc. 2. In verb forms of the verb stems (ʾEṯp ‛el, ʾEṯpa ‛‛ al), ʾÅlap̄ is sometimes assimilated to a preceding vowelless /t/, e.g. Ł†flyñña /ʾettḥeḏ / < */ʾeṯʾeḥeḏ / »he was taken/seized« (from Ł†đya /ʾeḥaḏ / »to take, to lay hold of«). 3. The stems ʾAº‛el and ʾEtta º‛al are built analogously to I-y verbs (= former I-w verbs). The forms in question take a / w/ in place of /ʾ/, and follow the strong conjugation: ʾAp̄. Pf. Ýfl×ëča /ʾåwkel / (WS /ʾawkel /); ʾEttap̄. ÝđÀÀ×ë čğ aññ /ʾettåwkal / (WS /ʾettawkal /). The impf. pe. must be singled out for particular attention, since here ES and WS differ significantly. ES always has an /e/ vocalization in the prefix, whereas WS has an /e/ for verbs with an /o/ thematic vowel (= transitive type), but an /i/ for verbs with an /a/ thematic vowel (intransitive type). These difference have an historical basis:

ES WS ÞþìbĆã /nȩ̄ʾḵol / (< */na ʾḵol/) /nȩ̄ʾḵul/ »he shall eat« ŠđßbĆã /nẹ̄ʾmar / (< */ni ʾmar /) /nī ʾmar / »he shall say«

Additionally, the inf. pe. is formed as follows:

ES WS ÝđÀÀbĆß /mȩ̄ʾḵal / /mȩ̄ʾḵal / »eating« ŠđßbĆß /mẹ̄ʾmar / /mīʾmar / »saying«

The impf. pe. 1.sg. – with the dropping of the 1st radical (also in the orthography!) – is Þþìa /ʾȩ̄ḵol / < */ʾeʾḵol / (WS /ʾȩ̄ḵul /) »I shall eat«; Šđßa /ʾẹ̄mar / < */ʾiʾmar / (WS /ʾīmar /) »I shall say«. The corresponding form in the otherwise regular stem Pa ‛‛ el stem is Ýfl×đa /ʾakkel / (instead of: */ʾ eʾakkel /). It is important to note that . the verbs acČčñ /ʾeṯå/ »to come«, aÞ‹ /ʾezal / »to go« and đaČÑÛ /ʾallep̄/ »to teach« (Pa.) take irregular forms (→ 14. 2.).

28 WS /ʾeṯeʾḵel /. 29 WS /neṯeʾḵel /. 30 WS /meṯeʾḵel /.

Lektion 11 88

The paradigm for I-ʾÅlap̄ verbs is as follows, taking ÝđÀa /ʾeḵal / »to eat« and Šđßa /ʾemar / »to say« (without regular forms) as examples: Perfect: P‛al Pa‛‛el ʾEṯp‛el ʾEṯpa‛‛al Sg.3.m. ÝđÀa Šđßa fl×đaÝ ÝflÀa ñaČ ÝđÀÀ×đaña /ʾeḵal / /ʾemar/@ /ʾakkel/ /ʾeṯʾḵel /@ /ʾeṯʾakkal / 3.f. ađÜò ßaŠñ ×đađÜò đÜò đaña ×đađÜò ña /ʾeḵlaṯ/ /ʾemraṯ/ /ʾaklaṯ/ /ʾeṯʾaḵlaṯ/ /ʾeṯʾaklaṯ/ 2.m. đÀaÜò ñ Šđßa fl×đaÜò Üò flÀaña Üò đÀÀ×đaña /ʾeḵalt / /ʾemart / /ʾakkelt / /ʾeṯʾḵelt / /ʾeṯʾakkalt / 2.f. ðò đÀaÜ ðñ Šđßa ðò fl×đaÜ ðò ÜflÀaña ðò ÜđÀÀ×đaña /ʾeḵalt y/ /ʾemart y/ /ʾakkelt y/ /ʾeṯʾḵelt y/ /ʾeṯʾakkalt y/ 1.c. aÜò ßaflŠñ ×đaÜò Üò đađČña Üò ×đaña /ʾeḵleṯ/ /ʾemreṯ/@ /ʾakleṯ/@ /ʾeṯʾaḵleṯ/ /ʾeṯʾakleṯ/ Pl.3.m. ìÜđÀa ëŠđßa fl×đaÜì Üì flÀaña @ Üì đÀÀ×đaña /ʾeḵal w/ /ʾemarw/@ /ʾakkel w/ /ʾeṯʾḵelw/@ /ʾeṯʾakkal w/@ æŁì ÜđÀa æŁë Šđßa æŁì fl×đaÜ æŁì ÜflÀaña æŁì ÜđÀÀ×đaña /ʾeḵalūn / /ʾemarūn/@ /ʾakkelūn / /ʾeṯʾḵelūn/ /ʾeṯʾakkalūn / 3.f. åşî ÜđÀa 31 åíĆˆđßa 32 fl×đaÜåşî 33 @ Üåşî flÀaña 34 Üåşî đÀÀ×đaña 35 /ʾeḵalȩ̄n /@ /ʾemarȩ̄n /@ /ʾakkelȩ̄n /@ /ʾeṯʾḵelȩ̄n /@ /ʾeṯʾakkalȩ̄n /@ 2.m. æþëò ÜđÀa æþëñŠđßa æþëò fl×đaÜ @ æþëò ÜflÀaña æþëò ÜđÀÀ×đaña /ʾeḵaltōn / /ʾemartōn /@ /ʾakkeltōn /@ /ʾeṯʾḵeltōn / /ʾeṯʾakkaltōn / 2.f. åíĆò ÜđÀa åíĆñŠđßa åíĆò fl×đaÜ @ åíĆò ÜflÀaña åíĆò ÜđÀÀ×đaña /ʾeḵaltȩ̄n / /ʾemartȩ̄n /@ /ʾakkeltȩ̄n /@ /ʾeṯʾḵeltȩ̄n / /ʾeṯʾakkaltȩ̄n / 1.c. åÜđÀa æŠđßa fl×đaÜå @ Üå flÀaña Üå đÀÀ×đaña /ʾeḵaln/@ /ʾemarn /@ /ʾakkeln/@ /ʾeṯʾḵeln/@ /ʾeṯʾakkaln / åčä ÜđÀa åđã Šđßa fl×đaÜåđä @ Üåđä flÀaña Üåđä đÀÀ×đaña /ʾeḵalnan /@ /ʾemarnan / /ʾakkelnan /@ /ʾeṯʾḵelnan / /ʾeṯʾakkalnan /@

31 y In WS /ʾeḵal / is also attested. 32 y In WS /ʾemar / is also attested. 33 y In WS /ʾakkel / is also attested. 34 y In WS /ʾeṯȩ̄ʾḵel / is also attested. 35 y In WS /ʾeṯa ʾkkal / is also attested.

Lesson 11 89

Imperfect: P‛al Pa‛‛el ʾEṯp‛el ʾEṯpa‛‛al Sg.3.m. Þþìb Ćã Šđßb Ćã Ýfl×b đã ÝflÀaòflã ÝđÀÀ×đaòflã /nȩ̄ʾḵol / /nẹ̄ʾmar / /na ʾkkel / /neṯʾḵel / /neṯʾakkal/@ 3.f. Þþìa ñ Šđßañ Ýfl×a đñ ÝflÀaññ ÝđÀÀ×đañ ñ /tȩ̄ʾḵol / /tẹ̄ʾmar / /taʾkkel / /teṯʾḵel / /teṯʾakkal/ 2.m. Þþìa ñ Šđßañ Ýfl×a đñ ÝflÀaññ ÝđÀÀ×đañ ñ /tȩ̄ʾḵol / /tẹ̄ʾmar / /taʾkkel / /teṯʾḵel / /teṯʾakkal / 2.f. ³Üa ñ åm Šßañ ³Ü×a đñ ܳ ×đaññ ܳ ×đañ ñ /tȩ̄ʾḵlīn / /tẹ̄ʾmrīn / /taʾkklīn/ /teṯʾaḵlīn / /neṯʾaklīn / 1.c. Þþìa Šđßa Ýfl×đa ÝflÀaña ÝđÀÀ×đañ a /’ȩ̄ḵol / @ /’ẹmar /@ /’akkel /@ /’eṯʾḵel /@ /’eṯʾakkal / Pl.3.m. æŁì܁b Ćã æþëŠßbĆã @ æŁìÜ×b đã æŁì Ü×đaòflã æŁì Ü×đaòflã /nȩ̄ʾḵlūn/ /nẹ̄ʾmrūn/ /na ʾklūn/ /neṯʾaḵlūn/ /neṯʾaklūn/ 3.f. åčÜÀşb Ćã æˆßbč Ćã şåÀčÜÀ×b đã čÜåşÀÀ ×đaòflã čÜåşÀÀ ×đaòflã /nȩ̄ʾḵlån/ /nẹ̄ʾmrån/ /na ʾklån/ /neṯʾaḵlån/ /neṯʾaklån/ 2.m. æŁì܁a ñ æþëŠßañ æŁìÜ×a đñ æŁì Ü×đaññ æŁì Ü×đaññ /tȩ̄ʾḵlūn/ /tẹ̄ʾmrūn / /taʾklūn/ /teṯʾaḵlūn/ /teṯʾaklūn/ 2.f. åčÜÀşa ñ æčˆßañ şåÀčÜÀ×a đñ čÜåşÀÀ ×đaññ čÜåşÀÀ ×đaññ /nȩ̄ʾḵlån/ /tẹ̄ʾmrån/ /taʾklån/ /teṯʾaḵlån/ /teṯʾaklån/ 1.c. Þþìb Ćã @ Šđßb Ćã Ýfl×b đã ÝflÀaòflã ÝđÀÀ×đaòflã /nȩ̄ʾḵol /@ /nẹ̄ʾmar /@ /na ʾkkel/@ /neṯʾḵel /@ /neṯʾakkal/@

Imperative: P‛al Pa‛‛el ʾEṯp‛el ʾEṯpa‛‛al Sg.2.m. Þþìđa Šđßa Ýfl×đa Ý×đaña ÝđÀÀ×đaña /’aḵol / /’emar / /’akkel / /ʾeṯʾaḵl/ /’eṯʾakkal/@ 2.f. ïÛþìđa ðŠđßa ïÜfl×đa Üï ×đaña Üï đÀÀ×đaña /’aḵol y/@ /’emar y/@ /’akkel y/@ /ʾeṯʾaḵly/@ /’eṯʾakkaly/@ Pl.2.m. ìÛþìđa ëŠđßa ìÜfl×đa Üì ×đaña Üì đÀÀ×đaña /’aḵol w/ /’emar w/ /’akkel w/ /ʾeṯʾaḵlw/ /’eṯʾakkalw/ 2.f. åşîÛþìđa åşíĆˆđß a åşîÜfl×đa Üåşî ×đaña Üåşî đÀÀ×đaña /’aḵolȩ̄n /@ /’emarȩ̄n /@ /’akkelȩ̄n /@ /ʾeṯʾaḵlȩ̄n /@ /’eṯʾaklȩ̄n /@

Lektion 11 90

Participles:

P‛al Pa‛‛el ʾEṯp‛el ʾEṯpa‛‛al Part. Act. m. ÝflÀÀča Šđßča ÝflÀÀ×đbß ÝflÀaòflflß ÝđÀÀ×đaòflß @ /’åḵel / /’åmar / /mʾakkel / /meṯʾḵel / /meṯʾakkal/ Part. Act. f. hč܁ča aŠßča hčÜ×đbß čÜh đaòflflß čÜh ×đaòflß @ /’åḵlå/@ /’åmrå/@ /mʾaklå/@ /meṯʾaḵlå/@ /meṯʾaklå/@ Part. Pass. m. Ýnđa ßđa ÝđÀÀ×đbß — — /’aḵīl/ /’amīr / /mʾakkal/ Part. Pass. f. hčÜnđa aßđa hčÜđÀÀ×đbß —@ —@ /’aḵīlå/@ /’amīrå /@ /mʾakalå/@

Infinitive: P‛al Pa‛‛el ʾEṯp‛el ʾEṯpa‛‛al ÝđÀÀbĆß ŠđßbĆß ŁìÜ čÀÀ× bđß ÜŁì čaòflflß ÜŁì čÀÀ×đaòflß /mȩ̄ʾḵal/@ /mẹ̄ʾmar /@ /maʾkkålū/@ /meṯʾḵålū/@ /meṯʾakkålū/@

11. 3. I-y Verbs

This group also includes verbs which originally had /w/ as their 1 st radical (generally speaking, in North-West Semitic languages, /w/ at the onset of a word has come to be replaced by /y/). The most important characteristic of this group of verbs is that initial /y/ appears as /ī/ . Examples: Êđ†m2 /īḏa‛/ [not yiḏa‛] »he knew« (Pf. Pe.), ñŁ†Üm /īlet / (* /īlett / < * /īleḏt /) [not yilet ] »he begot« (Pf. Pe.), Ł†Ümña /ʾeṯīleḏ / < */ʾeṯy eleḏ / »he was born« ( Pf. ʾEṯpe.) but òÇ đ†flí2 /yeḏa‛ṯ/ »she knew« (Pf. Pe.) and ³ÇŁ†čí /yåḏ‛īn / »knowing« (Part. Act. Pe. St. abs. pl. m.) tflòmČ /īṯeḇ / »he sat« [not yiṯeḇ ] (Pf. Pe.) etc.

The formation of the impf. and inf. pe. of almost all verbs in this group corresponds to that of the I-ʾÅlap̄ group, e.g. Impf. ES ČÒ‹bĆã /nẹ̄ʾzap̄/ (WS /nī ʾzap̄/) »he shall borrow«, Inf. ES ČÒ‹bĆß /mẹ̄ʾzap̄/ (WS /mī ʾzap̄/). Exceptions are Êđ†m2 /īḏa‛/ »to know« and tflòmČ /īṯeḇ / »to sit«. Instead, their formation corresponds to that of the I- n group: Impf. Êđ†flãğ /nedda‛/ »he shall know«; tflòflã /netteḇ/ »he shall sit« Inf. Ê@ đ†flßğ /medda‛/ »knowledge «; tđòflßğ /mettaḇ/ »sitting« The inf. of the irregular verb sžôđí /ya hḇ/ [read: yaḇ] »to give« ( → 14. 2.) is also formed in this way: sôflß /mehhaḇ/ »giving«.

Lesson 11 91

The formation of the imp. pe. Corresponds to that of the pf., e.g. ČÒŒm /īzap̄/ »borrow!« (m.). Only the following verbs build the imp. without the 1 st radical .: Êđ†m2 /īḏa‛/ »to know« (Pf.) : đ…Ê /da‛/ »know!« (Imp.) tflòmČ /īṯeḇ / »to sit« (Pf.) : tñ /teḇ/ »sit!« (Imp.) sžôđí /ya hḇ/ »to give« (Pf.) : sô /haḇ/ »give!« (Imp.) The ʾAp̄‛el-forms are the same as if they were built on the base I-w: Pf. ʾAp̄. Ł†Ûëča /ʾåwleḏ / (WS /ʾawleḏ /) »he begot« Impf. ʾAp̄. Ł†Ûìčã /nåwleḏ / »he shall beget« Imp. ʾAp̄. Ł†Ûëča /ʾåwleḏ / »beget!« Inf. ʾAp̄. Ł†Łë čÛìčß /måwlåḏū / »to beget« Part. Act. Ł† Ûìčß /måwleḏ / »begetting«. Exceptions are the ʾAp̄‛el-forms of Õfläíđa /ʾayneq / »to suckle« and ÝÜíđa /ʾaylel / »to wail« (built in the same way as I-y). The I-y verb paradigm is as follows, taking Ł†Üm /īleḏ / »to beget« and Êđ†m2 /īḏa‛/ »to know« as examples: Perfect: P‛al ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el ʾEtta º‛al Sg.3.m. Ł†Ü m Êđ†mŁ †ÛëŁ ča †ÜŁ mña đÛ룆 čñña /īleḏ/@ /īḏa‛/ /ʾåwleḏ/ /ʾeṯīleḏ/ /ʾettåwlaḏ / 3.f. ñ đ†Üflíğ đÇò Ł flí† ñ đŁ čaëÛ† ñ đ†Üđíñağ ñ đŁ Ûë† čñña /yeldaṯ/@ /yeḏ‛aṯ/ /ʾåwlḏaṯ/ /ʾeṯyaldaṯ/ /ʾettåwlḏaṯ/ 2.m. ñŁ†Ü m Çò †mđŁ ñ Ł†Ûë ča Ł†Üñ mña đÛ룆ñ čñña /īlet /@ /īḏa‛t/ /ʾåwlet / /ʾeṯīlet/ /ʾettåwlat / 2.f. ðñŁ†Ü m ðò Çđ†mŁ ðñ Ł†Ûë ča ðñ Ł†Ü mña @ đÛ룆ðñ čñña /īlet y/@ /īḏa‛ty/ /ʾåwlet y/ /ʾeṯīlety/ /ʾettåwlat y/ 1.c. ñflğ†Üflí flÇò Ł flí† ñ †fl2 Ûëča flğ†ñ Üđíña @ ñ fl2 Ûë† ññač /yeldeṯ/ /yeḏ‛eṯ/@ /ʾåwlḏeṯ/@ /ʾeṯyaldeṯ/ /ʾettåwlḏeṯ/ Pl.3.m. ëŁ†Ü m Çì đ†mŁ 룆Ûë ča Ł†Üë mña đÛ룆ë čñña /īleḏ w/@ /īḏa‛w/ /ʾåwleḏ w / /ʾeṯīleḏ w/ /ʾettåwlaḏ w/ 3.f. şðŁ†Ü m Çşï đ†mŁ şð Ł†Ûë ča Ł†Üşð mña đÛ룆şð čñña /īleḏ y/@ /īḏa‛y/@ /ʾåwleḏ y/ /ʾeṯīleḏ y/ /ʾettåwlaḏ y/ 2.m. æþëñŁ†Ü m æþëò ÇđŁ†m æþëñ Ł†Ûë ča æþëñ Ł†Ü mña æþëñ đÛ룆 čñña /īlettōn /@ /īḏa‛tōn /@ /ʾåwleḏtōn / /ʾeṯīlettōn / /ʾettåwlattōn / 2.f. åíĆñŁ†Ü m åíĆò Çđ†mŁ åíĆñ Ł†Ûë ča åíĆñ Ł†Ü mña åíĆñ đÛ룆 čñña /īlettȩ̄n /@ /īḏa‛tȩ̄n / /ʾåwleḏtȩ̄n / /ʾeṯīlettȩ̄n / /ʾettåwlattȩ̄n / 1.c. æŁ†Ü m Çå đ†mŁ æŁ†Ûë ča Ł†Üæ mña đÛ룆æ čñña /īleḏn/@ /īḏa‛n/@ /ʾåwleḏn@/ /ʾeṯīleḏn/ /ʾettåwlaḏn/ åđãŁ†Ü m åđä džmđŁ åđã Ł†Ûë ča Ł†Üåđã mña đÛ룆åđã ññač /īleḏnan /@ /īḏa‛nan / /ʾåwleḏnan / /ʾeṯīleḏnan / /ʾettåwlaḏnan /@

Lektion 11 92

Imperfect:

P‛al ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el ʾEtta º‛al Sg.3.m. ĆãŁ†đÛb Êđğ flㆠŁ†Ûì čã Ł†Ü mòflã đÛ룆 čñòflã /nẹ̄laḏ / /nedda‛/ /nåwleḏ / /neṯīleḏ / /nettåwlaḏ / 3.f. ñŁ†đÛa Êđğ ñ… †ÛëŁ čñ Ł†Ü mññ đÛ룆 čññ /tẹ̄laḏ / /tedda‛/ /tåwleḏ / /teṯīleḏ / /tettåwlaḏ /@ 2.m. ñŁ†đÛa Êđğ ñ… Ł† Ûëčñ Ł†Ü mññ đÛ룆 ññč /tẹ̄laḏ / /tedda‛/ /tåwleḏ / /teṯīleḏ / /tettåwlaḏ / 2.f. åmğ†Ûa ñ ³Çğ ñ… Ł†åm Ûëčñ ğ†åm Üđíññ Û룆åm čññ /tẹ̄ldīn / /tedd‛īn / /tåwlḏīn / /teṯyaldīn/ /tettåwlḏīn / 1.c. Ł†đÛa Êđğ a… Ł†Ûë ča Ł†Ü mña đÛ룆 čñña /ʾẹ̄laḏ /@ /ʾedda‛/@ /ʾåwleḏ /@ /ʾeṯīleḏ /@ /ʾettåwlaḏ/ Pl.3.m. æŁë ğ Ćã†Ûb æŁì Çğ flㆠŁ†æŁë Ûìčã ğ†æŁë Üđíşòflã Û룆æŁë čñòflã /nẹ̄ldūn/ /nedd‛ūn/ /nåwlḏūn/ /neṯyaldūn/ /nettåwlḏūn/ 3.f. æčğ†ÀÛb Ćã čÇåşÀÀ ğ flã† čŁ†æ Ûşìčã @ æ†čğ ÀÜđíşòflã Ûşë裆æ čñòflã /nẹ̄ldån/ /nedd‛ån/ /nåwlḏån/ /neṯyaldån/ /nettåwlḏån/ 2.m. æŁë ğ ñ†Ûa æŁì Çğ flñ… Ł†æŁë Ûëčñ ğ†æŁë Üđíññ Û룆æŁë ññč /tẹ̄ldūn/ /tedd‛ūn / /tåwlḏūn/ /teṯyaldūn/ /tettåwlḏūn /@ 2.f. æčğ†ÀÛa ñ čÇåşÀÀ ğ ñ… 裆æ Ûşëčñ æ†čğ ÀÜđíşññ Ûşë裆æ ññč /tẹ̄ldån/ /tedd‛ån/ /tåwlḏån/ /teṯyaldån/ /tettåwlḏån/ 1.c. ĆãŁ†đÛb Êđğ flㆠŁ† Ûìčã @ Ł†Ü mòflã đÛ룆 ñòflãč /nẹ̄laḏ /@ /nedda‛/@ /nåwleḏ /@ /neṯīleḏ /@ /nettåwlaḏ/@

Imperative: P‛al ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el ʾEtta º‛al Sg.2.m. đÜmŁ† Ê…đ Ł† Ûëča ğ† Üđíña đÛ룆 čñña /īlaḏ / /da‛/ /ʾåwleḏ / /ʾeṯyald / /ʾettåwlaḏ/ 2.f. đÜmŁ†ð Çï …đ Ł†ð Ûëča ğ†ð Üđíña đÛ룆ð ññač /īlaḏ y/@ /da‛ y/@ /ʾåwleḏ y/@ /ʾeṯyald y/@ /ʾettåwlaḏ y/@ Pl.2.m. đÜmŁ†ë Çì …đ Ł†ë Ûëča ğ†ë Üđíña đÛ룆ë čñña /īlaḏ w/ /da‛ w/ /ʾåwleḏ w/ /ʾeṯyald w/ /ʾettåwlaḏ w/ 2.f. åşí ĆŁ†đÜm ĆÇåşî đ… åşí ƆÛëčaŁ Ćğ†åşí Üđíña åşí ƆđÛëŁ čñña /īlaḏȩ̄n /@ /da‛ȩ̄n /@ /ʾåwleḏȩ̄n /@ /ʾeṯyaldȩ̄n /@ /ʾettåwlaḏȩ̄n /

Lesson 11 93

Participles: P‛al ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el ʾEtta º‛al Part. Act. m. ÜčíŁ† ÊđŁ čí† Ł† Ûìčß †Ł Ümòflß đÛ룆 čñòflß /yåleḏ / /yåḏa‛ / /måwleḏ / /meṯīleḏ / mettåwlaḏ Part. Act. f. ač†ÀÜčíğ čÇd Ł čí† čŁ†a Ûìčß †ačŁ Ümòflß Ûë裆a ñòflßč /yåldå/@ /yåḏ‛å/@ /måwlḏå/@ /meṯīlḏå/@ /mettåwlḏå/@ Part. Pass. m. Ł†nÜm ÉmŁ†m Ł† đÛìčß — — /īlīḏ / /īḏī ‛/ /måwlaḏ / Part. Pass. f. a裆nÜm bčÈmŁ†m 裆a Ûìčß — — /īlīḏå/@ /īḏī ‛å/@ /måwlḏå/@ @ @

Infinitive: P‛al Pa‛‛el ʾEṯp‛el ʾEṯpa‛‛al ÝđÀÀbĆß ŠđßbĆß ŁìÜ čÀÀ× bđß ÜŁì čaòflflß ÜŁì čÀÀ×đaòflß /mȩ̄ʾḵal/@ /mẹ̄ʾmar /@ /maʾkkålū/@ /meṯʾḵålū/@ /meṯʾakkålū/@

11. 4. The Tense System: Perfect, Active Participle, Imperfect

In terms of function, the Syriac verb system combines a (relative) tense system with an aspect system . In terms of tense, Syriac differentiates between posteriority (generally a state or condition in the past) : contemporaneity (generally a state or condition in the present) : anteriority (generally a state or condition in the future). In terms of aspect, Syriac distinguishes according to the opposition »perfective« (viewing a state or condition as a whole from without): imperfective (viewing a state or condition from within; an ongoing state or condition). Tense always stands in the foreground. In order to differentiate between tenses and aspects, Syriac makes use of three central morphological categories: the perfect, the imperfect and the active participle. Their use can be summarised as follows:

The Perfect : • The perfect is used to denote anterior and, in most cases, perfective events in both main and subordinate clauses. As such, it is the most common tense for accounts of simple past events, as well as for narration, .e.g. @åČß@ÝflÈÛ đŁ…@dşÀčîđß@ òîĆÀqë@dčÈnÓ‰ @ åČß@òy ČđòÛ đŁ @… dşÀÀčîđß @ òîĆği@ ”ŠÏë@ dčÈnÓ‰@ dôčÛđa@ Ł†đÀrÇë NdčÈnÓ‰ /wa-ʽḇaḏ ʾalåhå rqī ʽå wa- p̄raš bȩ̄ṯ mayyå ḏa-l-taḥṯ men rqī ʽå w-ḇȩ̄ṯ mayyå ḏa-l-ʽel men rqī ʽå/ » And God made the firmament, and divided the waters which were under the firmament from the waters which were above the firmament« (Gn 1,7). For verbs pertaining to thought or feeling, the perfect denotes ongoing states, and as such should be translated in the present. Examples: ò»fl‰ /reḥmeṯ/ »I love« (< »I have taken pleasure«) åÇ đ†mğ /īda‛n/ »we know« (< »we have realised«).

Lektion 11 94

• The perfect is also used in unreal (hypothetical) or optative conditional clauses, e.g. å‚đÀÀÐô@åíĆğ…@ŠđÀr×@æŠđyë đò‘a@hčÛ@ŁìÛa /ʾellū lå ʾeštåwḥarn kḇar dȩ̄n hp̄aḵn / »if we had not delayed, we should already have returned« (Gn 43,10) dČčÏbĆ×@åđÛ@ÝflğèđÇ@åíĆğ…@åđß /man dȩ̄n ‛aggel lan kẹ̄ʾp̄å / »O, that one would roll away the stone!« (Mk 16,3). • In the apodosis of temporal or conditional clauses, the perfect relates to the future, e.g. Þþìî’đÛ @æþìôÛ@ƒđÀÀÐô@ìàčÓŁ…@dčß /må ḏ-qåm w hp̄aḵ-lhōn la-šyōl / »as soon as you have arisen, you will return to sh’eol«. • The perfect of cìô /hwå / »to be« also has special functions. It is used to form various compound tenses (see below). Its absolute usage should be translated in the present, e.g. dčßþìÜč @cìžô@hčÛ dôčÛđa /’alåhå lå-hwå ṭålōmå/ »God is not unjust«. The 2nd person forms can also function as a jussive, e.g. @ ánÜy@òíìô /hwayt ḥlīm / »be well!« Ł†flÀrčÇ@òíìô dčäđÀÀØô /håḵannå hwayt ‛åḇeḏ / »do thou likewise!« (Lk 10,37).

The Active Participle : The following (marginal) functions should also be noted: • For verbs pertaining to thought or feeling, the participle, like the perfect, denotes ongoing states, and as such should be translated in the present. (see above). Examples: dčãa@Ê đ†čí2 /yåḏa‛-ʾnå / »I know (Pres. Part.)« ïqhčÛ@dčãa@Ê đ†čí@dčãaĆë@ïqča@oÛ@Ê2 đ†číŁ…@dčäđÀÀØíđa2 /ʾaykannå ḏ-yåḏa-‛lī ʾåḇy w-ʾenå yåḏa‛-ʾnå l-ʾåḇy/ »even as the Father knows me, and I know the Father« (Jn 10,15) oÛ@áfly‰@ïqča /ʾåḇy råḥem-lī/ »the Father loves me« (Jn 10,17). The active participle denotes contemporaneous, and often also imperfective, events. As such, it is primarily used to denote the actual present, but can also be used to express the general present. Examples: óĆäčî×@åČß@ÝflÀča@aŠŽflği@ĆÀÀČç@dčí‰đa /ʾaryå ḡȩ̄r besrå ʾåḵel men kyånȩ̄h/ »the lion eats meat by its nature«.

The following further functions must also be noted: • The participle is also used to express imminent future events. Examples: dčãa@Ł†flÀr čÇ ğ…@âflğ† flß /meddem d-‛åḇeḏ-ʾnå / »that which I am about to do« oÛ@æþëòžãđa@³àˉ @æþìôäflß @a裆črÇ@dčäíđa@Ýİ flß /meṭṭol ʾaynå ‛ḇåḏå mennhōn råḡmīn-ʾanttōnlī / »for which of those works do you stone me?« (Jn 10,32) óĆàđÇ@åđämòîčß@åđäy@ČÒča /ʾåp̄ ḥnan måytīn-an ‛ammȩ̄h/ »that we may die with him« (Jn 11,16) dčãa@|đÀÀğjđ’ß@tŁë ñë@ò flzğjđ‘@dşÀÀčîđ@åČß@Éđßò‘a@hčÜčÓë /w-qålå ʾeštma‛ men šmayyå šabbḥeṯ w-ṯuḇ mšabbaḥ-ʾnå / »Then there came a voice out of the sky, saying, "I have both glorified it, and will glorify it again« (Jn 12,28) • When used to introduce speech, the active participle of . √ʾmr »to say« should be translated in the simple past, e.g. Šđßča /ʾåmar / »he said«, e.g.

Lesson 11 95

åmŠßaë@ìčäÇ /‛nåw wå-ʾmrīn / »they answered (Pf.) and said (Part. Act.)«. • The participle is frequently used in adverbial clauses in the past, usually following the conjunction Ł†đ× /kaḏ / »as«, e.g. åíĆñča@Ł†đÀ×@dĆíč‡û½@ëŒyČ /ḥzåw l-meṣråyȩ̄ ḵaḏ ʾåṯȩ̄n/ »and behold, the Egyptians were marching« (Ex 14,10) Êþì’m@æþìãa@Ł†ÔđÀÀÏ ܆a‰Łì@åČß@åmòzčã@Ł†đÀ× ë /w-ḵaḏ nåḥtīn men ṭūrå paqqeḏ-ʾennon Īšō‛/ »And as they descended from the mountain, Jesus charged them« (Mt 17,9)

The Imperfect The imperfect is only rarely used in main clauses. It is used to express anteriority or modal verbs such as should, must, can etc. Examples:

dčäčÀÀÏìč@tŁëñ@cĆìôflã@hčÛ /lå nehwȩ̄ ṯuḇ ṭåwpånå/ »there will never again be a flood« (Gn 9,11) dčî‚fli@cĆìôflã@åčßđñ /tammån nehwȩ̄ beḵyå/ »In that place there will be weeping« (Mt 22,13) ònßñ@şïđäği@åíƉòđÛ /la-ṯrȩ̄n bnay tmīṯ/ »Thou shalt slay my two sons« (Gn 42,37).

• The imperfect is frequently used in subordinate clauses (relative clauses) to express finality or consecutiveness. Examples: ÝÜ𸠅đ2 @pŠđ‘ /šarrī ḏa-nmallel / »he began to speak« (Mk 12,1) ïžôîčãŁìÜİÔflãğ…@æþìôÛ@Ł†đÔÏ /pqaḏ-lhōn d-neqṭlūnåy hy / »he ordered them to kill him« • You will also sometimes encounter corresponding constructions without relative pronouns, e.g. @Õ flÏđa ñŁì¸@„Šği /ʾappeq bråḵ nmūṯ / »bring out thy son, that he may die«. • The imperfect is also used in temporal clauses which are introduced with ğ…@âčŁ†Ó /qḏåm d-/ or hčÛŁ†đÇ /‛aḏ- lå /, »before«. In such cases, the imperfect should be translated either in the present or the past, depending on context, e.g.: hčÜÌč㉠ñđČ @aĆŠÔflãğ…@âčŁ†Ó /qḏåm d-neqrȩ̄ ṯarnåḡlå / »before the rooster crows« (Mt 26,34).

In the case of the modal verb must , the periphrase construction in Syriac oÛ@hÛë /wålȩ̄-lī/ + Inf. »I should/I ought to« iis often used, e.g.æþìãa@Łìí čòîđ½ğ @ oÛ@hÛë /wålȩ̄-lī l-maytåyū ʾennōn / »I must bring them« (Jn 10,16). The Syriac Łìí čòîđ½ğ contains an infinitive form of cČčña /ʾeṯå/ »to come« ( → 14. 2.). hčÛ /lå / + 2nd person imperfect is used to negate imperatives (→ 8. 2.), e.g. Öþëò‘ ñ@hčÛflČ /lå ṯeštōq/ »Donʾt be silent!«.

11. 5. The Passive Participle

The passive participle generally has a resultative -passive meaning when used as a predicate in a nominal clause, e.g. Ł†nrÇ /‛ḇīḏ / »done« smò× /kṯīḇ / »written«.

Lektion 11 96

The passive participle has a verbal function in the special construction oÛ @Ł†nrÇ /‛ḇīḏ-lī/ »I have done«. In this case, it is used like the perfect, examples: åđÛ@Énđ…@dčäđÀÀØíđa2 /ʾaykannå ḏa-šmī ‛-lan / »as we have heard« dŽÀČiČčò×@ƒčÛ@åíĆŠÓ /qrȩ̄n-låḵ kṯåḇȩ̄/ »have you read the books?« For some verbs, the perfective participle has an active, and sometimes also a transitive meaning, e.g. ÝnÔ‘ /šqīl / »taking« “nrÛ /lḇīš / »wearing (clothes)« dĆäÓ /qnȩ̄/ »owing«. Such participles are used in the same way as the active participle, e.g. dčljbđÛ @dÔmğ…‹@fčÛ@³ÜnÔ‘ /šqīlīn-låh zaddīqȩ̄ l-ʾar‛å/ »the righteous bear the earth«.

11. 6. Composite Constructions with /hwå/

Syria uses the verb of being cìô /hwå / »to be, to happen« – (→ 7. 3.) mostly in the enclitic perfect form žôcì /hwå / – in combination with the perfect, participle or imperfect of another verb to construct a range of composite tense structures. Of the three constructions considered here, t@žôcì đò×Č /kṯaḇ-hwå / and, in particular, žôcì @tflòč×Č /kåṯeḇ- hwå / are common, whereas cì žô@tþëò‚flã /neḵtoḇ-hwå / is rare. Perfec t + cìžô /hwå / • The construction t@žôcì đò×Č /kṯaḇ-hwå / (Perfect + žôcì /hwå /) has the same function as the simple perfect. It is used as a stylistic variant, and is often used at the beginning of narrative blocks. It is only very rarely to be translated with the pluperfect, e.g. cì žô@Ł†Ümña@Ł†đ× /kaḏ ʾeṯīleḏ-hwå / »when/after he was born/had been born« åčäđyŁìîÛ@ôĆğ†yđa@cìžô@‰ đğ†đ‘ ÷@ …þëŠĆôfl2 @ĆÀË@Łìô /hū ḡȩ̄r Hȩ̄rōḏes šaddar-hwå ʾaḥdȩ̄h l-Yōḥannån / »for Herod himself had sent forth and laid hold upon John« (Mk 6,17).

Active Participle + cìžô /hwå / • The construction žôcì @tflòč×Č @/kåṯeḇ-hwå / (active participle + žôcì /hwå /) is used to express duration, habit or repetition in the past. The general translation »he is wont to« or »he constantly did« can often be used, e.g. žôcì @dĆÀ‚či /båḵȩ̄-hwå / »he constantly cried«. • In conditional clauses, and also sometimes in other contexts, the construction is used to express a hypothetical or unreal state of affairs, e.g. æđòn¸Č …đ2 @dôčÛđa@cìžô@dĆÀqú@ŁìÛa /ʾellū ṣåḇȩ̄-hwå ʾalåhå ḏa-nmīṯan / »if God wanted to kill us« cìžô@ÖflŠčÇ@æþì½ /lmōn ‛åreq-hwå / »why should he flee?« (a construction with the perfect is also known to have be used : cìžô@ÖþëŠÈflã@æþì½ /l-mōn ne‛roq-hwå / »why should he flee / should he have fled?«). • Where several participles with the same function occur together, cìžô /hwå / need only occur once: dôčÛđü@|đÀÀğjđ’ßë aĆ@ †čyë@cìžô@ƒflğzčËŁ…@hčÛa@âflğ†flàği@Č“ğflç‰đa@hčÛë2 /w-lå ʾargeš b-meddem ʾellå ḏ-ḡåḥeḵ-hwå w-ḥåḏȩ̄ wa-mšabbaḥ l-ʾalåhå / »he felt nothing, but laughed, was joyful and praised God « (AMS 442).

Lesson 11 97

Imperfec t + cìžô /hwå / • The construction cì žô@tþëò‚flã /neḵtoḇ-hwå / (imperfect + žôcì /hwå /) is used in a similar way to the simple imperfect, and is most commonly found in a past or hypothetical context. Examples: cì žô@ÖþìÐflãğ…@âčŁ†Ó /qḏåm d-neppoq-hwå / »before he emerged« cìžô@ÖþëŠÈflã@æþì½ /l-mōn ne‛roq-hwå / »why should he flee/ should he have fled?«.

11. 7. Vocabulary

A. voice, sound /qålå/ hčÜčÓ youth, boy /ṭalyå/ dčîÜđ Christ @(< gr.) /kresṭyånå/ dčäčîݍ flŠ× election /gaḇyūṯå/ cČčñŁìîrđç gladness /ḥaḏūṯå/ cČčñŁëŁ†đy @ until now /‛ḏakkẹ̄l/ ÝîĆ×đ†Ç idol (< pers.) /pṯaḵrå/ aŠ đòÏ2 justice /kẹ̄ʾnūṯå/ cČčñŁìãb× hard /qšȩ̄/ dĆ’ Ó again /men d-rẹ̄š/ “m‰ğ…@åČß strong /‛aššīn/ ³’đÇ judge /dayyånå/ dčäčíđ… to remember /dḵar / ŠđÀ… kind, sort /’åḏšå/ dč‘… ča revelation /gelyånå/ dčäčîÜflÀÀç outward /barråyå/ dčí Š đi inner /gawwåyå/ dčíìđç Ł a staff /šabuqtå/ cčòÓŁìğjđ‘ crown /klīlå/ hčÜnÜ× B. not at all /la såḵ/ Ùč@hčÛ dates /tamrȩ̄/ aĆˆßđñ walnut /gåwzå/ cõ‹ìčç I ought to /wålȩ̄-lī/ oÛ@hÛë left hand /semålå/ hčÜčàfl earnest (< gr.) /rahḇōnå/ dčãŁìrô ‰ right hand /yammīnå/ dčänàđí Creater /bårōyå/ dčíþëŠči

98 Lesson 11

Verb Forms Pe. to keep /neṭṭar / Šđİ flã : /nṭar / Šđİã ʾEṯpe. to be kept /neṯnṭar / Šđİ ãòflã : /ʾeṯnṭar / Šđİ ãña Pe. to worship (e-o) /nesgoḏ/ Ł… þì ğèŽflã : /sḡeḏ/ Ł† fl̍ Pa. to speak, to talk /nmallel / ÝÜ đ¸ : /mallel / ÝÜđß Pe. to profit by /nẹ̄ʾṯar/ ‰đñbĆãČ : /īṯar/ ‰òmđČ ʾAº. to do harm /naḥsar / ŠđŽ zđã : /ʾaḥsar / ŠđŽ yđa Pe. to give (→ 14. 2.) /nettel / Þflòflã : /ya hḇ/ sžô đí Pe. to know /nedda‛/ Êđğ†flã : /īḏa‛/ ÊČđ†m Payel to believe (→ 15. 1.) /nhaymen / flàîå ôã : /haymen / ôflàîå ʾEṯpa. to be amazed /neddammar / Šđß đğ… ò flflã : /’eddammar / Šđß đğ… ñ a ʾEtpe. to be begotten /neṯīleḏ / †Ł Ümòflã : /’eṯīleḏ / Ł† Ü mña ʾEṯpe. to be thrown away (→ 13. 1.) /nestlȩ̄/ dÛ òŽ flã : /’estlī/ oÛ ò a ʾAº. to love /naḥḥeḇ/ Čkflz đã : /ʾaḥḥeḇ/ Čkfly đa Pa. to go /nhalleḵ/ Ù Üôã : /halleḵ/ Ù Ü ô Pe. to eat /nȩ̄ʾḵol / Þþì bĆã : /ʾeḵal / ÝđÀ a ʾEṯpe. to be eaten /neṯȩ̄ʾḵel / ÝflÀÀaòflã : /ʾeṯȩ̄ʾḵel / ÝflÀÀaña Pa. to prepare /n‛atteḏ/ Ł… flò đÈã : /‛atteḏ/ Ł… flò đÇ ʾEṯpe. to be created (→ 13. 1.) /neṯbrȩ̄/ aĆŠğiòflã : /ʾeṯbrå/ aŠğiñ a Pe. to reward (a-o) /nep̄ro‛ / Êþë ŠÐflã : /pra‛/ ÊŠ Ï

11. 8. Exercises

A. Translate the following: @ôĆñŠđİã2 đ…@ƒíđa@ZƒčÛ@aŠİčã@cĆìôflğ 2ñ…@ZcčòÓŁìğjđ‘ a@ Ć2†ô@ÞþìÔ‘@ZóÛ@ŠđÀğßča…@dčîđ@åČß cč@ ìô@hčÜčÓë8 1 (AMS 440) NcČčòği‰ @cČčñŁëŁ†đ¡@dčàčß@ğóčjȎđãë@NdĆ‘Łì½ @d½ûÛ@ëČìžô@æŁëŁ†ğèŽflãŁ…ë@Zdčän’đÇë@dčî’đÓ@dčîÏŁëŁ…‰@dĆäčîݍflˆ‚đÛ@cČìžô@ČÒfl…‰ë@aĆˆđ2 òÐđÛ@cČìžô@Ł†flÌğÀÀčë2 2 (AMS 431) @N³Èğàč‘@hčÜÏčaë@³ÜÜđ¾@hčÛŁ…@dĆ‘ˆđy @æþìßë@oÛ@‰đñìčß@æþìß@dčãa@ğÊđ†čí@Zð2 òma@dčîÜđ@åÏčaëđğ @ZdčÇëõ‹@dčÛŁ…ë@dčÜyfl…@dčÛ…@Zdčßbčß@óÛ@Šđßa 3 (AMS 437) Ndčzn’àđÀČi@dčãa@åflàîôß@hčÛa@ZÙşîôčÛđbi@dčã‰ñŁìí@òîđÛŁ…@dčãa@ğÊđ2†číë@ZoÛ@ŠđŽzđß (2. Cor 5,5) NóĆyŁë‰Ł… @dčãþìrô‰ @åđÛ@sžôđíğ…@ìô@Nìžô@dôčÛđa@a ƆôÛ@ğóčÛ@åđÛ@Ł…flòđÈß2 đ…ë2 4 (Jn 3,7)N“m‰ğ…@åČß@ŁëŁ†čÜmò½@æþì¨@hÛëğ…@ƒčÛ@ñflŠßafl…@Šđßđğ …ññ@hčÛğ 5 @ëŠđİãë@Næþìãa@òržôđí@oÛë@Nëìžô@ƒčÜmğ… @܆dčàÜčÇ@åČß@oÛ@òržôđíğ…@æþìäô@dč’čãa@şïđärđÛ@ƒč@òflÇğ…ëča 6 (Jn 17,6-7) NŁìžô@„ČčñìÛ@åČß@oÛ@òr žôđíŁ…@dčß@݁ğ…@òflÇŁ†flí@dč’ô@„ČčòÜflß @dčãbĆÀÀ×@dčäčí đČ…@ŁìíŁìôŁ…@ìô@dčßìčîği@NðŠčß@oÛ@ïžôìnÇŠÐflãğ…@NcČčñŁìãbĆÀÀף…@hčÜnÜ×@oÛ@İã@dč’ô@åČßë 7 (2. Tm 4,8) NóĆäčîÜflÀÀÌÛ@ìrflya đğ…@´ÜíhđÛ@ČÒča@hčÛa@oÛ@Ł…þìzÜđÀÀği@å íĆ2…@hčÛ @NdčÇğ…ìčß@ óĆäčîqflŞú@ ñŁìrč@ Ýİflß@ ZôñŁìîrđç@ NæþìÇŠÐÛ@ dôčÛđa@ „čòđjČžôđí@ dô@ ZŠđß ñaa @ åğß@ dĆ‘Łì½ 8 (MJ 8-9) NoÛòa@ìžČô@dčî’đÓ…@ÉmŁ†m@ZÝîĆ×đ†Ç@cĆìôflã@hčÛ@Ł†đף…ë@ZæþìÇŠÏ…@óĆğjÛ@ñŁìî’đÓë Lesson 11 99

B. Add vowels and translate the following: @⁄@åí…@fi؍@Ncìžô@fi؍@áí†Ó@åß@ìČô@Òa…@ïğôi@fi؎Û@Ê…ëò’ß@dàîØy… @Šğßa@åíŠya 1 (BH, KdT 11) ܀dàîØy@µ@cìČô@ٍ@⁄@†×@dàîا@Ê…ëò’ß @ôñìÜîİi…@ Ï@ ìČôë@ Nóíìç@ c‹ìèië@ Ý×aòß@ óíŠi@ aŠßòi@ däß@ ÝÇ…@ Šßaña@ åíŠy⁄ 2 @NáÜÈÛ@ó‘…a@Šİãòã @däØía…@⁄a@Nğóíòía@aŠiòß…@dß@ìğô@Ý×aòã @åØía…@ïğô@ÝÇ@ìÛ@díëŠi… @⁄@ åí…@ ìğô@ Nìô@ däÜ×aòß@ åğß@ ìğô@ åÏaë@ Næìôí‰òi@ díìç@ Šİãòß@ ói…@ ìğô@ däØôë (BH, KdT 9f.) ܀däÜ×aòß (KD 8) NìØÜô½@óàÇ@Ö…ğ‹@⁄@ğʆí@⁄@óÜ@åß@dän¹…@ìô…@aßaë 3

C. Write out the following until familiar:

(KD 7)@NaˆÈ@åß@dİy@³Ç†í@⁄ë@dljbi@æˆnà…@aˆÈë@dİy@Ùía 1 @⁄@åí…@fi؍@Ncìžô@fi؍@áí†Ó@åß@ìČô@Òa…@ïğôi@fi؎Û@Ê…ëò’ß@dàîØy…@Šğßa@åíŠya 2 @ @ (BH, KdT 11) ܀dàîØy@µ@cìČô@ٍ@⁄@†×@dàîا@Ê…ëò’ß

(KD 7) . 1 . 2 (BH, KdT 11) ܀

̈ ̈ (KD 7) . ܘ ܪ ܕ ܘ ܐ 1 ̄ ܿ ܿ ܕ .ܘܗ ܘܗܼ ܦܐܕ ܝ ܥܕܘ ܕ ܐ ܐ 2 (BH, KdT 11) ܀ ܘܗܼ ܥܕܘ

Lesson 12 12. 1. II-ʾÅlap ̄ Verbs

The paradigm for II-ʾÅlap̄ verbs is governed by a rule which states that the middle radical (glottal stop ʾÅlap̄) is always silent (e.g. pf. pe. ÞbĆ‘ /š ʾȩ̄l / [read: šȩ̄l ] »to ask«), except in the act. part. m.sg., St. abs. Þbč‘ /šå ʾel /; and in the case of gemination, i.e. in the Pa ‛‛ el-stem and the ʾEṯpa ‛‛ al-stem, e.g. pf. pa. Þbđ‘ /ša ʾʾ el / and pf. ʾEṯpa. Þđa đò‘a /ʾešta ʾʾ al / Although the 2nd radical is not pronounced, it is nonetheless still written. Only verbs which take the / e-a/- conjugation belong to the II-ʾÅlap̄ class of verbs, (pf. With the thematic vowel /e/, impf. with /a/). Examples: Pe. Pf. 3.m.sg. ÞbĆ‘ /š ʾȩ̄l / [read: šȩ̄l ] »he asked« Pe. Impf. 3.m.sg. Þbđ’flã /neš ʾal / [read: nešal ] »he shall ask« (cf. Pe. Impf. 3.m.sg. tþëò‚flã /neḵtoḇ /) Pe. Imp. m.sg. Þbđ‘ /š ʾal / [read: šal ] »ask!« (cf. Pe. Imp. m.sg. áđy‰ /rḥam /).

The 3.f.sg. and 1.c.sg. perfect forms of the ʾEṯp‛el-stem require particular attention, since they differ substantially in ES and WS: ÞaĆò‘a /ʾešt ʾȩ̄l / [read: ʾeštȩ̄l ] »to decline« ES, pf. 3.f.sg. òđÛa đò‘a /ʾešta ʾlaṯ/ [read: ʾeštalaṯ]; ES, pf. 1.c.sg. òÛa đò‘a /ʾešta ʾleṯ/ [read: ʾeštaleṯ] (cf. pf. 3.f.sg. òđÀÀğiòđÀÀ×ña /ʾeṯkaṯbaṯ /; Pf. 1.c.sg. òflÀğiòđÀÀ×ña /ʾeṯkaṯbeṯ /) (/ a/-vocalism, as in strong verbs). (WS, Pf. 3.f.sg. /ʾešt ʾȩ̄ʾlaṯ/ [read: ʾeštȩ̄laṯ ];; WS, Pf. 1.c.sg. /ʾešt ʾȩ̄ʾleṯ/ [read: ʾeštȩ̄leṯ ]) ) (/ e/-vocalism, as in the other persons of strong verbs.).

The corresponding forms of the ʾEttap̄‛al-stem are accordingly: Pf. 3.f.sg. òđÛbĆ‘ đ aññ /ʾettaš ʾȩ̄laṯ / [read: ʾettašȩ̄laṯ ] (cf. Pf. 3.f.sg. òđÀqò đ aññ /ʾettaḵtḇaṯ /) Pf. 1.c.sg. òÛbĆ‘ đ aññ /ʾettaš ʾȩ̄leṯ / [read: ʾettašȩ̄leṯ ] (cf. Pf. 1.c.sg. òqflò đ aññ /ʾettaḵteḇṯ /).

Lesson 12 101

The Paradigm of II-ʾÅlap̄ verbs is as follows, taking ÞbĆ‘ /š ʾȩ̄l / [read: šȩ̄l etc .] »to ask« (with the metathesis /tš / > /št / in ʾEṯpe. and ʾEṯpa.) as an example: Perfect: P‛al ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el ʾEtta º‛al Sg.3.m. ÞbĆ‘ ÞbĆ‘đa ÞaĆò‘a Þbđ‘ đñña /š ʾȩ̄l / /ʾaš ʾȩ̄l /@ /ʾešt ʾȩ̄l /@ /ʾettaš ʾal / 3.f. òđÛbĆ‘ òđÛbĆ‘đa òđÛa ò‘ađ òđÛbĆ‘ đñña /š ʾȩ̄laṯ /@ /ʾaš ʾȩ̄laṯ /@ /ʾešta ʾlaṯ/36 /ʾettaš ʾȩ̄laṯ /@ 2.m. òÛbĆ‘ òÛbĆ‘đa òÛaĆò‘a òÛbđ‘ ññađ /š ʾȩ̄lt / /ʾaš ʾȩ̄lt /@ /ʾešt ʾȩ̄lt /@ /ʾettaš ʾalt / 2.f. ðòÛbĆ‘ ðòÛbĆ‘đa ðòÛaĆò‘a ðòÛbđ‘ đñña /š ʾȩ̄lt y/@ /ʾaš ʾȩ̄lt y/@ /ʾešt ʾȩ̄lt y/@ /ʾettaš ʾalt y/@ 1.c. òÛbĆ‘ òÛbĆ‘đa òÛa đò‘a òÛbĆ‘ đñña /š ʾȩ̄leṯ / /ʾaš ʾȩ̄leṯ /@ /ʾešta ʾleṯ/37 /ʾettaš ʾȩ̄leṯ / Pl.3.m. ìÛbĆ‘ ìÛbĆ‘đa ìÛaĆò‘a ìÛbđ‘ đñña /š ʾȩ̄l w/@ /ʾaš ʾȩ̄l w/@ /ʾešt ʾȩ̄l w/@ /ʾettaš ʾal w/ æŁìÛbĆ‘ æŁìÛbĆ‘đa æŁìÛaĆò‘a æŁìÛbđ‘ đñña /š ʾȩ̄lūn /@ /ʾaš ʾȩ̄lūn /@ /ʾešt ʾȩ̄lūn /@ /ʾettaš ʾalūn / 3.f. şïÛbĆ‘ şïÛbĆ‘đa şïÛaĆò‘a şïÛbđ‘ đñña /š ʾȩ̄l y/@ /ʾaš ʾȩ̄l y/ /ʾešt ʾȩ̄l y/ /ʾettaš ʾal y/ åşîÛbĆ‘ åşîÛbĆ‘đa åşîÛaĆò‘a åşîÛbđ‘ đñña /š ʾȩ̄lȩ̄n / /ʾaš ʾȩ̄lȩ̄n /@ /ʾešt ʾȩ̄lȩ̄n /@ /ʾettaš ʾalȩ̄n /@ 2.m. æþëòÛbĆ‘ æþëòÛbĆ‘đa æþëòÛaĆò‘a æþëòÛbđ‘ ññađ /š ʾȩ̄ltōn /@ /ʾaš ʾȩ̄ltōn /@ /ʾešt ʾȩ̄ltōn /@ /ʾettaš ʾaltōn / 2.f. åíĆòÛbĆ‘ åíĆòÛbĆ‘đa åíĆòÛaĆò‘a åíĆòÛbđ‘ đñña /š ʾȩ̄ltȩ̄n /@ /ʾaš ʾȩ̄ltȩ̄n /@ /ʾešt ʾȩ̄ltȩ̄n /@ /ʾettaš ʾaltȩ̄n / 1.c. åÛbĆ‘ åÛbĆ‘đa åÛaĆò‘a åÛbđ‘ đñña /š ʾȩ̄ln/@ /ʾaš ʾȩ̄ln/ /ʾešt ʾȩ̄ln/@ /ʾettaš ʾaln / åđäÛbĆ‘ åđäÛbĆ‘đa åđäÛaĆò‘a åđäÛbđ‘ ññađ /š ʾȩ̄lnan /@ /ʾaš ʾȩ̄lnan / ʾešt ʾȩ̄lnan / /ʾettaš ʾalnan /@

36 WS /ʾešt ʾȩ̄ʾlaṯ/. 37 WS /ʾešt ʾȩ̄ʾleṯ/.

102 Lesson 12

Imperfect: P‛al ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el ʾEtta º‛al Sg.3.m. Þb đ’flã Þb Ć’đã Þa Ćò’flã Þbđ‘ đ flãñò /neš ʾal / /naš ʾȩ̄/l@ /neštʾȩ̄l/@ /nettaš ʾal / 3.f. Þb đ‘ñ Þb Ć‘đñ Þa Ćò‘ñ @ Þbđ‘ đ ññ /teš ʾal /@ /taš ʾȩ̄l / /tešt ʾȩ̄l/@ /tettaš ʾal / 2.m. Þb đ‘ñ Þb Ć‘đñ Þa Ćò‘ñ Þbđ‘ đ ññ /teš ʾal /@ /taš ʾȩ̄l / /tešt ʾȩ̄l/@ /tettaš ʾal / 2.f. Ûb³ đ‘ñ Ûb³ Ć‘đñ Ûa³ đ ‘ñò ³Ûbđ‘ đ ññ /teš ʾalīn/@ /taš ʾȩ̄līn /@ /teštaʾlīn/@ /tettaš ʾalīn /@ 1.c. Þb đ‘a Þb Ć‘đa Þa Ćò‘a Þbđ‘ đ aññ /ʾeš ʾal /@ /ʾaš ʾȩ̄l /@ /ʾešt ʾȩ̄l /@ /ʾettaš ʾal /@ Pl.3.m. æŁì Ûb đ’flã æŁì Ûb Ć’đã æŁì Ûa đ ’flãò æŁìÛbĆ‘ đ flãñò /neš ʾalūn/ /naš ʾȩ̄lūn/ /neštaʾlūn/@ /nettaš ʾȩ̄lūn/ 3.f. čÛbåşÀÀ đ’flã čÛbåşÀÀ @Ć’đã čÛaåşÀÀ đ ’flãò åşÀÀčÛbĆ‘ đ flãñò /neš ʾalån/ /naš ʾȩ̄lån/ /neštaʾlån/@ /nettaš ʾȩ̄lån/ 2.m. æŁì Ûb đ‘ñ æŁì Ûb Ć‘đñ æŁì Ûa đ ‘ñò æŁìÛbĆ‘ đ ññ /teš ʾalūn/ /taš ʾȩ̄lūn /@ /teštaʾlūn/@ /tettaš ʾȩ̄lūn / 2.f. čÛbåşÀÀ đ‘ñ čÛbåşÀÀ Ć‘đñ čÛaåşÀÀ đ ‘ñò åşÀÀčÛbĆ‘ đ ññ /teš ʾalån/ /taš ʾȩ̄lån/ /teštaʾlån/@ /tettaš ʾȩ̄lån/ 1.c. Þb đ’flã Þb Ć’đã Þa đ ’flãò Þbđ‘ đ flãñò /neš ʾal /@ /naš ʾȩ̄l /@ /nešt ʾȩ̄l/@ /nettaš ʾal /@

Imperative: P‛al ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el ʾEtta º‛al Sg.2.m. đ‘Þb Þb Ć‘đa Þa đò‘a Þbđ‘ đ aññ /š ʾal /@ /ʾaš ʾȩ̄l /@ /ʾeštaʾl/@ /ʾettaš ʾal / 2.f. đ‘Ûbï Ûbï Ć‘đa Ûaï ò‘ađ ïÛbđ‘ đ aññ /š ʾal y/@ /ʾaš ʾȩ̄l y/@ /ʾeštaʾly/@ /ʾettaš ʾal y/@ Pl.2.m. đ‘Ûbì Ûbì Ć‘đa Ûaì đò‘a ìÛbđ‘ đ aññ /š ʾal w/@ /ʾaš ʾȩ̄l w/@ /ʾeštaʾlw/@ /ʾettašʾal w/ æŁì đ‘Ûb æŁì Ûb Ć‘đa æŁì Ûa ò‘ađ æŁìÛbđ‘ đ aññ /š ʾalūn/@ /ʾaš ʾȩ̄lūn/ /ʾeštaʾlūn/@ /ʾettašʾalūn/ 2.f. đ‘Ûbşï Ûbşï Ć‘đa Ûaşï đò‘a şïÛbđ‘ đ aññ /š ʾal y/@ /ʾaš ʾȩ̄l y/@ /ʾeštaʾly/@ /ʾettašʾal y/@ đ‘Ûbåşî Ûbåşî Ć‘đa Ûaåşî đò‘a åşîÛbđ‘ đ aññ /š ʾalȩ̄n /@ /ʾaš ʾȩ̄lȩ̄n / /ʾeštaʾlȩ̄n / /ʾettašʾalȩ̄n / Lesson 12 103

Participles: P‛al ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el ʾEtta º‛al Part. Act. m. č‘bÞ ÞbĆ’đß Þa Ćò’flß Þbđ‘ đñòflß /šå ʾel / /maš ʾȩ̄l / /mešt ʾȩ̄l / /mettaš ʾal / Part. Act. f. č‘čÛbh dčÛbĆ’đß čÛah Ćò’flß hčÛb‘ đñòflß /šå ʾlå/@ /maš ʾȩ̄lå /@ /mešt ʾȩ̄lå /@ /mettaš ʾlå /@ Part. Pass. m. ‘bmÝ Þbđ’đß — — /š ʾīl/ /maš ʾal / Part. Pass. f. ‘bmčÜh hčÛbđ’đß — — /š ʾīlå /@ /maš ʾalå /@ @ @

Infinitive: P‛al ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el ʾEtta º‛al Þbđ’flß ŁìÛbč’đß ÛaŁì čò’flß ŁìÛbč‘ đñòflß /mešʾal /@ /mašåʾlū/@ /meštåʾlū/@ /mettašåʾlū/@

12. 2. II-w and II-y Verbs

Verbs of this class have a semivowel as the 2nd radical. The paradigm is shaped by the following factors: 1. The distinction between verbs with a etymological /w/ and those with a /y/ is largely dropped. Almost all verbs form the derived verb stems according to the same pattern as the II-y class (e.g. Pa‛‛el áflîđÓ /qayyem / »he erected«). 2. The ʾEṯp‛el . and ʾEtta º‛al stems are amalgamated. They build forms of the kind ánÓ ñañ /ʾettqīm / (pf.), ánÓ òflãñ /nettqīm / (Impf.).

Remark: • With the exception of ònß /mīṯ/ »he died« ( √myt ), all verbs always exhibit /a/ vocalism in pf. pe. The forms of √qwm »to stand up« are as follows: áčÓ /qåm / (< */qawam /) »he stood up« òđà čÓ /qåmaṯ/ »she stood up« òà čÓ /qåmt / »you stood up«, etc. • By contrast, the root √myt »to die« generally builds the perfect with /ī/-vocalism: ònß /mīṯ/ »he died« ñđònß2 /mīṯaṯ / »she died« ñònß /mīt / (*/mītt / < */mīṯt /) »you died« etc. However, forms with /å/ are also known to have been used (òčß /måṯ/, ñđòčß2 /måṯaṯ /, etc.). • With the exception of áč /såm / »to put«, all verbs have /u/-vocalism in the impf. and imp. (they have been amalgamated with II-w verbs, and are built analogously to II-w verbs), e.g.

Lektion 11 104

âŁìÔã /nqūm / (< */neqwum /) »he shall stand up« âŁìÓa /ʾeqūm / »I shall stand up« âŁìÓ /qūm / »stand up!« The verb áč /såm / (√sym ) »he put« forms the impf. and imp. with /ī/: ánŽã /nsīm / (< */nesyīm /) »he shall put« án /sīm / »put!«. • The basic form of the act. part. (m.sg., St. abs.) is built according to the type čÓâb /qå ʾem / »standing«, i.e. in the same way as the II-ʾÅlap̄ class (secondary glottal stop ʾÅlap̄ instead of a semivowel). Nonetheless, the forms with endings are dčàî čÓ /qåymå /, ³àî čÓ /qåymīn /, etc. The infinitive is áčÔß /mqåm / »standing up«, áčŽß /msåm / »putting«. • The pf. ʾAp̄‛el is built according to the type ánÓđa @/ʾaqīm / »he rose up«; the corresponding impf. is ánÔã /nqīm / »he shall rise up « (in contrast to tflò‚đã /naḵteḇ / for strong verbs!), and the imp. is ánÓđa /ʾaqīm / »arise!«. • Instead of distinguishing between ʾEṯp‛el and ʾEttap̄‛al, only a single, uniformly built T-stem is attested: ánÓñña /ʾettqīm / (< */ʾeṯtqīm /) [read: ʾetqīm ] »he was constituted« (Pf.) ánÓñòflã /nettqīm / [read: netqīm ] »he/it shall be constituted« (Impf.) ánÓñòflß /mettqīm / [read: mettqīm ] »constituted« (Part.) and ŁìàčÓñòflß /mettqåmū/ [read: metqåmū] »constituting« (Inf.). • Pa‛‛el and ʾEṯpa‛‛al take the strong forms. Most verbs always have a geminate /yy /, e.g. áflîđÓ /qayyem /, áđîđÓ ña2 /ʾeṯqayyam /. Nonetheless, some verbs have in WS a geminate /ww /, e.g. /ṭawweš / (ES ”flìč /ṭåweš /) »he dirtied«. • In most lexicons, II-w/y verbs are listed together under K1-w-K3 (K 1/3 = 1st/ 3rd root consonant). (Only Brockelmann (1928) distinguishes between II-w and II-y according to the form of the imp. pe., and lists verbs

of this class under either K1-w-K3 or K1-y-K3. However, he presents them orthographically according to the

nd perfect form as K1-K3 without a 2 radical)

Lesson 12 105

The paradigm for II-w/y verbs is as follows, taking áčÓ /qåm / »to stand up« and ònß /mīṯ/ »to die« as examples:

Perfect: P‛al ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el = ʾEtta º‛al Sg.3. áčÓ ònß ánÓđa ánÓñ ña m. /qåm/ /mīṯ/ /ʾaqīm /@ /ʾettqīm /@ đàčÓò ñ ònßđ2 òđànÓđa ò đànÓñ ña 3.f. /qåmaṯ/@ /mīṯaṯ / @ /ʾaqīmaṯ/@ /ʾettqīmaṯ/@ àčÓò ñ ònß òànÓđa ò ànÓñ ña 2.m. /qåmt/@ /mīt/ /ʾaqīmt/@ /ʾettqīmt/@ ðò àčÓ ðñ ònß ðòànÓđa ðò ànÓñ ña 2.f. /qåmty/@ /mīty/ /ʾaqīmty/@ /ʾettqīmty/@ flàčÓò ñ fl2ònß òflànÓđa ò flànÓñ ña 1.c. /qåmeṯ/@ /mīṯeṯ /@ /ʾaqīmeṯ/ /ʾettqīmeṯ/ Pl.3. àčÓì ëČònß ìànÓđa ìànÓñ ña m. /qåmw/ /mīṯw/ /ʾaqīm w/@ /ʾettqīm w/@ àčÓşï şð Čònß şïànÓđa şï ànÓñ ña 3.f. /qåmy/ /mīṯy/ /ʾaqīm y/@ /ʾettqīm y/@ æþëò àčÓ æþëñ Čònß æþëòànÓđa æþëò ànÓñ ña 2.m. /qåmtōn / /mīttōn / /ʾaqīmtōn /@ /ʾettqīmtōn /@ åíĆò àčÓ åí ğĆñònß íĆòå ànÓđa åíĆò ànÓñ ña 2.f. /qåmtȩ̄n / /mīttȩ̄n / /ʾaqīmtȩ̄n /@ /ʾettqīmtȩ̄n /@ àčÓå æČònß åànÓđa åànÓñ ña 1.c. /qåmn/ /mīṯn/ /ʾaqīmn/@ /ʾettqīmn/@ åđä àčÓ åđã Čònß đäå ànÓđa åđä ànÓñ ña /qåmnan /@ /mīṯnan / /ʾaqīmnan / /ʾettqīmnan /@

Lektion 11 106

Imperfect: P‛al ʾAp̄‛el ʾEṯp‛el = ʾEtta p̄‛al Sg.3.m. âŁìÔ㠎ãná ánÔã ánÓñ òflã /nqūm / /nsīm / /nqīm / /nettqīm /@ 3.f. âŁìÓñ ñná ánÓñ ánÓñ ñ /tqūm / /tsīm / /tqīm / /tetqīm /@ 2.m. âŁìÓñ ñná ánÓñ ánÓñ ñ /tqūm / /tsīm / /tqīm / /tetqīm /@ 2.f. ³ßŁìÓñ ³à ñn ³ànÓñ ³ànÓñ ñ /tqūmīn/ /tsīmīn/ /tqīmīn/ /tetqīmīn/@ 1.c. âŁìÓa aná đanÓá ánÓñ añ /ʾeqūm /@ /ʾesīm / /ʾaqīm / @ /ʾettqīm /@ Pl.3.m. æŁì ߣìÔã æŁìànŽã æŁìànÔã æŁì ànÓñ flãò /nqūmūn/ /nsīmūn/ /nqīmūn/ /nettqīmūn/@ 3.f. čßåşÀÀ ŁìÔã åşÀÀčànŽã åşÀÀčànÔã åşÀÀ čànÓñ flãò /nqūmån/ /nsīmån/ /nqīmån/ /nettqīmån/@ 2.m. æŁì ߣìÓñ æŁìànñ æŁìànÓñ æŁì ànÓñ ñ /tqūmūn/ /tsīmūn/ /tqīmūn/ /tetqīmūn/@ 2.f. čßåşÀÀ ŁìÓñ åşÀÀčànñ åşÀÀčànÓñ åşÀÀ čànÓñ flñ /tqūmån/ /tsīmån/ /tqīmån/ /tetqīmån/@ 1.c. âŁìÔã ánŽã ánÔã ánÓñ flãò /nqūm / @ /nsīm / @ /nqīm / @ /nettqīm /@

Imperative: P‛al ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el = ʾEtta º‛al Sg.2.m. ŁìÓâ án ánÓđa ánÓñ añ /qūm / /sīm /@ /’aqīm / /’ettqīm /@ 2.f. ŁìÓßï ïàn ïànÓđa ïànÓñ añ /qūm y/@ /sīm y/@ /’aqīm y/@ /’ettqīm y/@ Pl.2.m. ŁìÓßì ìàn ìànÓđa ìànÓñ añ /qūm w/@ /sīm w/@@ /’aqīm w/@ /’ettqīm w/@ 2.f. ŁìÓĆßåşî åşîĆàn åşîĆànÓđa åşî ĆànÓñ añ /qūmȩ̄n /@ /sīmȩ̄n / /’aqīmȩ̄n / /’ettqīmȩ̄n /

Lesson 12 107

Participles: P‛al ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el = ʾEtta º‛al Part. Act. m. čÓbâ âbč ánÔß ánÓñ flßò /qåʾem /@ /så ʾem /@ /mqīm /@ /mettqīm /@ Part. Act. f. dčàîčÓ dčàîč dčànÔß dčànÓñ flßò /qåymå/@ /såymå/@ /mqīmå/@ /mettqīmå/@ Part. Pass. m. ánÓ án áčÔß — /qīm /@ /sīm /@ /mqåm/@ Part. Pass. f. dčànÓ dčàn dčàčÔß — /qīmå/@ /sīmå/@ /mqåmå/@ @

Infinitive: P‛al ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el = ʾEtta º‛al áčÔß áčŽß ŁìàčÔß flßòčÓñàŁì /mqåm/@ /msåm/@ /mqåmū/@ /mettqåmū/@

12. 3. II=III Verbs (mediae geminatae)

In verbs of this class, the 2 nd and 3 rd radicals are identical. Put otherwise: they have a geminate 2nd radical .; e.g. √bzz »to plunder« (structure: K1-K2-K2). The paradigm of these verbs exhibits several peculiarities. The three most important rules are as follows: 1. The gemination of the 2nd = 3 rd radical which one would normally expect only occurs in the perfect (1.c.sg. and 3.f.sg.) and the act. part. P‛al, and is in these cases only partially implemented (e.g. fliñflŒ /bezzeṯ/ »I plundered«). At the beginning of syllables and words, gemination is simplified, e.g. Œđi /baz/ < * /bazz/ »he plundered«, điŒñ /bazt/ »you plundered «.

2. Following preformatives (impf. inf. pe, ʾAp̄., ʾEttap̄.), the 1 st radical is geminate instead of the 2 nd . The forms are exactly the same as they would be if formed from the I-n root, e.g. impf. pe. impf. ‹þìğjflã /nebboz/ (accordingly, the imp. is ‹þìi /boz/); ʾAp̄. Pf. Œflğiđa /ʾabbez/, impf. Œflğjđã /nabbez/, imp. Œflğiđa /ʾabbez/.

3. The Part. Pass. Pe. as well as ʾEṯp‛el, Pa ‛‛ el and ʾEṯpa ‛‛al are built regularly ("strong"): ŒmŒi /bzīz/, ‹flŒğiña /ʾeṯbzez/, ‹flŒđi /bazzez/, ‹flŒđÀÀğiña /ʾeṯbazzaz/. Remarks: • The impf. pe. conforms – depending on the thematic vowel – to the types ‹þìğjflã /nebboz/ »he shall plunder« (or ČêŠflã /nerraḡ/ »he shall desire«), with the gemination of the 1st radical as in the class I-n. Analagously, the imp. pe. is : ‹þìi /boz/ »plunder!« Čê‰ /raḡ/ »desire!«.

Lektion 11 108

• The basic form of the part. act. pe. is built according to the type či‹b /bå ʾez/ »plundering«, i.e. analogously to the classa II-ʾÅlap̄ or II-w/y. However, the forms with endings are as follows: čiŒcõ /båzå/ åm čiŒ /båzīn/, etc.

The paradigm of II=III verbs is as follows, taking Œđi /baz/ »to plunder« and Čê‰ /raḡ/ »to desire« as examples:

P‛al ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el Sg.3.m. Œđi Čê‰ Œflğiđa ‹flŒğiña /baz / /raḡ/@ /’abbez /@ /’eṯbzez / 3.f. ñŒfli òđÀÀğçfl‰ ğiđaŒñ ğiñađÀ‹Œñ /bezzaṯ/@ /reggaṯ/@ /’abzaṯ/@ /’eṯbazzaṯ/ 2.m. ñŒđi ‰Čçò ñ Œflğiđa ñ ‹flŒğiña /bazt / /raḡt/ /’abbezṯ/@ /’eṯbzezt / 2.f. ðñŒđi ‰Čçðò ðñ Œflğiđa ðñ ‹flŒğiña /bazt y/ /raḡty/ /’abbezty/@ /’eṯbzezt y/ 1.c. ñflŒfli òflÀğçfl‰ ğiđaflŒñ ŒđÀfl‹ñ ğiña /bezzeṯ/ /reggeṯ/@ /’abzeṯ/@ /’eṯbazzeṯ/ Pl.3.m. ëŒđi @ Čç‰ì ëŒflğiđa ë‹flŒğiña /baz w/@ /raḡw/@ /’abbezw /@ /’eṯbzez w / 3.f. Œđişð Čçï ‡đ şð Œflğiđa şð ‹flŒğiña /baz y/@ /raḡ y/@ /’abbezy /@ /’eṯbzez y/ 2.m. æþëñŒđi æþëò Čç‰ æþëñ Œflğiđa æþëñ ‹flŒğiña /baztōn / /raḡtōn /@ /’abbeztōn /@ /’eṯbzeztōn / 2.f. åíĆñŒđi åíĆò Čç‰ åíĆñ Œflğiđa åíĆñ ‹flŒğiña /baztȩ̄n/ /raḡtȩ̄n/@ /’abbeztȩ̄n/@ /’eṯbzeztȩ̄n/@ 1.c. æŒđi Čç‰å æŒflğiđa æ‹flŒğiña /bazn / @ /raḡn/ /’abbezn / /’eṯbzezn/

Lesson 12 109

Imperfect: P‛al ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el Sg.3.m. ‹þìğjflã ČêŠflã flğjđ㌠‹flŒğiòflã /nebboz/ /nerraḡ/ /nabbez/@ /neṯbzez/ 3.f. ‹þìği ñ ñČê‰ flğiđñŒ ‹flŒğiñ ñ /tebboz/ /terraḡ/ /tabbez/ /teṯbzez/ 2.m. ‹þìği ñ ñČê‰ flğiđñŒ ‹flŒğiñ ñ /tebboz/ /terraḡ/ /tabbez/ /teṯbzez/ 2.f. ğiñŒåm ‰ñČç³ ğiđñŒåm ñğiñŒđÀ‹åm /tebzīn/ /terḡīn@/ /tabzīn/ /teṯbazzīn/ 1.c. ‹þìği a aČê‰ flğiđaŒ ‹flŒğiñ a /’ebboz/@ /’erraḡ/@ /’abbez /@ /’eṯbzez/@ Pl.3.m. æŁë ğjfl㌠æŁìČçŠflã æŁë ğjđ㌠æŁë flãğiòŒđÀ‹ /nebzūn/@ /nerḡūn/ /nabzūn/@ /neṯbazzūn/@ 3.f. Œæõ şÀÀğjflã flãˆČčçå Œæõ şÀÀğjđã ‹æõ şŒđÀÀğiòflã /nebzån/ /nerḡån/ /nabzån/@ /neṯbazzån/ 2.m. æŁë ğiñŒ æŁìČç‰ ñ æŁë ğiđñŒ æŁë ñğiñŒđÀ‹ /tebzūn/ /terḡūn/@ /tabzūn/@ /teṯbazzūn@/ 2.f. Œæõ şÀÀğiñ ‡ñČčçå Œæõ şÀÀğiđñ ‹æõ şŒđÀğiññ /tebzån/ /terḡån/@ /tabzån/@ /teṯbazzån/ 1.c. ‹þìğjflã ČêŠflã flğjđ㌠‹flŒğiòflã /nebboz/@ /nerraḡ/@ /nabbez/@ /neṯbzez/@

Imperative: P‛al ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el Sg.2.m. ‹þìi Čê‰ Œflğiđa ağiñŒđÀ /boz/ /raḡ/@ /’abbez/@ /’eṯbaz / 2.f. ð‹þìi Čç‰ï ðŒflğiđa ðŒđÀ ağiñ /bozy/@ /raḡy/@ /’abbezy /@ /’eṯbaz y /@ Pl.2.m. ë‹þìi Čç‰ì ëŒflğiđa ëŒđÀ ağiñ /bozw/@ /raḡw/@ /’abbezw/@ /’eṯbaz w/ 2.f. åşí Ć‹þìi Čç´ĆÀÀ ‡đ åşí ĆŒflğiđa åşíĆ‹ŒđÀ ağiñ /bozȩ̄n /@ /raḡȩ̄n /@ /’abbezȩ̄n /@ /’eṯbazzȩ̄n /@

Lektion 11 110

Participles: P‛al ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el Part. Act. m. čib‹ a‰Čê Œflğjđß flßğiò‹flŒ /bå’ez/@ /rå’eḡ/ /mabbez/@ /meṯbzez/@ Part. Act. f. cõŒči dčÀÀğç‰ cõŒğjđß cõ‹ŒđÀ flßğiò /båzå/@ /rågå/@ /mabzå/@ /meṯbazzå/ @ Part. Pass. m. mŒiŒ ‰ČçÍn ŒđÀÀğjđß — /bzīz/ /rḡīḡ/ /mabbaz/@ @ Part. Pass. f. cõŒ mŒi dčÌn ‰Čç cõŒğjđß — /bzīzå/@ /rḡīḡå/@ /mabzå/@ @

Infinitive: P‛al ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el ŒđÀÀğjflß ÎŠflß ŁëŒčÀÀğjđß Łë‹õŒğiòflß /mebbaz/@ /merraḡ/@ /mabbåzū/@ /meṯbzåzū/@

12. 4. II-h Verbs

Verbs with /h/ as their 2 nd radical build regular forms. Forms with an /h/ which is not pronounced are also attested, though they are rare, e.g. Imp. ʾEṯpe. m.sg. Šžô đ…‹ağ /ʾezda hr/ (instead of: */ʾezdahr /) »Beware!« (√zhr ) Imp. ʾEṯpe. m.pl. 늞ô đ…‹ağ /ʾezda hrw/ »Beware!« (Mk 8,15); cf. by contrast the regularly built pf. ʾEṯpe. Šô …‹aŁ /ʾezḏahr /.

12. 5. Vocabulary

A. then /håydȩ̄n / åíĆğ†îô openly /barrånå’īṯ/ òmbčãŠđi simply /pšīqå’īṯ/ òmbčÔn’ Ï shout /g‛åṯå/ cČčòčÈç sweet /ḥalyå/ hčîÜ đy sadness /‛åqṯå/ cČčòÔčÇ What is this? /månåw / ččßìčä tear /dem‛ṯå/ cČčòÈßfl… as soon as /må ḏ-/ …@dčß (pl. /dem‛ȩ̄/ dĆÈşßfl… ) Speech /swådå / ač…ì sorrow /’eḇlå/ hčÜqa between /baynåṯ/ òčäîđi possessions /qenyånå/ dčäčîäÓ promise /šūwdåyå/ dčí č…ëŁì‘ğ fishing /ṣåyyaḏå/ a裆číú revered /yåqqīrå/ aÔđí outward /barråyå/ dčí Š đi departure /puršånå/ dčä葉ŁìÏ snare /paḥḥå/ dčzđÏ impiety /ruš‛å/ dčÈ‘Łë‰ bait /leqṭå/ dčİÔÛ desirable /rḡīḡ / Ínˉ harassed /šqīḥå/ dčÔnz‘

Lesson 12 111

Verb Forms

Pe. to die /nmūṯ/ ñ Łì ¸ : /mīṯ/ ònß Pa. to dwell /nḏayyar / Šđí đŁ†ã : /dayyar / Šđí đ… ʾAº. to give permission /nappes / flÐ đã : /’appes / flÏ đa Pe. to think (→ 13. 2.) /nernȩ̄/ dĆã Šflã : /rnå / dč㉠ʾAp̄. to annoy /n‛īq/ ÕnÈ ã : /’a‛īq/ ÕnÇ đa ʾEṯpa. to pray /neṯkaššåp̄/ ČÑ đ’ đ× ò flã : /’eṯkaššåp̄/ ČÑ đ’ đ× ñ a Pe. to judge /nḏūn/ æŁëŁ†ã : /dån / æč… Pe. to be moved /nzū‛/ ÊŁëŒã : /zå‛/ Ê‹õ Pe. to look /nḥūr/ ‰Łì− : /ḥår / Ščy Pe. to hunt /nṣūḏ/ Ł…Łëûã : /ṣåḏ / Ł… úõ ʾEṯpe. to rest /nettnīḥ/ |nãñòflã : /ʾettnīḥ/ |nãñña Pe. to ask /neš ʾal / Þbđ’flã : /š ʾȩ̄l / Þb Ć‘ Pe. to help (a-o) /ne‛dor/ ‰þë ğ† Èflã : /‛ḏar / ‰†Ç Pe. to remain /np̄ūš/ ”ŁìÐã : /påš / “čÏ Pe. to stand up /nqūm / âŁìÔã : /qåm/ áčÓ Pe. to see (→ 13. 2.) /neḥzȩ̄/ cĆŒzflã : /ḥzå/ cŒyõ Pe. to desire /nerraḡ/ ČêŠflã : /raḡ/ Čê‰ Pe. to scatter (a-o) /neḇdor/ ‰þëğ†Čjflã : /bḏar / ‰đ†Ł i

12. 6. Exercises A. Translate the following: (Jn 11,14)NóÛ@ònß@‰ŒčÈčÛ@òmbčÔn’Ï@Êþì’m@æþìôÛ@Šđßa@åíĆğ†îô 1 (VA 9-10)N nÇđ…ëča@ŁìÛčbđ’½@ðòđîÈči…@ëe@ìäßë@Nï‚äîlj@oÛ@Šđßañ…@⁄ğë@ğµ@ŠČßaë 2 @NNN Nï’ÐđäÛ@fîĆjđ@ZdôčÛđa…@ôĆŠi@dčzn’ß@Z ñŠßaë8 @òčäÇ@Z8 8ñđ†Üflí…@aŠqë@ZònČß…@ğôŠrđç @ñõŒy@åíĆ…@Ł†đ×8 3 @(AMS 434) @Næþìôòčäîđi@ač…ŁìÜđí@“čÏë@NfčyŁë‰ @òđàÜ‘đaë8 @8òđznãñña@Z´Üô @ñŠßa…@dčßë8 @æŠi@áđÛ@dčäč½@NóÛ@ìqflŠđÓ@dŽîčäčàÜčÇ@dĆíč…şëŁì‘ë@ZóÛ@ìÐđ’đ×ñaë@dčÔnz‘@dčjÜi@Ćç@ëČìžô@ìČàčÓ 4 @oã‰@_åđÜqa@ÙîđÜÇ@hÜy@åíĆ…@dčäč½@_æđòÔčÈÛ@òžãđa@Ínˉ@dčäđØíđa@_åđä葉ŁìÏ@ÙîđÜÇ@ány‰@Za Ôđí @dŽîčîßč…@ aĆ…ìşŽđi@ æþìôòčÈÌđië@ ZïôŁìȎnÏđa@ ´Üô@ ƒíađ†i@ dĆÈşßfl†i@ Ł†đ×ë@ NNN@ _åđäčîäÓ@ ”bčÏ@ åđ½đ… (MJ 6) @Nòmbčäčîqflú@åíĆ…@hčÛ@ZòmbčãŠÌđÏ@æ þìôàđÇ@Šđíđ…ë@ZòmbčãŠđi@æþìôÛ@ČÉđßò‘a@ZïôŁìÔnÇđa (AMS 432) Nşðđ†ma@åČß@æþì¨@ÖflŠčÏë@Zæþì¨@‰đ†đÈß@dčzn’ß@cĆñča…@dčßđ†Ç@Zæþì¨@dčãa@æĆač…@dô@dč’ôë 5 @Šğßa@âìÓ@dj@µ@ŠČßa@òÜÐã…@bia@òãa@†ğjÇ@däß@µ@ŠČßaë@íbì@diü@dşya@åß@†y@Þb‘ 6 @d߆Ç@dj@µ@Šğßa @dãa @âbÓë@dãa@ÝÐã@ðòßü@åí…@d߆Ç@òàÓë@òÜÐã@æbîè @´şäi‹@dya@µ (BH, KdT 37)܀còÛìжë@dãa@Šğßa@dßìÔi@æìôäß@†¡@cñìß@Ù׉†ã… (EA, KdD 5) NdşîÈİi@hşÀÀÜ؍@…ağú ܆dȑ뉅@còܶ@däݍë@dİÔÛ@‰†ği@ózÏ@ÝÇ ܆a†íú@…ağú…@a†ğíú 7

Lektion 11 112

B. Write out the following until familiar:

(KD 8) NìØÜô½@óàÇ@Ö…ğ‹@⁄@ğʆí@⁄@óÜ@åß@dän¹…@ìô…@aßaë 1 @ @ (EA, KdD 5) NdşîÈİi@hşÀÀÜ؍@…ağú ܆dȑ뉅@còܶ@däݍë@dİÔÛ@‰†ği@ózÏ@ÝÇ ܆a†íú@…ağú…@a†ğíú 2

(KD 8) . 1 (EA, KdD 5) . ܆ 2

ܿ ܿ (KD 8) . ܩܕܙ ܥ ܕ ܘܗܕ ܐܘ 1 ̈ ܕܐܨ ܿ ܆ܘܪܕ ܘ ܪܿ ܨ ܕܐܨܕܿ ܨܿ 2 (EA, KdD 5) .̈

Lesson 13 13. 1. III-y Verbs (including III-w and III-ʾÅlap ̄ )

In Syriac, verbs with an etymological /w/ or /ʾ/ as 3 rd radical have fallen together with class III-y verbs. (Only very few III-ʾÅlap̄ verbs moved into the tertiae infirmae class of verbs; these are built as strong verbs, like √by ʾ with: Pa. Pf. dđîđi /bayya / »he consoled«, ñbđîđi /bayya ʾṯ/ »she consoled«, etc. and Pa. Impf. dđîđÀÀČjã /nḇayya / »he shall console« (with final /a/ sound). The Perfec t: • Almost all III-y verbs in the pf. pe. have the thematic vowel /å/, e.g. hčÜç /glå / < */galay(a) / »he revealed« and dč߉ /rmå / »he threw« (transitive form); only a handful of verbs take /ī/, e.g. pŁ†y /ḥḏī / < */ḥaḏiy / »he rejoiced« (intransitive form), and in these cases, the form with /å/ is also attested, e.g. a裆y /ḥḏå / »he rejoiced«. • The 3.m.sg. perfect forms of all derived verb stems end in /-ī/, e.g. oÜđç /gallī/ (Pa. Pf. 3.m.sg.), oÜđçña /ʾeṯgallī / »he revealed« (ʾEṯpa. Pf. 3.m.sg.). • The 3.m.pl. perfect forms of all derived verb stems end in /-īw / < */iyū/ (e.g.. Pa. ìnÜđç /gallīw /).

The Imperfect : • The Impf. Pe. of both transitive and intransitive verbs ends in /-ȩ̄/, e.g. hÜÌflã /neḡlȩ̄/ »he shall reveal« dĆߊflã /nermȩ̄/ »he shall throw« aĆğ†zflã /neḥdȩ̄/ »he shall rejoice«. • As such, the distinction between transitive and intransitive verbs no longer holds in the imperfect, or for the derived verb forms. For this reason, the tables below continue the paradigm for the imperfect and the derived stems with hÜÌflã /neḡlȩ̄/ »he shall reveal«.

The Imperative : • The imp. pe. m.sg. of almost all verbs ends in /-ī/, e.g. oÜç /glī/ »reveal!« (transitive) or pŁ†y /ḥḏī / »rejoice!« (intransitive); only ïđ· /īmay / »swear!« (as well as o· /īmī / (√ymy ), likewise I-y) and ðđò‘a /ʾeštay / »drink!« ( √šty ) exhibit the /a/-vocalism typical of intransitive verbs. (√šty builds the perfect and imperative forms with a prosthetic vowel (→ 2. 3.): pf. pò‘a /ʾeštī/ < */štī/, Imp. ðđò‘a /ʾeštay / < */štay /). • In ES, the imp. ʾEṯpe. m.sg. sometimes takes the form ïîÜđçña /ʾeṯgal yy / (sic!) (analogous to strong verbs (cf. tòđÀÀ×ña /ʾeṯkatḇ /); the 1 st radical was vocalized, and a double Yōḏ written at the end). In WS, by contrast, it is usually /ʾeṯglay / (though sometimes also /ʾeṯgal y/). • In all other derived stems (except ʾEtpe.), the imp. m.sg. ends in /-å/, e.g. Pa. hčÜđç /gallå /. • The f.sg., m.pl. and f.pl. imperative forms have the same ending in all stems: f.sg. /-åy / (< */-ayi /), e.g. Pe. ïčÜç /glåy /, etc.; m.pl. /-åw / (WS /-aw /), e.g. Pe. ìčÜç /glåw /, etc.; f.pl. /-åyȩ̄n/, e.g. Pe. åşîĆîčÜç /glåyȩ̄n/, etc. 114 Lektion 13

Note: The paradigm of III-y verbs, e.g. hčÜç /glå / (√gly ) »to reveal« deviates significantly from the paradigm of strong verbs. The most important rules are: 1. In a few cases, the 3 rd radical in the paradigm takes the normal form of the consonant / y/, examples: Pe. Pf. 2.m.sg. òîđÜç /glayt / »you revealed« Pe. Pf. 3.f.pl. şïđÜç /glay / »they revealed« Pe. Impf. 3.f.pl. åşÀÀčîÜÌflã /neḡlyån / »they shall reveal« Pe. Imp. f.sg. ïčÜç /glåy / »reveal!« Pa. Part. Pass. ïđÜđÌß /mḡallay / »to be revealed« ʾAp̄. Part. Pass. dÜÌđß /maḡlȩ̄/ »to be revealed« 2. In the majority of forms, however, there is only a vowel reflex of the 3 rd radical. Examples: */aya / > /å/ in Pe. Pf. 3.m.sg. hčÜç glå < */galaya / */ey / > /ȩ̄/ (WS /-ī/) in Pe. Pf. 1.sg. òîÜç /glẹ̄ṯ/ (WS /glīṯ/) in Pe. Impf. 3.m.sg. hÜÌflã /neḡlȩ̄/ */ayū/ > /åw / in Pe. Pf. 3.m.pl. ìčÜç /glåw 38 (WS /glaw /) */iyū/ > /īw / in Pa. Pf. 3.m.pl. ìnÜđç /gallīw / */ayūn / > /ōn / (WS /-ūn /) in Pe. Impf. 3.m.pl. æþìÜÌflã /neḡlōn / (WS /neḡlūn /) */ayīn / > /ȩ̄n / in Pe. Part. Act. m.pl., St. abs. ´Üčç /gålȩ̄n/ */iy / > /ī/ in Pa. Pf. oÜđç /gallī/

According to the developments of the discussed above, the following rules of thumb can be applied: all forms which end in /-ūn / or /-īn / in the paradigm of strong verbs take the ending /-ōn / (WS /-ūn /) or /-ȩ̄n/ in class III- y. In other words: the /ō/- or /ē/- vocalism of such word forms can be taken to indicate the presence of an III-y root. Furthermore, the paradigm is characterized by numerous analogous approximations.

38 In addition to the type ìčÜç /glåw / (WS /glaw /) »they revealed«, the extended forms æŁëìčÜç /glåwūn / and æŁëhčÜç /glåʾūn / »they revealed« are also attested.

Lesson 13 115

The paradigm for III-y verbs is as follows, taking hčÜç /glå / »to reveal« and pŁ†y /ḥḏī / »to rejoice« as examples:

Perfect: P‛al Pa ‛‛ el ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el ʾEṯpa‛‛al Sg.3.m hčÜç pŁ†y oÜđç oÜËđa oÜğÀçña oÜđÀÀğÀçña . /glå/ /ḥḏī/ /gallī/ /’aḡlī / @ /ʾeṯglī/ /ʾeṯgallī/ çčÜò òđíŁ†fly òđîÜđç òđîÜËđa òđîÀÜđÀÀğÀçña òđîÀÜđÀÀğÀçña 3.f. /glåṯ/ /ḥeḏyaṯ/@ /galyaṯ/ /’aḡlyaṯ / /ʾeṯgalyaṯ/@ /ʾeṯgalyaṯ/ îđÜçò òmŁ†y ònÜđç ònÜËđa ònÜğÀçña ònÀÜđÀÀğÀçña 2.m. /glayt / /ḥḏīt/ /gallīt/ /’aḡlīt /@ /ʾeṯglīt/@ /ʾeṯgallīt/ ðò îđÜç ðòmŁ†y ðònÜđç ðònÜËđa ðònÜğÀçña ðònÀÜđÀÀğÀçña 2.f. /glayt y/@ /ḥḏīty/ /gallīty/@ /’aḡlīty/@ /ʾeṯglīty/@ /ʾeṯgallīty/ îÜçò ČòmŁ†y ònÜđç ònÜËđa ònÜğÀçña ònÀÜđÀÀğÀçña 1.c. /glẹ̄ṯ/ /ḥḏīṯ/@ /gallīṯ/ /’aḡlīṯ/ /ʾeṯglīṯ/@ /ʾeṯgallīṯ/ Pl.3.m. çčÜì ìmŁ†y ìnÜđç ìnÜËđa ìnÜğÀçña ìnÀÜđÀÀğÀçña /glåw / /ḥḏīw/ @ /gallīw/@ /’aḡlīw /@ /ʾeṯglīw/@ /ʾeṯgallīw/ 3.f. çđÜşo şČðŁ†y şoÜđç şoÜËđa şoÜğÀçña şoÀÜđÀÀğÀçña /glay / /ḥḏī/ /gallī/ /’aḡlī/@ /ʾeṯglī/@ /ʾeṯgallī/ 2.m. æþëò çđÜî æþëòČíŁ†y æþëònÜđç æþëònÜËđa æþëònÜğÀçña æþëònÜđÀÀğÀçña /glaytōn/ /ḥḏītōn/@ /gallītōn/ /’aḡlītōn/ /ʾeṯglītōn/ /ʾeṯgallītōn/@@ 2.f. åíĆò çđÜî åíĆòČíŁ†y åíĆònÜđç åíĆònÜËđa åíĆònÜğÀçña åíĆònÜđÀÀğÀçña /glaytȩ̄n / /ḥḏītȩ̄n/@ /gallītȩ̄n / /’aḡlītȩ̄n/ /ʾeṯglītȩ̄n/ /ʾeṯgallītȩ̄n/@ 1.c. çđÜ´ @ åČíŁ†y @ ³Üđç @ ³ÜËđa ³ÜğÀçña @ ³ÜđÀÀğÀçña @ /glayn / /ḥḏīn/ /gallīn/ /’aḡlīn / /ʾeṯglīn/ /ʾeṯgallīn/

116 Lektion 13

Imperfect: P‛al Pa ‛‛ el ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el ʾEṯpa‛‛al Sg.3.m. hÜÌflã hÜđÀÀ Čèã đãÌhÜ hÜğÀçòflã hĆÀÜđÀÀğÀçòflã /neḡlȩ̄/@ /nḡallȩ̄/@ /naḡlȩ̄/ @ /neṯglȩ̄/ /neṯgallȩ̄/ 3.f. hÜË ñ hÜđÀÀ Čçñ hÜ Ëđñ hÜğÀçññ hĆÀÜđÀÀğÀçññ /teḡlȩ̄/@ /tḡallȩ̄/@ /taḡlȩ̄/ @ /teṯglȩ̄/ /teṯgallȩ̄/ 2.m. hÜË ñ hÜđÀÀ Čçñ hÜ Ëđñ hÜğÀçññ hĆÀÜđÀÀğÀçññ /teḡlȩ̄/@ /tḡallȩ̄/ @ /taḡlȩ̄/ @ /teṯglȩ̄/ /teṯgallȩ̄/ 2.f. ñÜË´ ´ÜđÀÀ Čçñ ËđñÜ´ ´ÜğÀçññ ´ĆÀÜđÀÀğÀçññ /teḡlȩ̄n /@ /tḡallȩ̄n / @ /taḡlȩ̄n / @ /teṯglȩ̄n / /teṯgallȩ̄n / 1.c. hÜË a hÜđÀÀ ğça hÜ Ëđa hÜğÀçña hĆÀÜđÀÀğÀçña /’eḡlȩ̄/@ /’egallȩ̄/ @ /’aḡlȩ̄/ /’eṯglȩ̄/@ /’eṯgallȩ̄ /@ Pl.3.m. æþìÜÌ flã æþìÜđÀÀČèã æþìÜÌ đã æþìÜğÀçòflã æþìÀÜđÀÀğÀçòflã /neḡlōn /@ /nḡallōn / @ /naḡlōn / @ /neṯglōn /@ /neṯgallōn / 3.f. åşÀÀčîÜÌ flã åşÀÀčîÜđÀÀČèã åşÀÀčîÜÌ đã åşÀÀčîÜđÀÀğçòflã åşÀÀčîÜđÀÀğçòflã /neḡlyån/@ /nḡalyån/ @ /naḡlyån/ @ /neṯgalyån/@ /neṯgalyån/ 2.m. æþìÜËñ æþìÜđÀÀČçñ æþìÜËđñ æþìÜğÀçññ æþìÀÜđÀÀğÀçññ /teḡlōn /@ /tḡallōn / @ /taḡlōn / @ /teṯgalōn / /teṯgallōn / 2.f. åşÀÀčîÜËñ åşÀÀčîÜđÀÀČçñ åşÀÀčîÜËđñ åşÀÀčîÜđÀÀğçññ åşÀÀčîÜđÀÀğçññ /teḡlyån/@ /tḡalyån/ @ /taḡlyån/ @ /teṯgalyån/@ /teṯgalyån/ 1.c. hÜÌflã hÜđÀÀ ğèã đãhÜÌ hÜğÀçòflã hĆÀÜđÀÀğÀçòflã /neḡlȩ̄/@ /nḡallȩ̄/ /naḡlȩ̄/ /neṯglȩ̄/@ /neṯgallȩ̄/@

Imperative: P‛al Pa ‛‛ el ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el ʾEṯpa‛‛al Sg.2.m. oÜç čÜđçh hčÜËđa ÜđÀï ğÀçña 39 hčÜđÀÀğÀçña /glī/@ /gallå/ @ /’aḡlå/ @ /’eṯgaly/ /’eṯgallå/ 2.f. ïčÜç ïčÜđç ïčÜËđa ïčÜğÀçña ïčÜđÀÀğÀçña /glay /@ /gallåy / /’aḡlåy / @ /’eṯglåy/@ /’eṯgallåy /@ Pl.2.m. ìčÜç ìčÜđç ìčÜËđa ìčÜğÀçña ìčÜđÀÀğÀçña /glåw /@ /gallåw / @ /’aḡlåw / @ /’eṯglåw/@ /’eṯgallåw / 2.f. åşîĆîčÜç åşîĆîčÜđç åşîĆîčÜËđa åşîĆîčÜğÀçña åşîĆîčÜđÀÀğÀçña /glåyȩ̄n/ /gallåyȩ̄n/ /’aḡlåyȩ̄n/ @ /’eṯglåyȩ̄n/@ /’eṯgallåyȩ̄n/@

39 In OS ïîÜđçña /ʾeṯgal yy / is also attested .

Lesson 13 117

Participles:

P‛al Pa ‛‛ el ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el ʾEṯpa‛‛al Part. Act. m. Üčçh hÜđÀČÀèß hÜČèđß hÜğÀçòflß hÜđÀÀğÀçòflß /gålȩ̄/ @ /mḡallȩ̄/ @ /maḡlȩ̄/ @ /meṯglȩ̄/@ /meṯgallȩ̄/@ Part. Act. f. čîÜčçh hčîÜđÀČÀèß hčîÜČèđß dčîÜđÀÀğÀçòflß dčîÜđÀÀğÀçòflß /gålyå / /mḡalyå / @ /maḡlyå/ @ /meṯgalyå/@ /meṯgalyå/@ Part. Pass. m. hÜç ïđÜđÀČÀèß ïđÜČèđß — — /glȩ̄/ @ /mḡallay / @ /maḡlay/ @ Part. Pass. f. dčîÜđç dčîÜđÀČÀèß dčîÜČèđß — — /galyå / /mḡalyå / @ /maḡlyå / @ @ @

Infinitive: P‛al Pa ‛‛ el ʾAº‛el ʾEṯp‛el ʾEṯpa‛‛al hčÜČèflß ŁìîčÜđÀÀČèß ŁìîčÜČèđß ŁìîčÜğÀÀçòflß ŁìîčÜđÀÀğÀçòflß /meḡlå/ @ /mḡallåyū/@ /maḡlåyū/@ /meṯglåyū/@ /meṯgallåyū/@

13. 2. III-y Verbs with Object Suffixes

The attachment of object suffixes to weak verbs is straightforward, with the exception of the class III-y. For III-y verbs with suffixes, the following characteristics should be noted:

1. Verb forms ending on a consonant are attached to suffixes in the same way as strong verbs, e.g. Pf. Pe. 3.f.sg. Ćô2 č߉ò /rmåṯȩ̄h / »she threw him / it« (cf. Pf. Pe. 3.f.sg. ôĆòqđ2 ò×2 /kṯaḇṯȩ̄h /). As a result, the Pf. Pa. / ʾAp̄. 3.f.sg. has the same form prior to a suffix as it has without a suffix, e.g. Pa. Ćô2òčîß ‰ /ramyåṯȩ̄h / »she threw him« (in contrast to ôĆòqflòđ×2 /katteḇṯȩ̄h /).

2. The following applies for verb forms ending with a vowel: • /-å/ remains unchanged, e.g. Pf. Pe. č߉ /rmån y/ »he threw me « Inf. Pe. (vor /-ḵōn /, /-ḵȩ̄n/) æþì‚ččߊflß mermåḵōn • The forms with /-y-/ , e.g. Pf. Pa. 3.m.sg. đî߉ /ramyan y/ (except before /-ḵōn /, /-ḵȩ̄n/). Inf. Pe., e.g. đîߊflß /mermyan y/.

3. The following applies for verb forms ending with a : /-åw / [WS /-aw /] (Pf. Pe. 3.m.pl., Imp. m.pl.) > /-aʾū-/ (more rarely: /-awu-/) ïžôŁëb č߉ /rmå’ūhy/ »they threw him« / »throw him!«

118 Lektion 13

/-īw/ (Pf. Pa. 3.m.pl.) > /-yū-/ îđߣìãï ‰ /ramyūn y/ »they threw me« /-ay / (Pf. Pe. 3.f.pl.) > /-ayå-/ čîđ߇ /rmayån y/ »they threw me « /-åy / (Imp. Pe. f.sg.) > /-åʾī-/ (more rarely: /-åyi-/) fmbč߉ /rmå’īh / »throw her!«

The paradigm fof III-y verbs with suffixes is as follows:

P‛al 1.c.sg. 2.m.sg. 2.f.sg. Sg.3.m. dč߉ č߉ č߉ƒ ï‚ č߉ /rmå / /rmån y/ @ /rmåḵ/ @ /rmåḵy/ 3.f. č߉ò ïã đòč߉ „Ččòč߉ ïĆòčß‰Č /rmåṯ/ @ /rmåṯany/ @ /rmåṯåḵ/ @ /rmåṯȩ̄ḵy/ 2.m. ò îđ߉ ïã čòîđ߉ — — /rmayt / /rmaytån y/ @ 2.f. ðò îđ߉ mòîđ߉ — — /rmayt y/ /rmaytīny/ @ 1.c. ò îĆ߉ — „ČčòîĆ߉ ïĆČòîĆ߉ /rmẹ̄ṯ/ /rmẹ̄ṯåḵ/ /rmẹ̄ṯȩ̄ḵy/ @ P‛al 1.c.sg. 2.m.sg. 2.f.sg. Pl.3.m. ìč߉ ïãŁëbč߉ „Łëbč߉ ïŁëbč߉ /rmåw / /rmå’ūny/ /rmå’ūḵ/ /rmå’ūḵy/ 3.f. ïđ߇ čîđ߇ ƒčîđ߇ ï‚Ćîđ߇ /rmay / /rmayån y/ /rmayåḵ/ /rmayȩ̄ḵy/ 2.m. æþëòîđ߉ čãþëòÀ îđ߉ — — /rmaytōn/ /rmaytōnån y/ 2.f. åíĆòîđ߉ — — — /rmaytȩ̄n/ 1.c. ´đ߉ — ƒčä îđ߉ Ćäï‚ îđ߉ /rmayn / @ /rmaynåḵ/ /rmaynȩ̄ḵy/

Lesson 13 119

P‛al Suff.3.m.sg. 3.f.sg. 1.c.pl. 2.m.pl. Sg.3.m. dč߉ ïžôîč߉ fč߉ åč߉ æþì‚č߉ /rmå / /rmåy hy / /rmåh / /rmån / /rmåḵōn / 3.f. č߉ò ôĆ č߉ò eČčò č߉ æđòč߉ æþìòč߉ /rmåṯ/ @ /rmåṯȩ̄h / /rmåṯåh / /rmåṯan / /rmåṯḵōn / 2.m. ò îđ߉ ïžôí čò îđ߉ ğô čò îđ߉ æčòîđ߉ — /rmayt / /rmaytåy hy / /rmaytåh / /rmaytån / 2.f. ðò îđ߉ ïžôì òm îđ߉ ğómò îđ߉ åmòîđ߉ — /rmayt y/ /rmaytīwhy / /rmaytīh/ /rmaytīn/ 1.c. ò îĆ߉ ôĆò îĆ߉ ğôČčò îĆ߉ — æþìòîĆ߉ /rmẹ̄ṯ/ /rmẹ̄ṯȩ̄h / /rmẹ̄ṯåh/ /rmẹ̄ṯḵōn /@ P‛al 3.m.sg. 3.f.sg. 1.c.pl. 2.m.pl. Pl.3.m. ìč߉ ïžôŁëbč߉ eŁëbč߉ æŁëbč߉ æþìŁëbč߉ /rmåw / /rmå’ūhy/ /rmå’ūh/ /rmå’ūn/ /rmå’ūḵōn / 3.f. ïđ߇ ïžôîčîđ߇ ğóčîđ߇ åčîđ߇ — /rmay / /rmayåy hy / /rmayåh / /rmayån / 2.m. æþëòîđ߉ ïžôîčãþëòîđ߉ fčãþëòîđ߉ åčãþëòîđ߉ — /rmaytōn/ /rmaytōnåy hy / /rmaytōnåh / /rmaytōnån / 2.f. åíĆòîđ߉ — — — — /rmaytȩ̄n/ 1.c. ´đ߉ ïžôîčäîđ߉ fčäîđ߉ — æþì‚čäîđ߉ /rmayn / @ /rmaynåy hy / /rmaynåh / @ /rmaynåḵōn / @

120 Lektion 13

Imperative: P‛al 1.c.sg. 2.m.sg. 2.f.sg. 2.m.pl. Sg.2.m. o߉ n߉ — — — /rmī/ /rmīny/ 2.f. ïč߉ mbč߉ — — — /rmåy / /rmå’īny/ P‛al 1.c.sg. 2.m.sg. 2.f.sg. 2.m.pl. Pl.2.m. ìč߉ ïãŁëbč߉ — — — /rmåw / /rmå’ūny/ 2.f. ´Ćîč߇ čäĆîč߇ — — — /rmåyȩ̄n / @ /rmåyȩ̄nån y/

Imperative:

P‛al 3.m.sg. 3.f.sg. 1.c.pl. 2.m.pl. Sg.2.m. o߉ ïžôìn߉ fn߉ ³ß‰ — /rmī/ /rmīwhy / /rmīh/ /rmīn/ 2.f. ïč߉ ïžôìmbč߉ fmbč߉ åmbč߉ —@ /rmåy / /rmå’īwhy / /rmå’īh/ /rmå’īn/ P‛al 3.m.sg. 3.f.sg. 1.c.pl. 2.m.pl. Pl.2.m. ìč߉ ïžôŁëbč߉ eŁëbč߉ æŁëbč߉ — /rmåw / /rmå’ūhy/ /rmå’ūh/ /rmå’ūn/ 2.f. ´Ćîč߇ ïžôîčäĆîđ߇ ğóÀčäĆîč߇ åčäĆîđ߇ — @ /rmåyȩ̄n / @ /rmayȩ̄nåy hy / /rmåyȩ̄nåh /@ /rmayȩ̄nån /

Infinitive: P‛al 1.sg. 2.m.sg. 2.f.sg. 3.m.sg. 3.f.sg. 1.c.pl. 2.m.pl. dčߊflß đîߊflß ƒčîߊflß ï‚Ćîߊflß óĆîߊflß fčîߊflß åđîߊflß æþì‚čߊflß /mermå / /mermyan y/ /mermyåḵ/ /mermyȩ̄ḵy/ /mermyȩ̄h / /mermyåh/ /mermyan / /mermåḵōn /

Lesson 13 121

13. 3. Cardinal Numbers

The numbers 1 – 10 are formally nominals in the St. abs. They are for the most part the same as in other semitic languages:

masc. fem. 1 Ł†đy /ḥaḏ / aŁč†y @/ḥḏå / 2@åíƇñ /trȩ̄n/ åíĆñ‡đñ /tartȩ̄n/ 3 cČčòčÛñ /tlåṯå/ òčÛñ /tlåṯ/ 4 dčÈği‰đa /ʼarb‛å/ ÉđÀÀği‰đa /ʼarba‛/ 5 dč’àđy /ḥamšå/ “flàđy /ḥammeš/ 6 cčò‘ğ /štå /, cčò‘ağ /ʼeštå / òfl‘ /šeṯ/ 7 dčÈrđ‘ /šaḇ‛å/ ÉđÀr‘ /šḇa‛/ 8 dčîäčßñ /tmånyå / dĆäčßñ /tmånȩ̄/ 9 dčÈ‘ñ /teš‛å/ Éđđ‘ñ /tša‛/ 10 aŠŽflÇ /‛esrå / ŠđŽÇ /‛sar /

Notes on syntax: a裆y /Ł†đy @ /ḥaḏ /, /ḥḏå / »one« often precedes the counted object, e.g. dčÈč‘@a裆y /ḥḏå šå‛å/ »one hour«. When following a noun, it can also function as an indefinite article, e.g. Ł†đy@aŠrđç /gaḇrå ḥaḏ / »a man«. In conjunction with the numbers 2 – 10, the counted object is usually given in the St. abs. For the numbers 3 – 10, formally feminine numerals are usually used with masculine nouns, and masculine numerals with feminine nouns (so-called gender polarity , also encountered in most other semitic langauges), e.g. åmˆrđç@cČčòčÛñ /tlåṯå gaḇrīn / »three men«, ³ş’flã@òčÛñ /tlåṯ neššīn / »three women«.

The formation of the numbers 11-19 is non-uniform. The main forms are:

m. f. 11 đŽÇŠ đ†y2 /ḥḏa‛sar / aĆˆŽ Çđ†y2 @/ḥḏa‛srȩ̄/ aĆˆŽflÇ đ†y2 @/ḥḏa‛esrȩ̄/ 12 ŠđŽÇƉñ /tre‛sar /@aĆˆŽÇ ñ‡đñđ /tarta‛srȩ̄/ aĆˆŽ flÇ đñ‡đñ /tarta‛esrȩ̄/ @ 13 ŠđŽÇ đòčÛñ2 /tlåṯa‛sar /@aĆˆŽÇ đ òčÛñ2 /tlåṯa‛srȩ̄/ aĆˆŽ flÇ đòčÛñ2 /tlåṯa‛esrȩ̄/ @ 14 ŠđŽÈđÀÀği‰đa /’arba‛sar / aĆˆŽÈđÀÀği‰đa /’arba‛srȩ̄/ ŠđŽÇ đò2 Èđi‰đa /’arba‛ṯa‛sar 40 /@ aĆˆŽ flÈği‰đa /’arb‛esrȩ̄/

40 Other variations are: ŠđŽÇ đòği‰đa /ʼarbṯa ‛sar /, ŠđŽÇ đòği fl‰đa /ʼarebṯa ‛sar /.

122 Lektion 13

15 ŠđŽÈđ’àđy /ḥamša‛sar / aĆˆŽÈđ’àđy /ḥamša‛srȩ̄/ ŠđŽÇ đò’flàđy /ḥammešta‛sar / @ aĆˆŽflÈđ’àđy /ḥammeša‛esrȩ̄/ @ 16 ŠđŽÇ đ òfl‘ñ /šetta‛sar / aĆˆŽÇ đ2 fl‘ñò /šetta‛srȩ̄/ aĆˆŽflÇ đñò2 fl‘ /šetta‛esrȩ̄/ @ 17 ŠđŽ ÈđÀr‘ /šḇa‛sar / aĆˆŽ ÈđÀr‘ /šḇa‛srȩ̄/ ŠđŽ Çđò ÈđÀr‘ /šḇa‛ta‛sar / @ aĆˆŽ flÈđÀr‘ /šḇa‛esrȩ̄/ @ 18 ŠđŽÈđäčßñ /tmåna‛sar/ aĆˆŽÈđäčßñ /tmåna‛srȩ̄/ ŠđŽÇ đòäčßñ /tmånta‛sar / @ aĆˆŽflÈđäčßñ /tmåna‛esrȩ̄/ @ 19 ŠđŽ Èđđ‘ñ /tša‛sar / aĆˆŽ Èđđ‘ñ /tša‛srȩ̄/ ŠđŽ Çđò Èđđ‘ñ /tša‛ta‛sar /@ aĆˆŽ flÈđđ‘ñ /tša‛esrȩ̄/@

The multiples of ten between 20 - 90 take the ending /-īn/ (m.pl., St. abs.).

20 åmŠŽflÇ /‛esrīn / 60 åmò‘ /štīn /, åmò‘a /ʼeštīn / 30 @åmòčÛñ /tlåṯīn / 70 ³Èrđ‘ /šaḇ‛īn / 40 ³Èği‰đa @ /ʼarb ‛īn / 80 ³äčßñ /tmånīn / 50 ³’àđy /ḥamšīn / 90 ³È‘flñ /teš‛īn / Higher numbers:

100 cbčß /måʾ/ 1000 ČÑÛča , dčÀÀÐÛđa /ʼålep̄/, /ʼalpå/ 200 åíĆČñbđß /måʾṯȩ̄n/ 2000 ³ÐÛđa@åíƇñ /trȩ̄n ʼålp̄īn / 300 cbčßòčÛñ @ /tlåṯmåʾ/ 10000 Łìğifl‰ /rebbū/, cČčñìğifl‡ /rebwåṯå/ etc. etc.

In compound expressions of number, the higher unit precedes the lower unit; the units are joined with /w-/ »and«, e.g. a裆yë@åmŠŽflÇë@cbčàÈđÀÀği‰đa /ʾarba‛må ʾ w-‛esrīn wa-ḥḏå / »421«.

13. 4. Ordinal Numbers

Syriac only has specific ordinal forms for 1st – 10 th . They all exhibit the nisbe-ending /-åyå / (→ 4. 1. 4 (No. 3)). From »3rd « onward, the ordinal numbers are built according to the nominal form dčîčÜnİÓ /qṭīlåyå/:

m. f. 1. dčîčߣ†đÓ /qaḏmåyå / cčòîčߣ†đÓ /qaḏmåytå / 2. dččäčí‰ñ /trayyånå / cČčònäčí‰ñ /trayyånīṯå/ 3. dčíČčònÛñ /tlīṯåyå / cčòíČčònÛñ /tlīṯåytå / 4. dčîčÈnği‰đa /’arbī ‛åyå/ cčòîčÈnği‰đa /’rbī ‛åytå/

Lesson 13 123

dčîčÈnği‰ /rbī ‛åyå / cčòîčÈnği‰ /rbī ‛åytå / 5. dčîčč’n» /ḥmīšåyå / cčòîč’n» /ḥmīšåytå / 6. dčíČčòmò‘ /šṯīṯåyå / cčòíČčòmò‘ /šṯīṯåytå / 7. dčîčÈnr‘ /šḇī ‛åyå / cčòîčÈnr‘ /šḇī ‛åytå / 8. dčîčänßñ /tmīnåyå / cčòîčänßñ /tmīnåytå / 9. dčîčÈn‘ñ /tšī ‛åyå / cčòîčÈn‘ñ /tšī ‛åytå / 10. dčíŽÇ /‛sīråyå / cčòíŽÇ /‛sīråytå /

For values higher than »10«, cardinal numbers are used instead of ordinals. Ordinal numbers are also commonly used in place of cardinal numbers for values lower than 10. To specify dates, /d-/ (determinative pronoun) + cardinal number is often used, e.g. åíƇñ đ…@dčßìčí2 /yawmå ḏa-ṯrȩ̄n/ (= @dčäčí‰ñ @dčßìčí /yawmå ṯrayyånå /) »the second day«.

13. 5. Other Expressions of Number

• Fractions are built on the basis of the morpheme type */quṭlå/, e.g. dč’ߣ yì /ḥumšå/ »one fifth«. • Distributive numerals are formed through the repetition of cardinal numbers, e.g. ÉđÀr’ÈđÀr‘ /šḇa‛-šḇa‛/ »seven by seven«. • Adverbial numerals (»x number of times«) are mostly expressed with the constructions dčäq‹ /zaḇnå/ or cčòÀžäđÀq‹ /zḇa nttå / »time«, e.g. åđÀqŒđi /ba-zḇan / »Once«. »Once« or »twice« can also be expressed using the numeral adverbs together with »times«, but without dčäq‹ /zaḇnå/ or cčòÀžäđÀq‹ /zḇa nttå /, e.g. a裆y /ḥḏå / »once«, åíĆñ‡đñ2 /tartȩ̄n/ »twice«. The days of the week are as follows:

Monday dčÀÀğjđ’ği @åí Ƈñ /trȩ̄n b-šabbå/ Tuesday dčÀÀğjđ’ği @òčÛñ /tlåṯ b-šabbå/ Wednesday dčÀÀğjđ’ğj ÈđÀÀği‰đa /’arba‛ b-šabbå/ Thursday dččÀÀğjđ’ğj’flàđy /ḥammeš b-šabbå/ Friday cčòqŁëŠÇ /‛rūḇtå/ Saturday cČčòğjđ‘ /šabbṯå/ Sunday @ dččÀÀğjđ’ği@Ł†đy /ḥaḏ b-šabbå/

13. 6. Vocabulary

A. woe! /wåy/ ðë pure /daḵyå/ dčîđ… thinking /ḥuššåḇå/ dčrč‘Łìy light /nahhīrå/ aôđã glittering /neṭḥå/ dčzİflã skillful /mhīr/ ôß study /yulpånå/ dčä čÀÀÐÛŁìí @ treatment /dūbbårå/ aŠčÀÀğiŁë … belly /karså/ d荩đ× manner (from åđÀÀ Øíđa ) /’aykannåyūṯå/ cČčñŁìîčäđÀÀØíđa oven /’attōnå / dčãþëñđa shoe /msånå/ dčäčŽß

124 Lektion 13

couple (< gr.) /zåwgå/ dččÀÀğçëõ‹ Paradise /pardayså/ dčŽí đğ…ŠđÏ September /’īlōl/ ÞþìÜ Čí a victory /zåḵūṯå/ cČčñŁì×õ‹ eminent /m‛alyå/ dčîÜđÈß October /tešrīn qaddīm/ † đÓ åČí Š‘ñ

Verb Forms Pe. to direct (a-o) /neṯroṣ/ úþë ‰òflã : /traṣ/ ú‰ñ ʾEṯpa. to be amazed /neddammar/Šđß đČ…òflã : /ʾeddammar/ Šđß đČ…ña ʾAp̄. to admonish /nartȩ̄/ cĆñŠ đã : /’artī/ pñ‰ đa Pe. to build /neḇnȩ̄/ dĆäČjflã : /bnå/ dčäi Pe. to drive away (a-o) /neḏḥoq/ ÖþìyŁ†flã : /dḥaq/ Õđy… @ Pa. to show /nḥawwī/ pì đ− : /ḥawwī/ pì đy Pe. to rise (a-a) /neḏnaḥ/ |đã Ł†flã : /dnaḥ/ |đã… Pa. to be proved /nšarrar/ ‰Š đ’ã : /šarrar/ ‰Š đ‘ Pe. to grow up /nerbȩ̄/ dĆÀÀğiŠflã : /rḇå/ dčq‰ Pa. to kiss /nnaššeq Õfl’ đä ã : /naššeq/ Õfl’ đã ʾEṯpe. to be burnt /neštḡar/ ŠđÀÀČçò’flã : /ʾeštḡar/ ŠđÀÀ Čç ò‘a ʾEṯpe. to be supposed /nestḇar/ ŠđÀÀ qòŽflã : /ʾestḇar/ ŠđÀÀ qòa Pe. to fear (a-a) /neqnaṭ/ Áđä Ôflã : /qnaṭ/ ÁđäÓ Pa. to be displaced /nšannī/ oä đ’ã : /šannī/ oä đ‘ Pe. to carry (a-o) /nesbol/ Þþì ğj Žflã /sḇal/ ÝđÀÀ Čj

13. 7. Exercises

A. Translate the following: @ @ (Lk 11,47)@Næþìãa @ìÜİđÓ @æþìØşîôčqa đ…@NdŽÀnrãğ đ…@aĆˆrđÓ@æþëòãa@´Ćäčqğ…@Næþì¨@ðë2 1 (AMS 435) NôòÔfl’đãë@fşíƆma@ÝđÇ@dčnßëa@ôòrđŽã @Zåşnä‘@òčÛñ@Šđi@c ìôë@dčq‰đ…@dčßë8 2 (AMS 431) NdčänÏŁë‰@ğóč@ôñòžãđaë@Z÷þìþë…þëañ@óđ…@Ł†đy@aŠČjđç@cČìžô@òma @3 (AMS @NóĆi@ëČìžô@åmŠßđ…òflß@dşÀÀčîđä‘@“flàđy@óÛ@cČìžô@òma…@ëe@ƒíđa@ZdčîÜđİÛ@óÛ@ëČìžô@åíĆğŒčy…@´Üíđaë 4 @ @ 435) (AMS 435) @NóĆàđÇ@ëČìžô@³ÐÜğÀÀčí…@´Üíđa@æþìôܨ@ÑÜđß…@dčßbčß@c ìô@Za裆y@čÅÀžäđ‘@dčßbčß@c8 ìôđ…@dčßë8 5 (AMS 443) @Nåşnßìčí@łčÄÀčÛñ@dčãþëñđa@Šđçò’flã…@ZdčØÜđß@Ł†đÔČÀÀÏ@åíƆîô 6 NoÜĆô@ŠđÀğiNČÑflìčí@ŠđÀÀği @܆cìžô@ŠđÀÀqòŽflßë@NåmòčÛ ñ@³şä‘@ŠđÀÀği@ƒíđa@cìžô@ïžôëČčòma@Êþì’m@åí Ć…@Łìô2 @7 (Lk 3,23) @aÐđ‘@åğß@dčäčîqflú@Ýİflß@ZóÛ@cČìžô@Ém Ł†m Í@Ł†Ó@åČß…@dčäíđa@ZóĆàđÈÛ@dôčÛđa@ČÕđy…@hčÛ@ZŠđßa@÷þìÛìčÏë 8 @dŽzİflã@óĆäflß@³−Łč…ë@Zdčîrđç@dčÏþëúŠđÐi@åíĆìčyòflß @âfl†flß@åğß@dŽÇ Ł†m Í@cČčñŁìîrđç@åíğĆ…@åČß@NdşÀčîđÀ…@dĆjč‘Łìyë @hčÛ…@dčäíđa@æþìôÛ@ğÊđ†čí@åíĆ…@hčÛ@Zôđã…@dčäíđa@æþìôği@åğß@“flğçŠđß@NcğĆìč‘@ìČžô@cČčñŁìğjîđİÛđ…@³Çğ…2 ìčß…

Lesson 13 125

@ñŁìîčäđØíđa…@ æûÛ aña@ ZdčîÜđÈß@ aŠčiŁëŁ†Û đ…@ ZcČčòÜflß@ ïôìčÜÇ đ…@ ZdčÏþëúŠđÏ@ ìČžô@ dčîrđç…@ Ýİflß@ Nôß (MJ 9) N‰Šđ’ã@aƆô@ð ô@dčàÜđ‘@dčäčîqflûÛđ…ë@ZŠđßbĆã@ôñŁìîrđç8 (AMS 448) NôĆ@ ñìÛ@åČß@ìnäđ‘@cČčòği‰Č @cČčòÜĞy fl†ği@åíĆğ…@æþìäflô2 9 @…ìčÓ…@É‘ñ@òä‘@dφi@ğóíòma…@dşîãìí†i@däßñë@cbßdäßñ@òä‘… @†Ó@å튑ñ@€Šíbi 10 @³jmûäi@däßìí@åmŠàÇ…@dşî−†ß@dşya…@dî‘ìä×@Ndäô@dyi@ói@†yë @åmŠŽÈi@dØÜß@ÙÜß N³jmûã…@ğóÜí…@dÏìԎîÏa@ÉĆ‘þìô@ðŠß@dôÛa…@d»‰ë@d’m†Ó@â†Ó@ìiŠÓ@Ndυ@còžäí†ß (SN 56)

B. Write out the following until familiar: @ôñìÜîİi… @ Ï@ ìČôë@ Nóíìç@ c‹ìèië@ Ý×aòß@ óíŠi@ aŠßòi@ däß@ ÝÇ…@ Šßaña@ åíŠy⁄ 1 @NáÜÈÛ@ó‘…a@Šİãòã@däØía…@⁄a@Nğóíòía@aŠiòß…@dß@ìğô@Ý×aòã@åØía…@ïğô@ÝÇ@ìÛ@díëŠi… @⁄@ åí…@ ìğô@ Nìô@ däÜ×aòß@ åğß@ ìğô@ åÏaë@ Næìôí‰òi@ díìç@ Šİãòß@ ói…@ ìğô@ däØôë (BH, KdT 9f.) ܀däÜ×aòß

1 . . (BH, KdT 9f.) ܀ .

ܼ ܘܗܘܼ . ܙܘ ܐ ܕ ܐܬܐ 1 ܐܕ ܐ .ܐܿ ܕ ܘܗܿ ܐ ܐܕ ܝܗܿ ܘܕ ܗܬܕ ܿ ܘܗܿ ܐܘ .ܢܘܪ ܕ ܘܗܿ ܗܘ . ܕܐ ܿ (BH, KdT 9f.) ܀ ܐ ܕ ܘܗ ܘܗ ܐ

Lesson 14 14. 1. Verbs with Two Weak Radicals

Some verbs have two weak radicals. The paradigm for these verbs combines the characteristics of two different classes of weak verb. The particular rules of both classes must be observed. The following in particular should be noted: a) Verbs II-ʾÅlap̄, which are at the same time III-y b) Verbs II -w, which are at the same time III-y. For II-ʾÅlap̄/III-y verbs, the basic form wird of the pf. pe. is built according to the type cbč× /kå ʾ/ (√kʾy »to reprove, to rebuke«), and the impf. according to the type cbĆ‚flã /neḵȩ̄ʾ/ »he shall rebuke«. The imp. pe. is pb× /kʾī/ »rebuke!«, the inf. pe. cbč‚flflß /meḵåʾ/ »to rebuke«. In II-w/III-y verbs, the middle radical /w/ is always treated as strong, and thus always appears as a consonant. Consequently, their paradigm follows the III-y verb forms, e.g. cìÛ /lwå 41 / : cĆìÜflã /nelwȩ̄/ »to accompany« cì‘ /šwå/ : cĆì’flã /nešwȩ̄/ »to be equal«, etc.

14. 2. Irregular Verbs

Additionally, there is a series of verbs whose flexion exhibits various irregularities. These include: • Þ‹a /ʾezal/ : Þ‹bĆã /nẹ̄zal/ (WS /nīzal/) (√ʾzl ) »to go«, which has two specific characteristics: a) In all forms which feature adjacent vowelless /z/ and /l/, the /l/ is assimilated (→ 3. 1.). Examples: Pf. òÛ‹a /ʾezza lṯ/ < /ʾezlaṯ/ »she went«, òÛfl‹a /ʾezze lṯ/ < /ʾezleṯ/ »I went« Impf. æŁìÛ‹bĆã /nezz lūn/ < * /nezlūn/ »they shall go« Part. Act. f.sg. dÛõ‹ča /ʾåzz lå/ < * /ʾåzlå/, m.pl. ³Û‹ča /ʾåzz līn/ < * /ʾåzlīn/ (but: Þfl‹ča /ʾåzel/ m.sg.) b) The Imp. is built without the first radical, and takes an /e/-vowel: Þfl‹ /zel/ »go!«.

• cČčña /ʾeṯå/ (√ʾty ) »to come«: The imp. is built without the first radical: cčñ /tå/ »come!« (f.sg. ðčñ /tåy/, m.pl. ëčñ /tåw/, f.pl. ´Ćíčñ /tåyȩ̄n/) The conjugation of ʾAp̄‛el is also irregular: Pf. pòíđa @/ʾaytī/ »he brought«; impf. cĆòîđã /naytȩ̄/ »he shall bring«, Part. cĆòîđß /maytȩ̄/ »bringing «.

• cìô /hwå/ (√hwy ) »to be, to happen«: in addition to the regular impf. cĆìôflã /nehwȩ̄/ »he shall be« there are also forms without /w/, e.g. dĆôã /nhȩ̄/ (3.m.sg.), æþìôã /nhōn/ (3.m.pl.). Furthermore, as already noted above (→ 7. 3.), the pf. Is often entclitic; in this case, the first radical /h/ is not pronounced, e.g. @³ğiòč× ëìžô /kåṯbīn-hwåw/ »they were writing«.

41 The form pìÛ /lwī/ is also attested. Lesson 14 127

• dčîy /ḥyå/ (√ḥyy ) »to live«: Alongside the Impf. pe. dĆzflã /neḥḥȩ̄/ and the inf. pe. dčzflß /meḥḥå/, forms which conform to the class I-ʾÅlap̄ are also attested: impf. dĆzĆã or dĆybĆã /nẹ̄ḥȩ̄/ (WS or /nīḥȩ̄/), inf. dčybĆß /mẹ̄ḥå/ (WS /mīḥō/). The paradigm for dčîy /ḥyå/ »to live« partly follows the class III-y, and partly the class mediae geminatae . a) Pf. imp. and part. des pe. are build according to III-y: dčîy /ḥyå/ »he lived«, oy /ḥyī/ »live!«, dĆîčy /ḥåyȩ̄/ »living«. b) Forms with preformatives comply with the rules of the class mediae geminatae : Impf. pe. dĆzflã /neḥḥȩ̄/ »he shall live«, inf. pe. dčzflß /meḥḥå/ »living« Pf. ʾAp̄. oyđa /ʾaḥḥī/ »he gave life«, impf. ʾAp̄. dĆzđã /naḥḥȩ̄/ »he will give life «; Pf. ʾEttap̄. oy đñña /ʾettaḥḥī/.

• sžôđí /ya hḇ/ (< * /yehaḇ/, √yhb ) »to give«: in the pf. pe., the / h/ is not pronounced, with the exception of the 3.f.sg. òđÀÀğjôflí /yehbaṯ/ »she gave« and the 1.c.sg. òflğjôflí /yehbeṯ/ »I gave«: sžôđí /ya hḇ/ »he gave« òČjžôđí /ya hḇt/ »you gave«, etc. The imp. is Čkô /haḇ/ »give!« (without the first radical). This verb never builds an imp., and only very rarely an inf. (Čkôß /mhaḇ/ »giving«). Instead, the corresponding forms of the verb with the same meaning, Þflòflã /nettel/ »he shall give« ( √ntl < * /ntn/), are used. This latter, in turn, does not build a pf.: Impf. Þflòflã /nettel/ »he shall give«, etc. Inf. Þđòflßğ /mettal/ »giving «. The ʾEṯpe. sflôČíña /ʾeṯīheḇ/ »he/it was given« follows a regular conjugation.

• ČÑÜm /īlep̄/ (√ylp ) or ČÑđÛbĆã /nẹ̄lap̄/ »to learn« : the Pa ‛‛ el ČÑÛđa /ʾallep̄/ »to teach« is built according to the

class I-ʾÅlap̄. In the Impf. and Part., ʾÅlap̄ is generally not written: Pa. Impf. ČÑÜđã /nallep̄/ »he will teach« Pa. Part. ČÑÜđß /mallep̄/ »teaching«.

• Õ܍ /sleq/ (√slq ) »to go up«: in all forms in which /s/ and /l/ appear adjacent to one another, / l/ is (progressively) assimilated (→ 3. 1.). The forms (Pe., ʾAp̄., ʾEttap̄.) look the same as if they were formed from the class I-n, e.g. Impf. Pe. ÕđŽflã /nessaq/ < * /neslaq/ »he shall go up« Imp. Pe. Õđ /saq/ »go up!« Inf. Pe. ÕđŽflß /messaq/ < * /meslaq/ »going up« Pf. ʾAp̄. Õflđa /ʾasseq/ < * /ʾasleq/ »to bring up« Impf. ʾAp̄. ÕflŽđã /nasseq/ < * /nasleq/ »he shall bring up«.

Lektion 14 128

• Áflô‰ /rheṭ/ »to run«: The imp. is Šô /harṭ/ »run!« (metathesis). Additionally, Áô /haṭ/ is also attested.

• |đÀÀØ‘a /ʾeškaḥ/ (√škḥ) »to find, to be able«: With the exception of the pass. part. |nØ‘ /šḵīḥ/, this verb only builds ʾAp̄‛el-forms, which, possibly owing to the /š/, feature the unusual vowel sequence /e-a/: Pf. ʾAp̄. |đÀÀØ‘a /ʾeškaḥ/ »he found« Impf. ʾAp̄. |đÀÀØ’flã /neškaḥ/ »he shall find« Part. ʾAp̄. |đÀÀØ’flß /meškaḥ/ »found« Inf. ʾAp̄. ŁìzčÀÀØ’flß /meškåḥū/ »finding «. The ʾEṯp‛el functions as the T-passive: |đÀÀ×ò‘a /ʾeštḵaḥ/ »be found, exist«.

14. 3. Note on Word Order in Verbal Clauses

We have already seen the different possible word orderings for nominal clauses above (see → 5. 1. 2.) (this also includes sentences in which the part. act. functions as a predicate). The order of sentence elements is similarly free in verbal clauses, i.e. in clauses with a finite verb form as a predicate (Pf., Impf., Imp.). The sentence structures V-S-O and S-V-O (V = Verb, S = Subject, O = Object) are the most common. Examples: dôčÛđü@|đÀÀğjđ’ßë@aƆčyë2 /w-ḥåḏȩ̄ wa-mšabbaḥ l-ʾalåhå/ »re rejoiced and praised God.« (AMS 442) dčljbđÛ@dÔmğ…‹@fčÛ@³ÜnÔ‘ /šqīlīn-låh zaddīqȩ̄ l-ʾar‛å/ » the righteous bear the earth« óĆäčî×@åČß@ÝflÀča@aŠŽflği@ĆÀÀČç@dčí‰đa /ʾaryå ḡȩ̄r besrå ʾåḵel men kyånȩ̄h/ » the lion eats meat by its nature«.

Where an object or an adverbial determiner occurs at the opening of a sentence, this usually indicates stress, e.g. dĆzĆã@ÞþìÈflã@“čãa@æa@oi /bī ʾen ʾnåš ne‛ol nẹ̄ḥȩ̄/ »If anyone enters by me, he will be saved« (Jn 10,9).

Certain logical sentence particles such as åíĆ… /dȩ̄n/ »but« and Ćç /gȩ̄r/ »even« never occur at the beginning of a sentence, instead often following the first element of the sentence, which can sometimes comprise two words. In this regard, they correspond to the Greek particles de (gr. δέ) and gar (gr. γάρ). In English translations, these particles, which are used very frequently, can simply be omitted. Examples: ČÑflìčîÛ@Šđßa@Ł†đy@åíğĆ…@aŠÐđ /såp̄rå dȩ̄n ḥaḏ ʾemar l-Yåwsep̄/ »a scribe (but) said to Joseph« Êþì’m@tŁëñ@åíğĆ…@æþìôÛ@Šđßča @/ʾåmar l-hōn dȩ̄n tūḇ Īšō‛/ »So Jesus again said to them« (Jn 10,7) dčäčîäflği@oÛ@dĆäği@ïđßìčí@åČß@Ćğç@hčÛ /lå ḡȩ̄r men yåwmay bnȩ̄lī benyånå/ » for I have never (yet) in my life constructed a building«.

14. 4. Verbs with Proleptic Object Suffixes

The phenomenon of the anticipation (p rolepsis ) of an object through an object suffixed attached to the verb is very common in Syriac, e.g. aŠrđÛ@ôƉğ†đ‘ /šadrȩ̄h la-ḇrå/ »he sent his son«, literally.: »he sent him, (namely) the son« (rarely: aŠği@ôƉğ†đ‘ /šadrȩ̄h brå/)

Lesson 14 129

dčznÜ‘@ïžôŁìÜğjđÓ /qablūhy šlīḥå/ »they received the apostle«.

14. 5. Question Clauses

Polar questions are not marked in Syriac. There is no specific question particle. Whether a sentence is meant as an assertion or a question can only be decided on the basis of context, e.g.: dčîÜđ@dčäôğ…@óĆßa@ožô ðòžãđa /ʾantt y-hī ʾemmȩ̄h d-hånå ṭalyå/ »could mean either »you are the mother of this boy« or »Are you the mother of this boy?«.

Non-polar questions are marked using various interrogative pronouns or adverbs (→ 5. 3.). They usually come at the beginning of a sentence, although this is by no means always the case. Examples: aŠmŠđ‘ @cČčòÜĞyfl… @a č†íđağ /ʾaydå deḥelṯå šarrīrå/ »which religion is true?« òma@dčäčß@dčîđ@åČß@ÝflÈÛ /l-‛el men šmayyå månå ʾīṯ/ »what is above the sky?« æþìôí đòma@Łìäđߣ…@dĆÀÀČşiČčò×@´Üô /hålȩ̄n kṯåḇȩ̄ ḏ-man-ū ʾiṯayhōn/ »whose books are these?« (literally: these books, whose are they?)

14. 6. Subordinate Clauses

By far the most common form of subordinate clause in Syriac is the relative clause, introduced with ğ… /d-/ (relative pronoun), e.g. dôčÛađ…@óÜØîô@ŁìíŁìôğ…@„ğ čòîđi /baytåḵ d-hūyū hayklȩ̄h da-ʾlåhå/ »your house, which is the temple of God«.

Relative clauses can also be used in place of non-verbal sentence elements such as an object or (less commonly) a subject. In these cases, constructions with ğ… /d-/ are often used, such as Ł…@dčqú /ṣḇå ḏ -/ »to be willing, that«; Ł… @dčÈi /b‛å ḏ-/ »to seek, that«, ğ…@Šđßa /ʾemar d-/ »to say, that«, e.g. óĆãìčç@ïđäđ’ß đğ…@óĆßa@ôĆñõŒy2 /ḥzåṯȩ̄h ʾemmȩ̄h da-mšannay gåwnȩ̄h/ »his mother saw (him,) that his colour was altered«.

For this reason, /d-/ (like the Greek ὃτι hoti ) often precedes direct speech.

Relative clauses can also function as adverbs, in which case they are used in the same way as conjunctional clauses (i.e. subordinate clauses introduced with conjunctions). Relative clauses often have a final, causal or conditional meaning, or take the function of a that-clause. Examples: Öþë ò’flãğ…@óĆği@ëì žô@å bč×í /kå ʾȩ̄n-wåw bȩ̄h d-neštoq/ »(they) rebuked him, that he should be quiet« (Lk 18,39) dč튁Łìãğ…@óÜčÓ@dčÇŁ†čí@hčÛğ…@óĆäflß čÓŠd@ čÇ@hčÛa /ʾellå ‛årqå mennȩ̄h d-lå yåḏ‛å qålȩ̄h d-nuḵråyå/ »but (they) will flee him; for they know not the voice of strangers« (Jn 10,5)

Lektion 14 130

However, such clauses are far more frequently introduced with a particle constructed from a preposition together with d-. These particles include: Ł†đ× /kaḏ/ »at the time, when, whereas« (temporal and causal) ğ…@åČß /men d-/ 1. »since« 2. »(bigger) than« (comparative) ğ… ÝđÇ /‛al d-/ »then, that; because« ğ…@‰ òčÀÀğiđČ @åČß /men båṯar d-/ »after« ğ…@Ýİß /meṭṭol d-/ »because« (WS meṭṭul d-) ğ…@Ł†đîi /b-yaḏ d-/ »because« ğ…@ƒíđa /ʾayḵ d-/ »just as« (comparative); »so that« (final und consecutive) Ł…@dčäčÀÀØíđa /ʾaykannå ḏ-/ »like« Ł…@dčß †Çđ2 /‛ḏammå ḏ-/ »until«

The following particles are also used as conjunctions without d-: Ł†đÇ /‛aḏ/ »until; as long as; (even) before; hčÛ@Ł†đÇ /‛aḏ lå/ »before« (to introduce temporal clauses) ƒíđa /ʾayḵ/ »(so) like« (comparative).

14. 7. Conditional Clauses

Conditional clauses can be distinguished according to whether the conditions they specify are real or unreal: real conditions (i.e. conditions presented as possible) are introduced with æa /ʾen/ »if, in the event that«, or when expressed negatively with hčÛ@ æa /ʾen lå/ or (more often) hčÛa /ʾellå/ »if not«. Unreal conditions (i.e. conditions presented as impossible) are introduced with ŁìÛa /ʾellū/ (< /ʾen/ + /lū/; cf. arab. law , used to introduce unreal conditions .), or when expressed negatively with hčÛ@ŁìÛa /ʾellū lå/. In general, conditional clauses (protasis) precede the corresponding main clause (apodosis). • Real conditions (conjunction æa /ʾen/ »if, in the event that«) The use of tense in the protasis is variable. Most common is the part. act.; less common the impf.; the pf. is used only to express the past. The use of tense in the apodosis is also variable (however, it often takes the same tense as the protasis).

• Unreal conditions (conjunction ŁìÛa /ʾellū/ »if«) The protasis usually employs the pf. or part. act. + cìô /hwå/. The apodosis usually employs the part. act. + cìô /hwå/. Examples: åđÛ@åđänÛğ‹ča@åđäy@hčÛaë@cČčñ@dčãþìàÌĆô@ñìÛ@åđàđÇ@c ñañğ…@òžãđa@dĆğÀÀČiõú@æaČ /ʾen ṣåḇȩ̄-ʾantt d-tẹ̄ʾṯȩ̄ ‛amman lwåṯ hẹ̄ḡmōnå ṯå w-ʾellå ḥnan ʾåzz līnan-lan/ »if you want to come with us to the proconsul, then come with us; if not, we shall go now« (AMS 447f.).

Lesson 14 131

òžãđa @dĆğÀÀiõúŁ…@dčß@þìôi@åđÛ@Ł†flğèđã@sflôŠđ@òžãđa@Ł†ÔğÀÀčÏ@æa /ʾen påqeḏ ʾantt sarheḇ naggeḏlan b-håw må ḏ-ṣåḇȩ̄-ʾantt/ »if you wish to give orders, then hurry, punish us as you wish« (AMS 433) å‚đÀÀÐô@åíĆğ…@ŠđÀr×@æŠđyë đò‘a@hčÛ@ŁìÛa /ʾellū lå ʾeštåwḥarn kḇar dȩ̄n hp̄aḵn/ »If we had not delayed, surely we would have returned« (Gn 43,10).

14. 8. Vocabulary

A. afar /ruḥqå/ dčÔyŁë‰ struggle (< gr.) /ʾåḡō nå/ dčã þìČç ča book /sep̄rå/ aŠÐfl patience /msaybrånūṯå/ cČčñŁìãŠğjîđŽß trouble /ṭūrråp̄å/ dČčωŁì justice /kẹ̄ʾnūṯå/ cČčñŁìãb×

Verb Forms @ Pe. to go up /nessaq/ ÕđŽflã : /sleq/ Õ܍ @ Pe. to take, to seize on /nȩ̄ʾḥoḏ/ Ł…þìybĆã : /ʾeḥaḏ/ Ł†đya Pe. to put /nsīm/ ánŽã : /såm/ áč Pe. to run /nerhaṭ/ Áô Šflã : /rheṭ/ Áflô‰ Pe. to learn /nẹ̄ʾlap̄/ ČÑđÛbĆã : /īlep̄/ ČÑÜm

14. 9. Exercises

A. Translate the following:

@óĆàđÇ@şðìžô@Õ܍ đ…@cČčñbşÀÀčnğèđ@cČčòčîãčˆyaëNNN@şðìžô@åčíşŒčyŁ…@dčÔyŁë‰@åflß@dŽ’flã@ČÒča@Ł åíĆğ…@şðìô@òma 1 (Mk 15,40-41) @.áܑƉþëü (Mk 10,18) @dôčÛđa@Ł†đy@æa@hčÛa@dčrč @òîđÛ 2 @Z÷þìbčànÜÓđa@aĆŠÓòflß…@óÛ@“flàđ’ßđ…@dčîÜđ @òđjôflíë@NaŠÐfl@ÑđÛbĆã…@ôòržôđí@Zdčßbčß@dčq‰đ…@dčßë8 3 @³ÐğÀÀÀÜčíğ…@´Üíđa@æþìôܨ@ÑÜđߣ…@dčßbčß cč@ ìô8 @ZaŁč†y@cčòžäđ‘@dčßbčß@cč8ìôđ…@dčßë@NóĆàđÇ@cČìžô@ÑĆğÀÀÜčíë @@@ (AMS 435) Nâfl†flàÜ×@cČìžô@ÑĆğÀÀÀÜčí…@ZóĆjÜqë@óĆi@cìžô@Šđßđ…òflß @óĆäčÐÜđß@ğìôë@NóĆàđÇ@ëČìžô (Heb 12,1) åđÛ@ánŁ…@dčäô @dčãþìČçčü @ïžôìnİôŠflã@cČčñŁìãŠğjîđŽàđÀČië @4 ‰đ@ ČòčÀÀČië @cČčñŁìãbĆ× ‰đ@ òčÀÀČiëČ @cČčñŁìÔmŁ…‹@‰đòčÀÀği@Šôë@ÖþëŠÇ@´Üô@O@dôčÛaČ Č…@dč’čãŠđÀÀğiđ þëa@ @åíĆğ…@òžãđa 5 (1. Tm 6,11) NcČčñŁìØnØđß ‰đ@ ČòčÀÀČië @cČčñŁìãŠğjîđŽß@‰đòđÀÀČië@dčÀÀğiŁìyČ ‰đ@ òčÀÀČiëČ @cČčñŁìäčàîô (Mk 6,17) åčäđyþìîÛ@ôĆğ†yđa@cìžô@‰ †đ‘đğ ÷@ fl2…þëŠflô @ĆÀË@Łìô 6 B. Write out the following until familiar: @…ìčÓ…@É‘ñ@òä‘@dφi@ğóíòma…@dşîãìí†i@däßñë@cbßdäßñ@òä‘… @†Ó@å튑ñ @€Šíbi 1 @³jmûäi@däßìí@åmŠàÇ…@dşî−†ß@dşya…@dî‘ìä×@Ndäô@dyi@ói@†yë@åmŠŽÈi@dØÜß@ÙÜß N³jmûã…@ğóÜí…@dÏìԎîÏa@ÉĆ‘þìô@ðŠß@dôÛa…@d»‰ë@d’m†Ó@â†Ó@ìiŠÓ@Ndυ@còžäí†ß (SN 56)

Lektion 14 132

1 . . (SN 56) .

ܬ ܐܕܿ ̈ ܬܘ ܬ ܕ ܬ ܚ 1 ܕ ܐܕ̈ .ܗ ܘ ̈ ܘܕ ܐ ܘܗ ܝ ܐܕ ܪܘ ܡ .ܕ ̄ ܿ (SN 56) .ܕ ܕ

Lesson 15 15. 1. Verbs with Four Radicals and Related Matters

Some Syriac verbs have four radicals. These are for the most part denominated verbs. Examples:

Verb Related nominal form Ł†½đñ /talmeḏ /»to teach« a裆n½đñ /talmīḏå / »disciple« áflğç‰đñ /targem / »to translate« dčäčàğç‰đñ /targmånå/ »translator« pŠ‚đã /naḵrī/ »to estrange« dč튁Łìã /nuḵråyå / »foreign« ÝđÀÀÏŠđÇña /ʾeṯ‛arpal / »to grow dark, to hčÜflÏŠđÇ /‛arpellå /»dark fog« cloud over« æìíđğ Čña… /ʾeddaywan / »to be possessed cìíđ… daywå »devil« (< pers.) by a demon« Ł†flôÜđÏ /palheḏ / »to drive away«

There are only two verb stems for verbs with four radicals, an active stem of the type Ł†flôÜđÏ /palheḏ / »to drive away« and a passive stem of the type Ł†ôÜđÀÀÏña /ʾeṯpalhaḏ / »to be disturbed«. The flexion is analagous to that of the Pa ‛‛ el- or ʾEṯpa‛‛al .-stem of verbs with three radicals (some verbs are only attested in the passive stem):

Active Passive

Pf./Imp. Ł†flôÜđÏ /palheḏ/ Ł†ôÜđÀÀÏña /ʾeṯpalhaḏ/ Impf. Ł†flôÜđÀÀÐã /np̄alheḏ/ Ł†ôÜđÀÀÏòflã @/neṯpalhaḏ/ Part. Act. Ł†flôÜđÀÀÐß /mp̄alheḏ/ Ł†ôÜđÀÀÏòflß /meṯpalhaḏ/ Part. Pass. Ł†ôÜđÀÀÐß /mp̄alhaḏ/ Inf. @ ŁëŁ†ôÜđÀÀÐß /mp̄alhåḏū/ @ ŁëŁ†ôÜđÀÀÏòflß /meṯpalhåḏū/ @

In addition to verbs with four radicals in the narrow sense, there is a series of verbs which formally have four radicals (or four consonants), but which can be traced back to a three-radical base. These verbs follow particular conjugation patterns. The most important conjugation types are (1 = 1 st radical; 2 = 2 nd radical; 3 = 3rd radical):

• The Palpel type, i.e. reduplicated 1-2-1-2 structure (relatively common); examples: ÝflğjÜđi /balbel / »to confuse« ( √bll »to confuse«) ʌNj /za‛za‛/ »to shake« ( √zw‛ »to shake«) ŠđÀÀğçŠđç /gargar / »to drag« ( √grr »to drag«) Šđߊđß /marmar / »to embitter« ( √mrr »to be bitter«) ÝÔÜđÓ /qalqel / »to throw into confusion« (cf. √qll »to diminish«)

Lektion 15 134

• The Pa‛lel type, i.e. reduplicated 1-2-3-3 structure; examples: Ł…flğ†ČjđÇ /‛aḇdeḏ / »to make a slave of« (derived from ač†ČjđÇğ /‛aḇdå/ »slave«) åflãìô /håwnen »to mind«; ʾEṯpalpal åđãìôña @/ʾeṯhåwnan / »to be mindful« ( dčãìô /håwnå / »mind«)

• The Pa‛pel type, i.e. reduplicated 1-2-1-3 structure; e.g. “Šđ /ṭarṭeš / »to blot« ( √ṭrš »to spot«)

• The Pay‛el (also: Paylel ) type, i.e. 1-y-2-3 structure (or 1-y-2-2); examples: ŠđÀÀğjîđ /saybar / »to bear« ( √sbr ) flàîå ô /haymen / »to believe« ( √ʾmn )

• The Paw‛el (also: Pawlel ) type, i.e. 1-w-2-3 structure (or 1-w-2-2); examples: ‰đ‰ìđÀÀğçña /ʾeṯgawrar / »to chew the cud« ( √grr ) ‰đ‰ìđÀÀğiña /ʾeṯbawrar / »to be amazed« ( √brr )

Alternatively, these types can also be treated as (rare) stems of verbs with three radicals – like the Š/Saf ‛el- and Eš/staf ‛al-stem patterns given above in → 9. 4. In lexicons, they are listed together with the corresponding roots with three radicals. By contrast, the four radical verbs in the narrow sense discussed above are always listed as having four radicals.

15. 2. Verbs with Five Radicals

Verbs which formally have five radicals are very rare. For the most part, they exhibit the P‛al‛al structure, i.e. the reduplicated structure 1-2-3-2-3, examples: áđÜàđÜyña /ʾeṯḥlamlam / »to give forth seed of generation in sleep« ( √ḥlm »to dream«) p‹ëŒyña /ʾeṯḥzawzī / »to make a show or spectacle of onerself« ( √ḥzy »to see«) Stem formation and flexion are similar to that of the verbs with four radicals (the same vocalisation, plus a vowelless first radical):

Active Passive

Pf./Imp. áÜàđÜy /ḥlamlem / áđÜàđÜyña /ʾeṯḥlamlam / Impf. áÜàđÜzflã /neḥlamlem / áđÜàđÜyña @ /ʾeṯḥlamlam / Part. Act. áÜàđÜzflß /meḥlamlem / áđÜàđÜyòflß /meṯḥlamlam / Part. Pass. áÜàđÜzflß /meḥlamlam / Inf. @ ŁìàčÜàđÜzflß /meḥlamlåmū/@ ŁìàčÜàđÜyòflß /meṯḥlamlåmū/ @

Lesson 15 135

15. 3. Expressions of Comparison

In Syriac, adjectives do not vary in degree, i.e. there are no comparatives or superlatives. Instead, an increase in the degree of an adjective is usually expressed with Šmòđí /yattīr / »greater, more« or sč /ṭåḇ/ »very« (literally: »good«), e.g. aĆˆmòđí@cČčòčßşìčí /yåwmåṯå yattīrȩ̄/ »many days« Šmòđí oğèđ /saggī yattīr / »much more« s装@cbnğèđ @/saggī’ȩ̄ ḏ-ṭåḇ/ »very much«.

For comparisons, the simple adjective is followed by an expression introduced with the preposition åČß /men/ or with åČß Šmòđí /yattīr men/ »much more than« or åČß@sč /ṭåḇ men/ »better than«. Examples: dč’àfl‘@åČß@Šmòđí@Ë@cìžô @/hwå ḡȩ̄r yattīr men šemšå/ »he was fairer (literally: »more«) than the sun« dčzqŁì‘@åČß@sčNNN@aŠčÔma@cìžô@áfly‰ë @/w-råḥem-hwå ʾīqårå ... ṭåḇ men šuḇḥå/ »and he loved honour ... rather than glory«.

15. 5. Pendens Constructions

Pendens constructions are syntactic constructions in which an isolated nominal or pronominal element precedes a syntactially complete sentence. The prefixed element (pendens ) correlates with a snytactic constitutuent of the clause which follows it. The isolation of the pendens from the clause can be expressed in two ways: it is either resumed in the clause by a pronoun or an adverb; or else a clear sentence break occurs between the pendens and the clause, e.g. using a conjunction such as “and”, or a question pronoun .. As a rule, the pendens is stressed. The basic English translation is »as regards/as to/as for …«. Examples: ánŽđÀÀČië@óĆyŁë‰@ïžô@ağèđã@dčÀÀğiŁìy @/ḥubbå naggīrå-hy ruḥȩ̄h w-ḇassīm/ »Love is patient and kind« (1. Cor 13,4), (literally: »as regards love – its spirit is patient and (it is) kind«) òžãđa@åđß@òžãđa /ʾantt man ʾantt / »you – who are you?« (Jn 8,25) Šđßb½@oÛ@òma@a Ɔô@dčãa2 /ʾenå håḏȩ̄ ʾīṯ-lī l-mẹ̄ʾmar / »as for myself, I have the following to say«.

15. 6. Vocabulary

A. friend /råḥmå/ dč»č‡ dweller /‛åmōrå / a‰þìàčÇ small, junior /z‛ōrå / a‰þìÇ‹ @ hunger /kapnå/ dčäÐđ× four /ʼarb‛å/ dčÈği‰đa pure /daḵyå/ dčîđ… ecclesiastical /‛ẹ̄ttånayå/ dčîčã čñŁ†ĆÇ light /nahhīrå/ aôđã more than /yattīr men / åČß@Šmòđí humility /makkīḵūṯå/ cČčñŁì‚nØđß desert /maḏbrå/ cŠğiŁ†đß already /men kaddū/ 룆đÀÀ×@åČߣ @ desolate /šahyå/ dčîôđ‘ six /štå/ cčò À‘ bitter /marrīr/ ŠmŠđß thirteen /tlåṯa‛srȩ̄/ aĆˆŽÇ òčÛñđČ enemy /bʿeldḇåḇå/ dčrčq ğ†ÜflÈi thousand /’alpå / dčÀÀÐÛđa traveller /råḏōyå/ dčíþ룅 ‰ (pl. /’alpȩ̄ / dŽÀÀÐÛđa )

Lektion 15 136

way /šḇīlå/ hčÜnr‘ @ month /yarḥå/ dčyŠđí (pl. /yarḥȩ̄/ dĆyˆ đí ) Verb forms @ ʾEṯpa. to be disputed /neddarraš/ ”‰đ…òflã : /ʾeddarraš/ ”‰đ… ña @ Pa. to scourge /nnaggeḏ Ł†flğè đäã : /naggeḏ/ Ł†flğèđã Sap̄. to hasten /nsarheḇ/ sflôŠ đŽã : /sarheḇ/ sflôŠđ ʾEṯpe. to be cut /neṯpseq / ÕflŽÏòflã : /ʾeṯpseq / ÕflŽÏña Pe. to happen (a-a) /neḡdaš / ”đğ† Čèflã : /gḏaš / ”đ†çŁ Pe. to destroy (a-o) /neḥroḇ/ tþë Šzflã : /ḥraḇ / tŠy Pe. to perish /nẹ̄ʾḇaḏ / Ł† đÀÀ qbĆã : /’eḇaḏ / Ł† đÀÀ qa Pe. to enter /ne‛ol / ÞþìÈflã : /‛al / ÝđÇ Pe. to sow (a-o) /nezro‛/ Êþ뉌flã : /zra‛/ ʉ‹ Pe. to carry (e-a) /neṭ‛an / åđÈİflã : /ṭ‛an / åđÈ Pa. to arrive /nmanna‛/ Éđäđ¸ : /manna‛/ Éđäđß Pe. to take away (a-o) /neḡloz / ‹þìÜČèflã : /glaz / ŒđÜç ʾEṯpe. to be despoiled /neṯbzez / ‹flŒğiòflã : /’eṯbzez / ‹flŒğiña

15. 7. Exercises

A. Translate the following:

@ @ (Jh 15,13) Nïžôìč»č‡ @ČÑčÜy @ánŽã@óĆ’Ðđã@“čãağ…@òîđÛ@dčäô@åČß @ğl‰Ł… @dčÀÀğiŁìy 1 @dčäčÐÛŁìîi@Č”‰đ…ña@dčäô@Z÷þìÓŠđß@cČìžô@aĆŠÓòflß@æþìôÜ×@åČß@a‰þìÇ‹@Nåşnäi@dčÈği‰đa@óÛ@ë ìôë8 2 (MJ 10) Nïôşìčyđa @æþìôÜ×@åČß@Šmòđí@dčîčãčñ†ĆÇ (AMS 433) .òžãđa@dĆğÀÀiõú…@dčß@þìôi@åđÛ@Ł†flğèđã@sflôŠđ@òžãđa@Ł†ÔğÀÀčÏ@æa 3 (Mt 10,24) NôĆŠčß@åČß@a č†rđÇ@hčÛë@óĆğiŠÛ@åČß@ŠmòđíŁ…@a裆n½ğ ñđČ @òîđÛ 4 @ŒnÜç@Ndčîôđ‘@cŠğiŁ†đß@þìô…@hčÜàđÈqë @dČčωŁìİi @Z³yˆđí@åíƉòđi@a‰ñđa@æþìþìÜÛ@ìÛ‹a@åčßđñ@åČßë 5 @€‰Łëa@Ý¢@åflŽzđ½ë@Zâfl†flß@óĆi@ʉ…Œflß@hčÛë@ZëČìžô@åmŠmŠđß@ïôşìčß…@Ýİflß@ZaƇþìàčÇ@åČß@Ćç@cČìžô @ZæþìþìÜÛ@æþìôÈ čãŁìß…@čłÄÀÀčßşìčîqë@NdĆíþ룅č‡@ŁìäčÈİđ½@dşÀÀčîđÜy@dşÀÀčîđß@óĆi@³zđò’flß@åşnßìčí@dčîäčßñ @dÐÛđa@tŠyë@Na‰ñđü@ČÝđÇë@óĆäflß@ČÖŠÇë@ZþìÓþëa@dčØÜđ½@æbč@dØÜđß@ƒÜß@òîĆi@dčäčíŠfly@cČìžô@Č”đ†ç @cbşnğèđë@ZcČìžô@|đ×ò’flß@hčÛë@a‰ŁìrÇ@ŠđŽČyë@ZhÜnr‘ë@čłÄÀčy‡Łëa@ìÔflŽÏñaë@Zþìô@a‰ñđbi@dč’čäşîđäqđ… @eŁëaõŒČyë@ŠčØ’đ×…@a‰ñđü@ëČčñaë@Zåčßđñ@åČß@dĆí裆şn¤@ìÔđÐã@³yˆđí@čÅ‘@‰đòčqë@N룆đÀÀqaë@dčä ÐđØi@ëònČß (MJ 18-19) @NdŽjčq†ÜflÈi@åČß@Łë†đ×@åČß@Ćç @ñ‹Œđiña@ZfíƇþìàčÇ@åČß@dčÔnЍđ…@cČčòžämŁ†àđÛ8 @d»ˆi@Šİãòßë@İã@còşj@†ğjÇë@d今߅@ôñì׋…@aˆŽÇòÛñ@òä‘… @ÞþìÜČía @€Šíbi 6 @dîjç@d»‰…@cñìãŠi†¶@dØÜß@ÙÜß@þ늍þì×@³àÜÈÛ…@dî׋@æŠß@dàÜÇ@´’ß@dî@åČß… (SN 51)Nd×ß@æìia@dôÛa…

Lesson 15 137

B. Write out the following until familiar: @d»ˆi@Šİãòßë@İã@còşj@†ğjÇë @d今߅@ôñì׋…@aˆŽÇòÛñ@òä‘…@ÞþìÜČía@€Šíbi 1 @dîjç@d»‰…@cñìãŠi†¶@dØÜß@ÙÜß@þ늍þì×@³àÜÈÛ…@dî׋@æŠß@dàÜÇ@´’ß@dî@åČß… (SN 51)Nd×ß@æìia@dôÛa…

1 (SN 51) .

ܘ ̈ ܘܿ ܕ ܗܬܙܕ ܬ ܕ ܠܐ ܚ 1 ̈ ܬ ܘ ܕ ܙ ܢ ܕܼ (SN 51) . ܢܐ ܐܕ ܪܕ

Glossary a dčqđa /ʾaḇå/ father ; čqđaŽôd /’aḇåhȩ̄ / parents, and Ččòôc şÀÀčqđa /’aḇåhåṯå / forefathers (pl. ) Ł†đÀÀqa /’eḇaḏ / Pe. to perish ; ʾAp̄. to destroy dčqŁìğiđa /’abbūḇå / flute hčÜqa /’eḇlå / sarrow dčã þìČçča /ʾåḡō nå/ struggle (< gr.) dčãŁ…a /ʾeḏnå / ear ëča /’åw / or; ëča … ëča /’åw …’åw/ either ... or æþìnÜĆğèãëa /ʾewangelīōn/ Gospel (< gr.) aÞ‹ /ʾezal / Pe. to go dčyđa /ʾaḥå/ brother đyaŁ† /ʾeḥaḏ / Pe. to take; ʾEṯpe. Pass. åíĆŠya /’ḥrẹ̄n/, dčäíĆŠya /’ḥrẹ̄nå / other, another dčäíđa /ʾaynå/ which? (m.sg. ), ač†íđağ /ʾaydå/ which? ( f.sg. ), ´Üíđa /ʾaylȩ̄n/ which? ( pl.c. ); ŁìôŁ…@dčäíđa /ʾaynå ḏ-hū/ whoever, a certain ƒíđa /’a yḵ / like, with … /d-/ just as dčÀÀØíđa /ʾaykå/ where? åđÀÀØíđa /ʾaykan /,@dččäđÀÀØíđa @/ʾaykannå/ how?, with … /d-/ as, even as ÞþìÜ aČí /’ īlōl / September òma /ʾīṯ / there is ÝđÀa /ʾeḵal / Pe. to eat; ʾEṯpe. Pass. hč܁bĆß /mẹ̄’ḵlå / food dčàčףëa /ʾukkåmå / black hčÛa /ʾellå/ if not; æa hčÛa /ʾellå ʾen / unless dôčÛđa /ʾalåhå / God; òmbôčÛđa /ʾalåhåʾīṯ / divinely ŁìÛa /ʾellū/ if dčÀÀÐÛđa /ʾalpå/ 1000 ûđÛa /’elaṣ / Pe. to be necessary dčßa /ʾemmå/ mother; cČčòôşßa /’emmhåṯå/ (pl. ) ğ†nßđa /’Ammīd / Amid čaĆß´ /ʾåmẹ̄n/ Amen Šđßa /ʾemar / Pe. to say, to speak; ʾEṯpe. Pass. ðòđßa /ʾemmaṯ y/ when? æa /ʾen / if dčãa /’enå / I dč’čãa /’nåšå / sg. man, St. abs. one; St. abs.pl. people, certain; åşn’čãa /’nåšīn / (pl. )

Glossar 139

čîd č’čãa /’nåšåyå / human cČčñŁì’čãa /’nåšūṯå/ manhood òžãđa /’a ntt / you cČčñòžãđa /’anttṯå/ woman, wife, dŽ’flã /neššȩ̄/pl. women, wifes ođa /’assī / Pa. to heal; Eṯpa. Pass. ađŠ /’esar / Pe. to bind; Part. Pass. prisoner aĆˆnđa@òîĆi /bȩ̄ṯ ’assīrȩ̄/ prison dčÀÀÐÇđa /’a‛på/ double ČÒča /ʾåp̄/ also čÀÀd ÏþìԎîÏ a /ʾepīsqopå/ a bishop cõ‹‰a /ʾråzå / secret (< pers.) dčy‰Łëa /ʾurḥå/ way dčí‰đa /ʾaryå/ lion; cČčñìčí‡đa /’aryåwåṯå/ (pl .) dčljđa /ʾar‛å/ earth, land cčğ aò‘ /ʾeštå / bottom acČčñ /ʾeṯå/ Pe. to come; ʾAp̄. to make come dčãþëñđa /ʾattōnå/ oven a‰ñđa /ʾaṯrå/ place

l ğl /b-/ in a‰bĆi /bẹ̄ ʾrå / pit Ł†đi /baḏ/ because æþìČ磆đi /baḏḡon / therefore Œđi /baz / Pe. to plunder; ʾEṯpe. Pass. cČčñŒfli /bezṯå/ robbery Ýİi /bṭel / Pe. to cease; Pa. to cause to cease cČčñŁìÜnİi /bṭīlūṯå/ care, forethought Ýnİđi /baṭṭīl/ of no effect dđîđi /bayya / Pa. to console òčäîđi /baynåṯ/ between òîĆi /bȩ̄ṯ/ between “ni /bīš / bad cČčñŁì’ni /bīšūṯå/ wickedness cč îđiò /baytå/ house, room, temple; cĆòşÀÀči /båtȩ̄/ (pl .) dčÀ ¢@/bḵå/ Pe. to weep; Pa. to greatly bewail ÝflğjÜđi /balbel / to confuse Ł…þìzÜđi /balḥoḏ / with Pl.-suff. only, alone

Glossary 140

åČß@Ł†čÈÜfli /bel‛åḏ men / without dčäi /bnå/ Pe. to build; Eṯpe. Pass. dčäčîäfli /benyånå / building áflŽi /bsem / Pe. to enjoy; Pa. to delight; ʾEṯpe. = Pe. dčà Žđin /bassīmå/ pleasant aŠŽ fli /besrå / flesh 𮩠i /bsar / ʾEṯpe. to be despised ‰đòŽfliČ /bestar / back dčÈi /b‛å/ Pe. to seek điÈčÜh /baʿlå/ lord, owner dčrčq ğ†ÜflÈi /bʿeldḇåḇå/ enemy (< akkad.) aŠi /brå/ son; St. cs. ; dşÀÀčîđäi /bnayyå / (pl. ) dč’ččãa@ŠđÀÀi /bar ʾnåšå / man, people cČčñŠđi /barṯå/ daughter; cČčòşÀÀčäi /bnåṯå/ (pl. ) dčàčîÓ @ñžŠđi /ba rṯ qyåmå/ nun dčíŠđi /barråyå / outward aŠi /brå/ Pe. to create , ʾEṯpe. dčíþëŠči /bårōyå/ creator cČčòmŠi /brīṯå/ creation Ši„ /braḵ/ Pe. to bend the knee , Part. Pass. blessed; Pa. to bless cČčò׉Łìi /burkṯå/ blessing cč ÀÛŁò ëòi /bṯultå/ virgin ‰đČòči /båṯar / after

ê dčrç /gḇå/ Pe. to choose dčzčrç /gḇåḥå/ bald aŠrđç /gaḇrå/ man aŠčÀÀğjžäđç /ga nbbårå / hero cČčñŁëŠčÀÀğjžäđç /ga nbbårūṯå/ heroism hčÛþ룆ç /gḏōlå / plaits of hair †ç𔣠/gḏaš / Pe. to happen ìčç /gåw / inward; åČß@ìČč /l-ḡåw men / within dčíì čç /gåwåyå/ inner dčãìčç /gåwnå / colour ƒflzç /gḥeḵ/ Pe. to laugh; Pa. to mock Ćç /gȩ̄r/ for, but, indeed (< gr .)

Glossar 141 hčÜç /glå / Pe. to reveal; ʾEṯpe. dčíþìÜčç /gålōyå/ revealer cČčñŁìäčîÜđÀğçòflß /meṯgalyånūṯå/ revelation ŒđÜç /glaz / Pe. to take away sđäç /gnaḇ/ Pe. to steal dčrčäđç gannåḇå/ thief cČčòčÈç /g‛åṯå/ shout dčÀÀğiŠđç /garbå / leper; dčqŠđç /garḇå/ leprosy ŠđÀÀğçŠđç /gargar / Palpel to drag dčߊđç /garmå/ bone dčŁì ç /gušmå/ body

… ğ… /d-/ relative pronoun who?, which?, what?; he, she, they who, that, which a‰þìğifl… /debbōrå/wasp dčrôđ… /dahḇå/ gold æč… /dån / Pe. to judge dčäm… /dīnå/ judgement Šđíđ… /dayyar / to dwell aŠččíŁ†flß /meḏyårå / dwelling Ýfly… /dḥel / Pe. to fear cČčòÜĞyfl… /deḥelṯå/ fear cìíđ… /daywå / devil (< pers.); ʾEṯpe. to be possessed by a demon åíĆ… /dȩ̄n/ but, however dÓòčí… /dyåtẹ̄qȩ̄/ testament (< gr.) cČčò×Łë… /dukkṯå/ place, spot dčîđ… /daḵyå/ pure ŠđÀ… /dḵar / Pe. to remember dčß… /dmå / blood cČčñŁìß… /dmūṯå/ form, figure ƒflß… /dmeḵ/ Pe. to sleep cČčòÈßfl… /dem‛ṯå/ tear Šđß… /dmar /; ʾEṯpa. to wonder, to be amazed |đã… /dnaḥ/ Pe. to rise „fl‰Ł…đa /’aḏreḵ/ ʾAº. to obtain ”‰ … /draš / Pe. to dispute; ʾEṯpa. to be instructed

Glossary 142

ô dô /hå/ behold! aŁ†ô /håḏȩ̄/ this Łìô /hū/ he, ëô /håw / that, ŁìíŁìô /hūyū / it is he who … cìô /hwå / Pe. to be, to happen oô /hī/ she, ïô /håy / that åíĆğ†îô /håydȩ̄n / then dčÜØîô /hayklå / temple (< akkad.) åflàîô /haymen / Payel to believe cČčñŁìäčàîô /haymånūṯå/ faith ÙÜô /halleḵ/ Pa. to go cČčòÜđÜôđñ /tahlalṯå/ mockery ´Üô /hålȩ̄n / these dčäô /hånå / this æþìäflô /hennōn / they (3.m.pl. ), ´Ćäflô /hennȩ̄n/ they (3.f.pl. ), æþìäô /hånōn/ those (m.pl. )

ë ë /w-/, /wa / and ðë /way / Oh!, woe! ëÛh /wålȩ̄/ it is fit, proper

‹ åđÀÀČi ‹ /zḇan / Pe. to buy ; Pa . to sell dčäq‹ /zaḇnå/ time; åđÀqŒđi /ba-zḇan / once …õ‹flÖ2 /zåḏeq / it ought cČčòÓŁ…fl‹ /zeḏqṯå / alms dčÔmğ…‹ /zaddīqå/ upright dččÀÀğçëõ‹ /zåwgå / couple (< gr.) cč ‹òíğ /zaytå / olive tree Êõ‹ /zå‛/ Pe. Tottering (of the feet), an earthquake ʌNj /za‛za‛/ Palpel to shake cČčñŁì×õ‹ /zåḵūṯå/ victory dčî čÀÀ׋ /zakkåyå / victorious dčã‹ /znå / sort, kind (< pers.) ; dşÀÀčîđã‹ (pl.) a‰þìÇ‹ /z‛ōrå / small, junior ʉ‹ /zra‛/ Pe. to sow dčlj‹ /zar‛å/ offspring

Glossar 143

€ cŠrđy /ḥaḇrå/ friend Ł†đy /ḥaḏ/ (m.), aŁč†y /ḥḏå / one (f.) ŠđŽÇ †yđ2 /ḥḏa‛sar / 11 dččÀÀğjđ’ği@Ł†đy /ḥaḏ b-šabbå/ Sunday pŁ†y /ḥḏī / Pe. to rejoice; Pa. to gladden cČčñŁëŁ†đy /ḥaḏūṯå/ gladness ð‰čŁ†y /ḥḏåray / round about cčñ đŁ†y /ḥḏattå/ New (Testament) dčÀÀğiŁìy /ḥubbå/ love pìđy /ḥawwī/ Pa. to show Ščy /ḥår/ Pe. to look aŠ čîy /ḥyårå / glance cõŒy /ḥzå/ Pe. to see; ʾEṯpe. to appear cëŒfly /ḥezwå/ appearance cČčòİfly /ḥeṭṭṯå/, dİfly /ḥeṭṭȩ̄/ wheat (pl.) dôčİy /ḥṭåhå / sin dčîy /ḥyå/ to live; ʾAp̄. to give life dčîđy /ḥayyå/ alive ; dşĆîđy /ḥayyȩ̄/ life (pl.) hčÜîđy /ḥaylå/ strength dčànØđy /ḥakkīmå/ wise hčîÜđy /ḥalyå/ sweet dčàÜfly /ḥelmå/ dream; ʾEṯpalal to give forth seed of generation in sleep dčànÜy /ḥlīmå/ healthy ČÑčÜy /ḥlåp̄/ instead of ČÑÜđy /ḥallep̄/ Pa. to exchange; Šap̄., ʾEštap̄. to changed dč» /ḥmå/ father-in-law ; dŽôč» /ḥmåhȩ̄/ (pl. ) òđàđyña /’eṯḥammaṯ /; denominative ʾEṯpa. to provoke dč’àđy /ḥamšå/ five ŠđŽÈđ’àđy /ḥamša‛sar / 15 dč’ߣ yì /ḥumšå/ one fifth åđäy /ḥnan / we ŠđŽy /ḥsar / Pe. to be insufficient cČčñŁëŽđy /ḥassīrūṯå/ defectiveness a‰bĆy /ḥẹ̄’rå / free, nobel tŠy /ḥraḇ/ Pe. to destroy dč‘Šđy /ḥarråšå / magician

Glossary 144

“đy /ḥaš/ to suffer dč’đy /ḥaššå/ pain dčrč‘Łìy /ḥūššåḇå/ thought dčþì’fly /ḥeššōḵå/ darkness cČčòčy /ḥåṯå/ sister ; cČčñìşyđa /’aḥwåṯå/ (pl. ) dčßòčy /ḥåṯmå/ seal

 ÉđÀÀČj /ṭḇå‛/ Pe. to sink; ʾEṯpe. dčrč /ṭåḇå/ good; Adv. very cČčñŁìğjîđ /ṭaybūṯå/ goodness dčäčqŁì /ṭūḇånå / blessed dčàôþì /ṭohmå/ family (< pers.) a‰Łì /ṭūrå/ mountain hčÜčÜ /ṭellålå / shadow dčîÜđ /ṭalyå/ boy, young ÕÜ  /ṭleq / Pe. to disappear cčbàđ /ṭamʾå/ unclean dčÈ /ṭ‛å/ Pe. to err đÈå /ṭ‛an / Pe. to carry dč’ /ṭšå/ to hide oneself ; Pa. to hide; ʾEṯpa. Pass.

ð a裆ma /’ī4då / hand ; bčí裆şma /’ī4dayyå / (pl. ) and aŁ†ma /’ī4dȩ̄ / (pl. ) Ł†đîi /byaḏ / through, ğ…@Ł†đîi /b-yaḏ d-/ by means of Êđ†m2 /īḏa‛/ Pe. to know ; ʾAp̄. to make known; ʾEštap̄. to recognise dčÈmŁ†m /īḏī‛å/ noble dčÇğ†đß /madd‛å/ knowledge sžôđí /ya hḇ/ Pe. to give; Impf. Pe. Þflòflã /nettel / dčßìčí /yåwmå / day dčàč·a /ʾīmåmå / day dčí裆n¤ /īḥīḏåyå / singular, hermit ÝÜíđa /ʾaylel / ʾAp̄. to wail Ł†Üm /īleḏ / Pe. to beget ; ʾEtpe. a装ŁìÜđí /yallūḏå / child a装þìÜčí /yålōḏå / parent ČÑÜm /īlep̄/ Pe. to learn; Pa. to teach

Glossar 145

dčä čÀÀÐÛŁìí /yulpånå / study dčäčÀÀÐÜđß /mallp̄ånå / teacher dčàđí /yammå/ sea dčàČí /īmå/ Pe. to swear dčänàđí /yammīnå/ right hand Õfläíđa /ʾayneq / ʾAp̄. to suckle aŠčÔma /ʾīqårå / honour dčyŠđí /yarḥå/ month Êþì’m /Īšō‛/ Jesus tflòmČ /īṯeḇ / Pe. to sit dčq čñëđñğ /tawtåḇå/ settler ‰òmđČ /īṯar / Pe. to profit ‰đòđîß /myattar / excellent Šmòđí /yattīr / greater, overmuch

Ú cbč× /kʾå/ Pe. to reprove, to rebuke dčqb× /kẹ̄ʾḇå/ pain dčãb× /kẹ̄ʾnå/ just cČčñŁìãb× /kẹ̄ʾnūṯå/ justice dČčÏb× /kẹ̄ʾp̄å / stone Ł†đ× /kaḏ/ when ŁëŁ†đÀÀ× @ åČß /men kaddū/ already cČčñŁìq č†đ×ğ /kaddåḇūṯå/ lie dčr×ìđ× /kawkḇå/ star dčäčî× /kyånå / nature Ý× , Þþì× /kol / every, all hčÜnÜ× /klīlå/ crown ÝÜØđ‘ /šaklel / Šap̄. to finish; ʾEštap̄. Pass. (< akkad.) dčÀÀğjÜđ× /kalb å/ dog dččà× /kmå / how much?, how many? dČčÐä× /kenp̄å / wing dč’ä× /kenšå / multitude of people dčÐŽ× /kespå/ silver, money ŠđÀÀÐ× /kp̄ar / Pe. to deny oÛ @òđíŠ× /keryaṯ-lī/ I am sad d聊đ× /karḵå/ walled city dčߊđ× /karmå/ vineyard

Glossary 146 d荩đ× /karså / belly dčäčîݍ flŠ× /kresṭyånå/ Christ (< gr.) ČÑđ’đ×ña /’eṯkaššåp̄/ ʾEṯpa. to pray tđò×2 /kṯaḇ/ Pe. to write; ’Ap̄. to compose dčqČčò× /kṯåḇå/ book, handwriting dčqþëòč× /kåṯōḇå/ writer cČčñŁìqþëòč× /kåṯōḇūṯå/ art of writing dčäčqò‚đß /maḵtḇånå / autor dč‘Łëòđñ /taḵtūšå/ conflict, fight

Þ Þ /l-/ to, for hčÛ /lå / not; hčÛ … /d-lå / without dčÀÀğjÛ /lebbå/ heart “flrÛ /lḇeš / Pe. to put on dč‘ŁìrÛ /lḇūšå/ clothings sflôÜđ‘ /šalheḇ/ Šap̄. to inflame ìčÛ /låw / no, not cìÛ /lwå / to accompany ÁčÛ /låṭ/ Pe. to curse ñìÛ /lwåṯ/ with, near dčàzđÛ /laḥmå/ bread òîđÛ /layt / there is not ñŁìÐÛ /lp̄uṯ / according to, corresponding dčäč’Û /leššånå / tongue, language

â dčß /må /; dčäčß /månå / what? dčäčč½ /l-månå / why? bčßc /måʼ/ 100 ñbđßĆåí Č /ma’ṯȩ̄n/ 200 dčãbčß /må’nå/ vessel dčÇŁìğjđß /mabbū‛å/ spring cčò ÀžämŁ†ß /mḏī nttå / city, town âflğ†flß /meddem / something ôß /mhīr/ skillful ònß /mīṯ/ Pe. to die; ʼAp̄. to kill

Glossar 147

cčñìčß /måwtå / death Ýİflß , Þþìİß /meṭṭol / because of hčÛŁì’zđß /maḥšūlå/ storm dşÀÀčîđß /mayyå/ water ÝîĆØflß /mekkẹ̄l/ from that time, thence; dčÀÀØflß /mekkå/ from this place dč‚nØđß /makkīḵå/ humble cČčñŁì‚nØđß /makkīḵūṯå/ humility hčÛŁì’‚đß /maḵšūlå/ offence dčbđÜđß /mala ʾḵå/ angel cČčòÜflß /mellṯå/ word ÝÜđß /mallel / Pa. to speak, to talk hčÜčÜđß /mallålå / eloquent hčÜß /mlå / Pe. to be full; Pa. ; ʾAp̄. dčÀÀØÜđß /malkå / king; @cČčòØÜđß /malkṯå/ queen cČčñŁìØÜđß /malkūṯå/ kingdom O /men / from åđÀğß /man / who? dčß /må /, åğÀčß /mån /, dčäčß /månå / what? dčäčč½ /l-månå / why? Éđäđß /manna‛/ Pa. to arrive dčäčŽß /msånå / shoe Šđߊđß /marmar / Palpel to embitter aŠčß /mårå /, dčíŠčß /måryå/ Lord, God; dčíđˆčß /mårayyå / (pl. ) and cČčñ ëđˆčß /mårawåṯå/ (pl. ) cčñŠčß /mårtå / Lady; cČčñčˆčß /måråṯå/ (pl. ) cČččòyŁì’ß /mšuḥṯå/ measure dčzn’ß /mšīḥå/ Christ hčÛ òđß /maṯlå/ parable

åã dĆã /nẹ̄/ I beg! dčÀnrã /nḇīyå/ prophet Ł†flğèđã /naggeḏ/ Pa. to scourge ağèđã /naggīrå/ patient aôđã /nahhīrå/ light |čã /nåḥ/ Pe. to rest ; ʾEṯpe. dčzİflã /neṭḥå/ glittering Šđİã /nṭar / Pe. to keep; ʾEṯpe. and ʾEṯpa. Pass.

Glossary 148 dč’nã /nīšå / sign dč튁Łìã /nuḵråyå / foreign pŠ‚đã /naḵrī / to estrange dčþìàčã /nåmōså/ law (< gr.) sđŽã /nsaḇ/ Pe. to take dčãþìîŽflã /nesyōnå / temptation ÝđÀÀÐã /np̄al/ Pe. to fall down ÕđÀÀÐã /np̄aq/ Pe. to go out; ʾAp̄. to bring forth dč’Ðđã /nap̄šå / soul ČÑÔã /nqep̄/ Pe. to accompany Õđ’ã /nšaq / Pe./Pa. to kiss

÷ dčrč /såḇå/ old man/woman ÝđÀÀČj /sḇal / Pe. to carry ÉđÀČj /sḇa‛/ Pe. to be satisfied ŠđÀÀr /sḇar / Pe./Pa. to believe; ʾEṯpe. aŠrđ /saḇrå /hope cČčñŠđÀČj /sḇarṯå/ The Gospel cČčñŁìãŠğjîđŽß /msaybrånūṯå/ patience cčbnğèđ /saggī ’å / much, many Ł†flÀČè /sḡeḏ / Pe. to bow oneself; ʾEṯpe. Pass. đflğèČÑ /saggep̄/ Pe. to injure đ‰2† /sḏar / to set in order Ł†flô  /sheḏ / Pe. to witness áč /såm / to put dčäčİč /såṭånå / Satan hčÜ‚đ /saḵlå / foolish ÝØ đa /ʾskel / ʾAp̄. to play the fool; ʾEṯpa. hčÜčÀÀ×Łì /sukkålå / meaning, sense dčänØđ /sakkīnå/ knife oÛòa /’estlī / ʾEṯpe. to be thrown away Õ܍ /sleq / Pe. to go up; ʾAp̄. ; ʾEṯpe. hčÜčàfl /semmålå/ left hand ŠđÈ  /s‛ar / Pe. to do, to act còÀžänЍčğ /sp̄ī nttå / ship aŠÐfl /sep̄rå / book

Glossar 149 aŠ Ðč /såp̄rå / scribe ‰đòđ /sattar / Pa. to cover ; ʾEṯpa. a‰ čòfl /settårå / protection

Ê Ł†đÀČjÇ /‛ḇaḏ / Pe. to make; Šap̄. Çčr裆a /‛ḇåḏå / action, work ač†ČjđÇğ /‛aḇdå/ slave a裆čÀÀğjÈđß /ma‛båḏå / sorcery cčòİnğjđÇ /‛abbīttå / thick, heavy dčß đŁ†Ç /‛ḏammå / until ‰†Çđ2 /‛ḏar / Pe. Pa. to help a‰þ룆čÇ /‛åḏōrå/ helper aŠmğ†Çđñ /ta‛dīrå/ help dčîčã čñŁ†ĆÇğ /‛ẹ̄ttånåyå/ ecclesiastical dčÀÀğiŁìÇ /‛ubbå/ bosom ÕnÇđa /’a‛īq / ʾAp̄. to annoy cČčòÔčÇ /‛åqṯå/ sadness cõŒflÇ /‛ezzå/ goat dčäîđÇ /ʿaynå/ eye, fountain ´ĆÈÛ /l‛ẹ̄n/ before ÝđÇ /‛al / on, because of ÝflÈÛ /l-‛el /above ÝđÇ /‛al / Pe. to enter dčîčÜflÇ /‛ellåyå / upper dčàÜčÇ /‛ålmå / eternity, world dčàîđÜÇ /‛laymå / young man; cČčòàîđÜÇ /‛laymṯå/ young girl áđÇ /‛am / with dčàđÇ /ʽammå/ people Ł†đàÇ /‛maḏ / Pe. to be baptized a装ŁìàđÇ /‛ammūḏå / pillar hčÜàđÇ /‛amlå/ labour, trouble čäčÇd /‛ånå / small cattle dčäÇ /‛nå/ Pe. to answer flǎŠa /‛esrå/ 10 aŠÐđÇ /‛ap̄rå / dust dčÀÀğjŽflÇ /‛esbå / herb

Glossary 150 aŠğjÓŁìÇ /‛uqbrå / mouse aŠčÔflÇ /‛eqqårå / root dčqŠđÔÇ /‛qarḇå/ scorpion cčòqŁëŠÇ /‛rūḇtå/ Friday ÖŠÇ /‛raq / Pe. to flee ³’đÇ /‛aššīn / strong Ł…flòđÇ /‛atteḏ / Pa. to prepare aŠmòđÇ /‛attīrå / rich

Ò a‰bÏ /pẹ̄ʾrå/ fruit cŠÌđÏ /paḡrå / body “čÏ /påš/ Pe. to remain éđÜÏ /plaḡ/ Pe. to divide; ʾEṯpa. dğÀèÜÏ /pelgå/ half |đÜÏ /plaḥ/ Pe. to serve, to work dčäÏ /pnå/ Pe. to return ; Pa. to answer đÔÏŁ† /pqaḏ / Pe. to order dčã †ÓŁìÏčğ /puqdånå / command ÊŠÏ /pra‛/ Pe. to reward dčÀÀÏþëúŠđÏ /parṣōpå/ face, countenance (< gr.) ÖŠÏ /praq / Pe. and ʾAp̄. to save dčÓþëŠčÏ /pårōqå/ saviour ”ŠÏ /praš/ Pe. to separate cčòİn’Ï /pšīṭtå / the Pšīṭtå Version dčàČčçòÏ /peṯḡåmå / word (< pers.) aŠ òÏđ2 /pṯaḵrå/ idol (< pers.)

ú dčqú /ṣḇå/ Pe. to wish Ł…õú /ṣåḏ/ to hunt, to fish a裆číú /ṣåyyaḏå/ fisher Ł†í₣ú /ṣȩ̄ḏ/, …aĆú /ṣȩ̄’ḏ / beside, next to dč½ú /ṣalmå/ image cČčñþìÛú /ṣlōṯå/ prayer

Glossar 151

Ö ÝflğjđÓ /qabbel / Pa. to receive âčŁ†Ó /qḏåm / before cčòîčߣ†đÓ /qaḏmåytå / first ”flğ†đÓ /qaddeš/ Pa. to sanctify dč‘Ł… ŁìÓ /quḏšå/ holy dč’mğ†đÓ /qaddīšå/ holy áčÓ /qåm / Pe. to stand up; ʾAp̄. ; ʾEṯp. dčàčîÓ /qyåmå/ standing ÝđİÓ /qṭal / Pe. to kill dčàİÓ /qeṭmå/ ashes hčÜčÓ /qålå / voice ÝnÜđÓ /qallīl / light, little ÝÔÜđÓ /qalqel / Palpel to throw into confusion dčäÓ /qnå/ Pe. to gain dčäčîäÓ /qenyånå/ possessions dčßþìäÓ /qnōmå/ substance, person ÁđäÓ /qnaṭ/ Pe. to fear aŠÓ /qrå/ Pe. to read tflŠÓ /qreḇ/ Pe. to come near cČčòmŠÓ /qrīṯå/ village, field; dč퇣ìÓ /quryå / (pl. ) dĆ’Ó /qšȩ̄/ hard dčîč‘ŁìÓ /quššåyå / hardening

‰ dčÀÀği‰ /rabbå / great dčq‰ /rḇå/ Pe. to grow up còčğ ‘Łìä× ğl‰@ /rab knūštå / leader of the synagogue Čê‰ /raḡ/ Pe. to desire hčÜËfl‰ /reḡlå/ foot áđÀÀČç‰ /rḡam / Pe. to kill by stoning “đÀČç‰ /rḡaš/ Pe./ ʾAp̄. to be aware of đČÒ …‰2 /rḏap̄/ Pe. to pursue čãd þìrô ‰ /rahḇōnå/ earnest (< gr.) Áflô‰ /rheṭ/ Pe. to run dčyŁë‰ /ruḥå/ wind, spirit áfly‰ /rḥem / Pe. to love; ʾEṯpe.; ʾEṯpa.

Glossary 152

d軉 /råḥmå/ friend dčߣìy‰ /rḥūmå/ beloved dčÔyŁë‰ /ruḥqå/ afar dč’ Ć‰í /rẹ̄šå / head dč‚ ×‰n /rakkīḵå/ soft dč‚ čÀÀ×Łë‰ /rukkåḵå/ softening dč߉ /råmå / high dč߉ /rmå/ Pe. to put; ʾAp̄. to throw dč㉠/rnå/ Pe. to think dčäčîÇfl‰ /re‛yånå / mind, conscience dčÈ‘Łë‰ /ruš‛å/ impiety pñ‰đa /’artī/ ʾAp̄. to admonish

” ÞbĆ‘ /š ʾȩ̄l / Pe., Pa. to ask; ʾEṯpe. hčÛčaŁì‘ /šu ʾʾ ålå / question cČčòğjđ‘ /šabbṯå/ Saturday ğjđ‘đÀÀ| /šabbaḥ/ Pa. to praise cč þìğjyÀò ‘ñ /tešboḥtå/ glory dčÈrđ‘ /šaḇ‛å/ seven ÕđÀr‘ /šḇaq/ Pe. to leave cì‘ /šwå / Pe. to be equal tfl‹ì č‘ /šåwzeḇ/ Šap̄. to deliver; ʾEštap̄. Pass. (< akkad.) ačğ†yŁì‘ /šuḥdå/ bribe dşÀÀčíì‘ /šwayyå / Colon dčÓŁì‘ /šūqå/ street |đÀØ‘ a /ʾeškaḥ/ ʾAp̄. to find, to be able dčäØ’đß /mašknå / place of dwelling dčİnÜđ‘ /šallīṭå/ ruler dčàčÜ‘ /šlåmå / peace dčàčÛŁì‘ /šullåmå / completion dč /šmå / name; cČčòôčàşÀÀ‘ /šmåhåṯå/ (pl. ) and dŽôč /šmåhȩ̄/ (pl. ) dčîđ /šmayyå / heaven Éđ /šma‛/ Pe. to hear dč’àfl‘ /šemšå/ sun “flàđ‘ /šammeš/ Pa. to serve cčò’ñğ /tešmeštå / ministry, service

Glossar 153 cč žäđ‘Àò /ša nttå / year; dşÀÀčîđä‘ /šnayyå / (pl. ) and ³şä‘ /šnīn / (pl. ) dčîčä‘ /šnåyå / infatuation cČčòÈč‘ /šå‛ṯå/ hour hčÛþìÈ‘ /š‛ōlå/ coughing aÐđ‘ /šappīrå / beautiful ÝđÔ‘ /šqal / Pe. to take a‰Š‘ /šrårå / truth aŠmŠđ‘ /šarrīrå/ true ‰Šđ‘ /šarrar / Pa. to assure cČčòğiŠđ‘ /šarbṯå/ family cč ‘Àò /štå / six åmò‘ /štīn / 60 pò‘a /ʾeštī / Pe. to drink dčíò’đß /maštyå / drink ò‘flÖ2 /šṯeq / Pe. to be still

ñ ŠđÀÀqñ /tḇar / Pe. to break; ʾEṯpa. ñþìyñ /tḥoṯ / under a裆n½đñ /talmīḏå / disciple Ł†½đñ /talmeḏ/ to teach òčÛñ /tlåṯ/ three dônßñ /tmīhå/ amazed; cČčòôşnß ñ /tmīhåṯå/ (pl.) åčßđñ /tammån / there hčÜčÓòđß /maṯqålå / weight åíƉñ /trȩ̄n/ two dčäčí‰ñ /tråyyånå / second hčÜÌč㉠đñ /tarnåḡlå / cock (< akkad.) dčljđñ /tar‛å/ door, gate ú‰ñ /traṣ/ Pe. to direct dčÈ‘ñ /teš‛å/ nine

Abbreviations

ʾAp̄. ʾAp̄‛el Act. active Adj. adjective Adv. adverb akkad. Akkadian arab. Arabic c. (genus) communis C consonant ʾEstap̄ ʾEstap̄ʽal ʾEštap̄. ʾEštap̄ʽal ʾEṯpe. ʾEṯp‛el ʾEṯpa. ʾEṯpa‛‛al ʾEttap̄. ʾEttap̄‛al emph. emphatic ES East Syriac f., fem. feminine gr. Greek hebr. Hebrew Imp. imperative Impf. imperfect Inf. infinitive m., masc. masculine No. number O object Pa. Pa‛‛el Part. participle Pass. passive Pe. P‛al pers. Persian Pf. perfect Pl., Pl. plural Pron.suff. pronominal suffix S Subject Abbreviations 155

Sap̄. Sap̄ʽel Šap̄. Šap̄ʽel sg., Sg. singular St. abs. Status absolutus (= absolute state) St. cs. Status constructus (= constructed state) St. emph. Status Emphaticus (= emphatic state) Suff. Suffix trad. traditional V verb v short vowel v̅ long vowel WS West Syriac

List of Symbols

I, II, III 1., 2., 3. radical < developed from > developed into * reconstructed form → see cited section number (→ …) / / denotes phonemic vocalisations [ ] denotes phonetical pronunciation - denotes a naturally long vowel Ø zero morpheme 156 Abbriviations

Abbreviations of biblical books

Old Testament Gn Genesis Ex Exodus K Kings

New Testament Mt Matthew Mk Mark Lk Luke Jn John Ac Acts Rm Romans Cor Corinthians Heb Hebrews Tm Timothy

Bibliography and Abbreviations for Works Cited

AMS Bedjan, P. (1891; ed.): Acta Martyrum et Sanctorum syriace II, Paris.

Arayathinal, Th. (1957) Aramaic grammar, (method Gaspey-Otto-Sauer), Mannanam.

Audo, Th. (1985) Sīmṯå ḏ-leššånå suryåyå, pålgūṯå 1-2 / Treasure of the Syriac language: part I–II (Repr. the edition Mossoul 1897), Losser.

Avinery, I. (1976) „The position of declined KL in Syriac”, Afroasiatic linguistic 3, p. 108-109. (1984) „The position of declined KL in Syriac”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 104, p. 333.

Barhebraeus (1907-13) Kṯåḇå ḏ-ṣemḥē / Buch der Strahlen. Die grössere Grammatik des Barhebräus: Einleitung, Traktat I-III, 1913, Traktat VI, Anhang (1907). Translation into German of the critically revised text, with a critical textual apparatus and an appendix of terminology, by A. Moberg. Leipzig.

Beyer, Kl. (1963) Semitische Syntax im Neuen Testament . Satzlehre. 2nd improved edition (Studien zur Umwelt des Neuen Testaments; 1), Göttingen.

BH, KdT Barhebraeus/Abū-'l-Faraǧ, Grīgōrīōs (1976): Kĕthābhā de-tunnāyē meghahhĕkhānē / The laughable stories. Syriac Text edited with an English translation by E. A. Wallis Budge, (reprint of the ed. London 1897), New York.

Brockelmann, C. (1928) Lexicon Syriacum auctore Carolo Brockelmann . Ed. secunda aucta et emendata, Halis Saxonum. (10 1965) Syrische Grammatik mit Paradigmen, Literatur, Chrestomathie und Glossar, Leipzig.

Bulut, A. (1996) Sözlük , türkçe - süryanice, süryanice – türkçe, Hengelo.

158 Bibliography

Cook, J. (2000) Bible and computer : the Stellenbosch AIBI-6 conference: proceedings of the Association internationale Bible et informatique, "From to byte", University of Stellenbosch, 17-21 July. Leiden, Bosten.

Costaz, L. (1964) Grammaire syriaque . 2nd edition, Beyrouth.

Dirksen, P. B. - A. Van Der Kooij (1995; eds.) The as a Translation . Papers Read at the II Peshitta Symposium, Held at Leiden, 19-21 August 1993 (Monographs of the Peshitta Institute Leiden), Leiden.

Duval, R. (1881) Traité de grammaire Syriaque , Paris.

EA, KdD Elijā von Anbār (1996): Ktābā d-Durrās̄ā (Ktābā d-Maʾwātā) des Elijā von Anbār . Mēmrā I – III, edited and translated by A. Juckel, (Corpus scriptorum Christianorum orientalium 559/560: Scriptores Syri 226/227), Lovanii.

Ewald, P. (1826) Lehrbuch der syrischen Sprache für akademische Vorlesungen, Erlangen.

F7ghWcWYo#v=onepage&q=syrische%20syntax&f=false> (last accessed 24.03.2019).

Goldenberg, G. (1983) „On Syriac Sentence structure“, in: M. Sôqôlôv (1983; ed.), p. 97-140. (1990a) „On Some Niceties of Syriac Syntax”, Orientalia Christiana Analecta 236, p. 335-344. (1991b) „On predicative adjectives and Syriac syntax”, Bibliotheca Orientalis 48: 5/6, p. 716-726. (1998) "Tautological infinitive", Studies in Semitic Linguistics. Jerusalem , Magnes.

Hartwig, E. (1893) Untersuchungen zur Syntax des Afraates : I. die Relativpartikel und der Relativsatz, Leipzig.

Healey, J. F. (2005) Leshono Suryoyo . First studies in Syriac = Leshana Suryaya, Piscataway, NJ.

Bibliography 159

Hezel, W. Fr. (1788) Syrische Sprachlehre durchaus nach seiner hebräischen eingerichtet , developed for the use of students, including the relevant paradigms in table form, Lemgo.

99WrO-ggLCSYJu2FEK_OnM6Ar2E#v=onepage&q=syrische%20syntax&f=false> (last accessed 24.03.2019).

HY Montgomery, J. A. (1966; ed.): The history of Yaballaha III, Nestorian patriarch and of his vicar, Bar Sauma, Mongol ambassador to the Frankish courts at the end of the thirteenth century . (reprint of the ed. Columbia 1927), New York.

Jengelin, K.; H. L. Murre-van den Berg; L. van Rompay; J. Hoftijzer (1991; eds.) Studies in Hebrew and Aramaic syntax presented to Professor J. Hoftijzer on the occasion of his sixty-fifth birthday , Leiden, New York.

Jenner, K. D. (1995) „Nominal Clauses in the Peshitta and ”, in: Dirksen, P. B. - A. Van Der Kooij (1995; ed.), p. 47-62.

Joosten, J. (1992a) „Biblical Hebrew w eqāṭal and Syriac hwā qāṭel expressing repitition in the past”, Zeitschrift für Althebraistik 5, p. 1-14.

Joosten, J. (continued) (1992b) „The negation of the non verbal sentences in Early Syriac”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 112, S. 584-588. (1996) The Syriac Language of the Peshitta and Old Syriac Versions of Matthew . Syntactic Structure, Inner-Syriac Developments and Translation Technique, Leiden.

KD Bīdpāī (1911): Kalila und Dimna . Syriac and German, edited and translated by F. Schulthess, Berlin.

Kiraz, G. A. (1988) The Syriac primer , reading, writing, vocabulary & grammar with exercises and cassette activities , 2nd edition, Sheffield. (2002) Lexical tools to the Syriac New Testament, 2nd edition, Sheffield.

160 Bibliography

Kṯåḇå qaddīšå ̄ (1954) Kṯåḇå qaddīšå h. dyåtẹ̄qȩ̄ ʿattīqṯå / ܕ ܗ , (The Trinitarian Bible Society), London.

Kṯåḇå qaddīšā ̄ (1979) Kṯåḇå qaddīšā h. kṯåḇå ḏ-dyåtẹ̄qȩ̄ ʿattīqṯå w-ḥḏattå / ܗ ܬ ܘ ܕܕ , [S.l.].

Kuty, R. (2001) „The position of the particle dên in New Testament Syriac”, Ancient Near Eastern Studies 38, S. 186- 199.

Learn Assyrian Online Learn Assyrian Online: The Syriac-Aramaic Vocabulary

(last accessed 24.03.2019).

Learn to Write in Aramaic Script Learn to Write in Aramaic Script: Writing the cursive scripts for Syriac/Assyrian Aramaic

(last accessed 24.03.2019).

Margoliouth, J. P. (ed.) (1927) Supplement to the Thesaurus Syriacus of R. Payne Smith , Oxford.

Mingana, Al. (1905) Clef de la langue araméenne ou Grammaire complète et pratique des deux dialectes syriaques occidental et oriental par l'Abbé Alphonse Mingana , Mossoul.

MJ Bedjan, Paul (1895; Hrsg.): Histoire de Mar-Jabalaha, de trois autres patriarches, d'un prêtre et de deux laïques, nestoriens , Paris, Leipzig.

Muraoka, T. (1972) „Remarks on the Syntax of Some Types of Noun Modifier in Syriac”, Journal of Near Eastern Studies 31/3, p. 192-194. (1975) „On the nominal clause in the Old Syriac Gospels”, Journal of Semitic Studies 20, p. 28-37. (1977) „On the Syriac particle iṯ”, Bibliotheca Orientalis 34, p. 21-22. (1987) Classical Syriac for Hebraists, Wiesbaden.

Bibliography 161

(2005) Classical Syriac : a basic grammar with a chrestomathy . With a select bibliography, composed by S. P. Brock. 2nd , revised edition, Wiesbaden.

Nestle, E. (1888) Syrische Grammatik , mit Litteratur, Chrestomathie und Glossar . 2nd, revised and improved addition., Berlin.

Nöldeke, Th. (1966) Kurzgefasste syrische Grammatik . (reprint of the 2 nd , improved edition, Leipzig 1898), Darmstadt.

Nowicki, P. (1916) Beiträge zur Syntax in Aphrems Memren , Freiburg i.B., Univ., Diss.

Pat-El, N. (2006) „Syntactical Aspects of Negation in Syriac”, Journal of Semitic Studies 51/2, p. 329-348.

Payne S. R. (ed.) (1879-1901) Thesaurus syriacus I-II , Oxford.

Peursen, W. Th. V. (2002) „Morphosyntactic and syntactic issues in the Syriac Text of 1 King 1”, in: J. Cook (2000), p. 99-111.

Robinson, Th. H. (1962) Paradigms and exercises in Syriac grammar . 4 th edition. Oxford. (2002) Robinson's paradigms and exercises in Syriac grammar . 5th edition, revised by J. F. Coakley, Oxford

Sôqôlôv, M. (ed.) (1983) , Aramaic and the Aramaic literary tradition / ha- Arammîm, ha-arammît we-ham- masôret has-sifrûtît ha-arammît, Ramat-Gan. (2012) A Syriac lexicon . A translation from the ; correction, expansion, and update of C. Brockelmann's Lexicon syriacum. 2nd corrected edition, Winona Lake.

SN Vööbus, Arthur (1961; ed.): The statutes of the school of Nisibis . Translated and furnished with a commentary, Stockholm.

SR Selb, W. – H. Kaufhold (2002): Das Syrisch-römische Rechtsbuch . Bd. I Einleitung, II Texte und Übersetzungen und III Kommentar, Wien.

162 Bibliography

Thackston, Wh. M. (1999) Introduction to Syriac . an elementary grammar with readings from Syriac literature, Bethesda.

Ungnad, A. (1992) Syrische Grammatik , mit Übungsbuch . (reprint of the 2nd, improved edition. München Beck 1932), Hildesheim.

VA Callisthenes (1976): Vita Alexandri Magni . Being the Syriac version, edited from five , of the Pseudo-Callisthenes, with an English translation; accompanied by an historical introduction on the origins and the various Oriental and European versions of the fabulous history of Alexander, with notes, glossary, appendixes, variant readings, and indexes. Edited by E. A. Wallis Budge, (reprint of the edition Cambridge 1889), Amsterdam.

Van Rompay, L. (1991) „Some reflections on the use of the Post-Predicative hwā in Classical Syriac”, in: K. Jengelin; H. L. Murre-van den Berg; L. van Rompay; J. Hoftijzer (1991; eds.), p. 210-219.

Voigt, R. (1997) „Das Vokalsystem des Syrischen nach Barhebraus“, Oriens Christianus 81, p. 36-72. (1989) „Besprechung von T. Muraoka: Classical Syriac for Hebraists, Wiesbaden 1987“, Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft 139, p. 426-427. (1994-1995) „Die Verba primae w und j im Syrischen“, Orientalia Suecana , 43-44 [1996], p. 187-195. (1998) „Das emphatische p des Syrischen“, Symposium Syriacum VII (Uppsala 1996), ed. by R. Lavenant, Rom: Pontificio Istituto Orientale, (Orientalia Christiana Analecta 256), p. 527-537. (1999) „Anmerkungen zu einer neuen Grammatik des Syrischen (d.i. T. Muraoka: Classical Syriac - A basic grammar with a chrestomathy, Wiesbaden 1997)”, Orientalistische Literaturzeitung 94, p. 146-162.

Weninger, St. (ed.) (2011) The Semitic languages: an international handbook . (Handbücher zur Sprach- und Kommunikationswissenschaft ; 36), Berlin.

Wertheimer, A. (2001) „Special types of clefts sentences in Syriac”, Journal of Semitic Studies 46/2, p. 221-241. (2002) „Syriac Nominal Sentences”, Journal of Semitic Studies 47/1, p. 1-22.

Bibliography 163

Williams, P. J. (2001) Studies in the syntax of the Peshitta of 1 Kings, Leiden.

7dneVTkC&oi=fnd&pg=PR13&dq=syrische+syntax&ots=Cd6G1BQqoT&sig=IFaVIPaX33sQaOYiArRNIm7AjMg#v=onepage&q=syrische%20syntax&f=fl se> (last accessed 24.03.2019).